JP2023060422A - Cooker and cooking system - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a cooker and a cooking system high in user convenience in which voice input is possible, and which allows cooking condition data to be acquired from outside.SOLUTION: A cooker includes a control device for controlling heating means and an input operation unit for receiving input of a user. The input operation unit includes a touch type input key for selecting a cooking mode, a control menu item, etc. The input operation unit detects a touch state of the input key and commands application of a voice input mode to the control device. The control device enables recipe data to be acquired from outside by voice input when a command for the application of the voice input mode is received from the input operation unit while a standby time initial screen is being displayed. A setting command for a control condition from the user applied to the recipe data is configured so as to be acquired directly by the control device, or voice input data on a desired control condition is caused to be acquired through external voice input equipment or a communication terminal, and the cooker is caused to acquire the data through a communication network.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 38

Description

The present disclosure relates to a heating cooker that heats an object to be heated, such as a pan placed on a top plate, and a cooking system that uses the heating cooker.

In general, there are three main types of cookers, depending on the environment in which they are used.
One of them is a so-called "built-in type" installed in kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter. The second type is a "stationary type" that is used by placing it in a predetermined position of kitchen furniture like a gas stove (also called "gas combustion table"). The third type is a small and portable "desktop type" that is used by placing it at any position on a dining table or the like.

Among the "built-in type" heating cookers, there are many compound-type heating cookers equipped with a plurality of types of heating sources, and they are popular because they can handle various types of cooking. However, since it is installed inside the kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed according to the standard of general kitchen furniture. The degree of difficulty is remarkably low, and the degree of difficulty to make it a practical product is high.

As a representative compound type heating cooker that can expand the range of cooking, there is a grill chamber (also called "oven chamber" or "heating chamber" that is heated by a heat source inside the main body, but hereinafter collectively referred to as "heating chamber ), and microwaves from a microwave heating source are introduced into the heating chamber (see Patent Document 1).

In the composite heating cooker disclosed in Patent Document 1, for example, different types of heating means are used above the top plate (first location) and in the inner space of the heating chamber (second location). Can be heated and cooked. Therefore, there is an advantage that various kinds of food can be handled. In this heating cooker, if the user's desired cooking condition data (recipe data) for the food to be cooked can be obtained from the outside via a network or a communication terminal device, the convenience will be further improved.

On the other hand, conventionally, communication is performed between a communication terminal device such as a smartphone and a heating cooker, and recipe data corresponding to a cooking recipe selected by the communication terminal device is transmitted from the communication terminal device to the heating cooker. Therefore, a heat cooking system for performing heat cooking has been proposed (see Patent Document 2, for example).

Although Patent Document 2 is not a composite heating cooker, it is a heating cooker (gas combustion type heating cooker) having a plurality of heating units (for example, a right stove, a left stove, and a rear stove) and having a communication function. , proposes a configuration in which when a user operates a communication terminal to select a specific recipe from a cooking menu, the heating cooker collectively acquires heating condition data for a plurality of heating units.

Furthermore, Patent Literature 3 proposes a menu creation support device that efficiently supports the creation of healthy menus that contain nutrients suitable for the user and can be created with existing ingredients.

Furthermore, Patent Literature 4 proposes a nutritional component display system including a server device connected to a network and a client device (personal computer, etc.). This is a system that analyzes and displays the amount of nutritional components for each ingredient each time it is input by the user.

Furthermore, Patent Document 5 proposes a speech recognition device in which pressing a button enters a speech input state and releasing the button terminates the speech input state.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-68598 (page 1, FIG. 44) JP 2017-106685 A Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-243326 JP 2006-139554 A Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-42890

In recent years, there has been an increasing interest in various types of cooking and needs for dietary management at home and on an individual basis.
Among the heat cookers, especially in a compound heat cooker, the setting of control conditions (for example, heat power, heating time, etc.) becomes complicated as the number of heating means increases. Therefore, if the user can select a cooking menu, acquire cooking condition data (recipe data), and easily use this data, convenience will be improved.
However, the techniques described in Patent Documents 3 and 4 only show a large-scale (for specialists) menu information extraction system and a nutritional component amount search (information processing) system, and the input of the heating cooker No consideration has been given to reducing the Therefore, even the techniques described in Patent Literatures 3 and 4 have not fully met the user's expectations of reducing the load of input operations.
Furthermore, even with the technique described in Patent Document 5, it was necessary to keep pressing one input button during the period of voice input, and it was not possible to reduce the user's operation.

The main purpose of the present disclosure is to obtain a highly convenient heating cooker and a heating cooking system that can handle a wide variety of cooking by enabling voice input and improving user operability. .

The heating cooker related to the first disclosure includes
heating means;
an input operation unit that receives a user's command;
a communication unit that receives recipe data from the outside;
a notification unit having a display unit;
a controller;
The input operation unit has a touch-type input key for selecting cooking content,
The input operation unit transmits a voice input mode corresponding signal to the control device according to the touch state of the input key,
After activating the display unit, the control device displays a standby initial screen on the display unit,
When the control device receives the voice input mode corresponding signal from the input operation unit while the standby initial screen is displayed, the control device enables acquisition of the recipe data via the communication unit, and accepting a control condition setting command for the recipe data;
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker related to the second disclosure includes
a first heating means;
a second heating means;
a first input operation unit for receiving a user's command regarding the first heating means;
a second input operation unit for receiving a user's command regarding the second heating means;
a communication unit that receives recipe data from the outside;
a notification unit having a display unit;
a controller;
The first input operation unit has a touch-type input key A for selecting cooking content,
The second input operation unit has a touch-type input key B for selecting cooking content,
The 1 input operation unit instructs the control device to start a voice input mode according to the touch state of the input key A,
The 2-input operation unit instructs the control device to start the voice input mode according to the touch state of the input key B,
When the control device receives a command to start the voice input mode from the second input operation unit, the control device enables acquisition of recipe data related to the second heating means via the communication unit, and Accepts control condition setting commands for
canceling the setting of the voice input mode for the second input operation unit when a command to start cooking using the recipe data is issued from the second input operation unit;
It is a configuration characterized by

The cooking system according to the third disclosure includes
a heating cooker for heating an object to be heated;
A cloud server or an information processing terminal connected to the cooking device by wireless communication,
The information processing terminal or the cloud server has a function of transmitting recipe data to the cooking device,
The heating cooker has a function of acquiring the recipe data from the information processing terminal or the cloud server after the standby initial screen is displayed,
The heating cooker has a function of automatically switching from the touch input mode to the voice input mode according to the touch state of the touch input key,
The heating cooker 1 accepts input of control conditions related to the acquired recipe data in the state of the voice input mode;
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker related to the fourth disclosure is
a heating means for heating an object to be heated;
an input operation unit that receives a user's command;
an audio signal receiver that receives a command uttered by a user;
a communication unit that receives recipe data from the outside;
a notification unit having a display unit;
a controller;
The input operation unit has a plurality of touch-type input keys for selecting one of a plurality of cooking modes,
The input operation unit transmits a detection signal corresponding to the touch state of the input key to the control device,
After activating the display unit, the control device displays a standby initial screen on the display unit,
After activating the display unit, the control device displays information specifying the touch-type input key corresponding to the cooking mode on the display unit in a list state on the guidance screen,
When one of the cooking modes is selected by the input key, the control device determines switching of the voice input mode from the detection signal,
the control device accepting a control condition setting command by voice for the acquired recipe data;
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker related to the fifth disclosure is
a heating means for heating an object to be heated;
an input operation unit that receives a user's command;
a communication unit that receives recipe data from the outside;
a notification unit having a display unit;
a controller;
The input operation unit has an input key for selecting cooking content and a recipe acquisition key for permitting acquisition of the recipe data,
When the recipe acquisition key is operated, the control device starts a voice input mode,
After activating the display unit, the control device displays a standby initial screen on the display unit,
When the recipe acquisition key is operated while the standby initial screen is being displayed, the control device enables acquisition of the recipe data via the communication unit, and enables acquisition of the recipe data. receiving a control condition setting command in the voice input mode for
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker related to the sixth disclosure is
a heating means for heating an object to be heated;
an input operation unit that receives a user's command;
a communication unit that receives recipe data from the outside;
a notification unit having a display unit;
a controller;
The display unit and the input operation unit constitute a touch panel input device,
A guidance screen is displayed by the touch panel input device,
On the guidance screen, touch position information for selecting one of a plurality of cooking modes is displayed at the touch key position,
When the portion of the touch position information is touch-operated, switching to the first specific screen displaying the identification information of the cooking menu or the second specific screen displaying the identification information of the control menu,
The touch panel input device has a touch gesture determination device that determines the form of the touch operation in the state of the first specific screen or the second specific screen,
Switching to a voice input mode according to the determination result of the touch gesture determination device;
It is a configuration characterized by

The cooking system according to the seventh disclosure includes
a heating cooker for heating an object to be heated;
a first server connected to the cooking device via a network;
an audio input/output device connected to the first server via a network,
The first server has a function of transmitting command data for setting control conditions of a cooking menu to the heating cooker,
The first server has a function of acquiring data received by the voice input/output device from a user's voice input,
The heating cooker has a function of acquiring the recipe data from the first server after the standby initial screen is displayed,
The heating cooker has a function of automatically switching from the touch input mode to the voice input mode according to the touch state of the touch input key,
receiving the command data of the control conditions related to the recipe data acquired from the first server in the state of the voice input mode;
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker related to the eighth disclosure is
a heating means for heating an object to be heated;
an input operation unit having touch-type input keys for receiving user commands;
a communication unit that receives recipe data from the outside;
a notification unit having a display unit;
a transmitter;
a controller;
After activating the display unit, the control device selectably displays the identification information of the cooking mode or the control menu on the display unit,
The input operation unit switches the input mode of the control device to a voice input mode when the cooking mode or the control menu is selected by the input key,
The control device transmits a voice input mode start notification to the outside from the transmission unit,
During a period in which the cooking mode or the control menu is displayed on the display unit, the control device receives a control condition setting command from a user regarding the cooking mode or the control menu;
It is a configuration characterized by

The heat cooking system according to the ninth disclosure includes:
a heating cooker having a signal transmission unit and a communication unit and heating an object to be heated;
a cloud server connected to the cooking device by wireless communication;
an audio input/output device connected to the cloud server via a network,
The cloud server has a function of transmitting command data for setting control conditions for a cooking menu to the cooking device,
The heating cooker has a function of acquiring the recipe data from the cloud server after the standby initial screen is displayed,
The heating cooker has a function of automatically switching from the touch input mode to the voice input mode according to the touch state of the touch input key,
The cooking device transmits a signal indicating the state of the voice input mode from the signal transmission unit to the voice input/output device without going through the network,
The cooking device accepts the command data of the control conditions related to the recipe data acquired from the cloud server in the state of the voice input mode;
It is a configuration characterized by

The heating cooker according to the tenth disclosure includes:
a heating chamber;
heating means;
an input operation unit that receives a user's command;
a communication unit that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
a notification unit having a display unit;
a controller;
The input operation unit has a plurality of input keys,
The input operation unit instructs the control device to start a voice input mode by operating a specific input key among the input keys,
After the main power switch is turned on, the control device receives a recipe data acquisition command from the specific input key, and when receiving the recipe data, determines whether or not a predetermined permission condition is satisfied, If the permission conditions are not satisfied, transmitting a notification of disapproval processing from the communication unit;
It is a configuration characterized by

The heat cooking system related to the eleventh disclosure includes:
a heating cooker having a heating chamber and a heating means;
and an information processing terminal connected to the heating cooker by wireless communication,
The information processing terminal has a function of transmitting recipe data to the cooking device,
The input operation unit of the heating cooker has a plurality of input keys, and a voice input mode can be selected by operating a specific input key among the input keys,
The heating cooker has a function of acquiring the recipe data when the specific input key is operated after the standby initial screen is displayed,
When the recipe data is received, the heating cooker determines whether at least one of the heating chamber and the heating means satisfies a permission condition, and if the permission condition is not satisfied, the communication unit sends a notification of disapproval processing to the information processing terminal from
When the information processing terminal receives the notification of the disapproval process, the information processing terminal displays information indicating the disapproval process on the terminal-side display unit;
It is a configuration characterized by

Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker capable of cooking using recipe data acquired from the outside using a network.
In addition, according to the heat cooking system of the present disclosure, when selecting a heat cooking menu, the touch state of the touch input key can be determined and automatically changed to the voice input mode. In addition, it is possible to input control conditions by voice, which contributes to the efficiency of user input operations and the reduction of the input load.

FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram 1 of a heating cooking system showing Embodiment 1 of the present disclosure. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram 2 of a heating cooking system showing Embodiment 1 of the present disclosure. FIG. 3 is a configuration diagram 3 of a heating cooking system showing Embodiment 1 of the present disclosure. 1 is a conceptual diagram showing a communication system (information processing network) between one house and the outside according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 1 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view 1 showing the configuration of the kitchen of one house shown in FIG. 4; FIG. 2 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view 2 showing the configuration of the kitchen of one house shown in FIG. 4; 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of home appliances and a home gateway in one house shown in FIG. 4; FIG. Fig. 2 is an installed perspective view of the heating cooker according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure; FIG. 9 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 8; 9 is a schematic plan view of the heating cooker of FIG. 8. FIG. The top view which expanded the central display part and central operation part of the heating cooker of FIG. The top view which expanded the left display part, the left heating power display part, and the left operation part of the heating cooker of FIG. The top view which expanded the right display part, the right heating power display part, and the right operation part of the heating cooker of FIG. The top view which expanded the central display part of the heating cooker of FIG. 8, a central operation part, and a central heating condition display part. FIG. 9 is an enlarged plan view showing an operation example of the central display portion of the heating cooker in FIG. 8 ; FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the heating cooker of FIG. 8; FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the control device and the input operation section (central operation section) of the heating cooker in FIG. 8 ; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing all types of control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 8; FIG. 9 is a classification table of control menus of the heating cooker of FIG. 8. FIG. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the storage structure of various cooking control menus in the cooperative cooking mode and the compound cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 8 and the input keys. Explanatory drawing 1 which showed operation|movement of the central display part at the time of the compound cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. Explanatory drawing 1 which showed the operation|movement of the input operation part and the central display part at the time of the compound cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. Explanatory drawing 2 which showed operation|movement with the input operation part and the central display part at the time of the compound cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. Explanatory drawing 3 which showed the display content of the input operation part and the central display part at the time of the compound cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. Explanatory drawing 1 which showed the display content of the input operation part and the central display part of the cooperation cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. Explanatory drawing 2 which showed the display content of the input operation part and the central display part of the cooperation cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. Explanatory drawing 3 which showed the display content of the input operation part and the central display part of the cooperation cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. Explanatory drawing 1 of the modification which showed the display content of the input operation part and the central display part of the cooperation cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. FIG. 9 is an explanatory view showing display contents of an input operation unit and a central display unit in a cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 8 and a display example of a cooperative cooking menu thereof. FIG. 9 is an explanatory view showing the display contents of the central display unit in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 8; 9 is a list showing various linked cooking menus in the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 8. FIG. Explanatory drawing which shows the operation example 1 of cooperation preheating cooking mode among the cooperation cooking modes shown in FIG. Explanatory drawing which shows the operation example 2 of the cooperation preheating cooking mode among the cooperation cooking modes shown in FIG. Step explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the cooperation cooking mode shown in FIG. Flowchart 1 showing the operation of the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG. 31 . Explanatory drawing which shows the permission conditions before transfering to cooperative cooking mode, and a determination result in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 9 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data from the outside in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 8; 9 is a flowchart showing main input steps for three cooking modes after turning on the main power in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 8; 9 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process after turning on the main power in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 8; 40 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in the case of the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 39; 40 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in the case of a combined cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 39; 40 is a flow chart 1 showing an input process in the single cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 39; 9 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data from the outside in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 8; 9 is a flowchart 2 showing an operation of acquiring recipe data from the outside in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 8; 9 is a flow chart showing the basic operation of the control device in the voice input mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 8; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing transition of the standby initial screen of the central display unit at startup in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 8 ; FIG. 9 is an explanatory view of the central display section showing a state before starting cooking by the first heating means in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 8 ; 9 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 8 before transitioning to the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 9 is an explanatory view showing the states of the central display unit and the central operation unit before acquiring recipe data from the outside and shifting to the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 8 ; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking menu and the operation of the input operation unit in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 8 ; FIG. 9 is a time chart 1 for explaining the overall recipe data acquisition period and control operation in the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 8 ; FIG. FIG. 9 is a time chart 1 for explaining the overall recipe data acquisition period and control operation in the combined cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 8 ; FIG. FIG. 52 is a time chart showing Modification 1 of the time chart shown in FIG. 51; FIG. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing display contents of an input operation section and a central display section when acquiring recipe data in a cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 8 ; FIG. 52 is a time chart showing Modification 2 of the time chart shown in FIG. 51; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing an operation of displaying food components and nutritional components using recipe data obtained from the outside before transitioning to a heat cooking operation in a linked cooking mode. The block diagram of the heat cooking system which concerns on Embodiment 2. FIG. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 57; FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of a control device and an input operation unit (central operation unit) of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 57; FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing the main functional configuration of a communication terminal (information processing terminal) used in the cooking system shown in FIG. 57; FIG. 58 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 57 ; FIG. 58 is an operation explanatory diagram 2 for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 57 ; FIG. 58 is an enlarged plan view for explaining the operation of the central operation unit and the central display unit in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 57; FIG. 58 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 of the central operation unit and the central display unit in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 57; FIG. 58 is an operation explanatory diagram 2 of the central operation unit and the central display unit in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 57 ; FIG. 58 is an operation explanatory diagram 3 of the central operation unit and the central display unit in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 57 ; FIG. 58 is an operation explanatory diagram 4 of the central operation unit and the central display unit in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 57 ; Explanatory drawing 1 which shows the relationship between the cooking process of a linked cooking menu, and operation of an input operation part in the heating cooker shown in FIG. Explanatory drawing 1 which shows the terminal side display screen of the communication terminal device used with the heat cooking system of FIG. Explanatory drawing 2 which shows the terminal side display screen of the communication terminal device used with the heat cooking system of FIG. Explanatory drawing 3 which shows the terminal side display screen of the communication terminal device used with the heat cooking system of FIG. Explanatory drawing 4 which shows the terminal side display screen of the communication terminal device used with the heat cooking system of FIG. Explanatory drawing 5 which shows the terminal side display screen of the communication terminal device used with the heat cooking system of FIG. Explanatory drawing 6 which shows the terminal side display screen of the communication terminal device used with the heat cooking system of FIG. Explanatory drawing 7 which shows the terminal side display screen of the communication terminal device used with the heat cooking system of FIG. Explanatory drawing 8 which shows the terminal side display screen of the communication terminal device used with the heat cooking system of FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram 9 showing a terminal-side display screen of the communication terminal used in the cooking system of FIG. 57. FIG. Explanatory drawing 10 which shows the terminal side display screen of the communication terminal device used with the heat cooking system of FIG. Explanatory drawing 11 which shows the terminal side display screen of the communication terminal device used with the heat cooking system of FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an operation example of a communication terminal used in the cooking system of FIG. 57; FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of the display mode of the central display portion of the heating cooker according to Embodiment 3; Explanatory drawing 1 which shows the display operation|movement of the central display part after starting of the heating cooker shown in FIG. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the central display unit after starting the heating cooker shown in FIG. 81; FIG. 11 shows a heating cooker according to Embodiment 4, and is an explanatory diagram showing the operation steps of the control device from the activation of the heating cooker 1 to immediately before the start of cooking. 85 is a flow chart showing the operation of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 84 before transitioning to the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 85 is a plan view showing the operation of the central operation unit and the central display unit of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 84; 14 is a flow chart showing the operation of a communication terminal used in the cooking system according to Embodiment 4; The configuration diagram of a heat cooking system according to Embodiment 5. FIG. FIG. 89 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 88; FIG. 89 is an operation explanatory drawing 1 showing the central display part and its peripheral part of the heating cooker constituting the heating cooking system shown in FIG. 88 ; 89. Operation explanatory drawing 1 which shows the central display part of the heating cooker shown in FIG. FIG. 89 is an explanatory view showing input operation steps and display steps of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 88; FIG. 89 is an operation explanatory drawing 1 showing the display operation of the central display section in the modification of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 88; FIG. 94 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the central display section of the modification shown in FIG. 93; FIG. 94 is an operation explanatory drawing 2 showing the display operation of the central display section of the modification shown in FIG. 93; FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing part of an input operation unit and a control device in the modification of FIG. 93; Explanatory drawing 1 which shows the modification 2 of the display operation|movement of the central display part of the heating cooker shown in FIG. FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing still another display state of the modification shown in FIG. 97; Operation explanatory drawing 1 which shows the central display part of the heating cooker which concerns on Embodiment 6. FIG. 99. Operation explanatory drawing 2 of the central display part and central operation part of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 99. Explanatory drawing which shows the input operation step and display step of the heating cooker shown in FIG. The block diagram of the heat cooking system which concerns on Embodiment 7. FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 102; FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, main operation steps of the control device for the heating cooker shown in FIG. 102 and operation steps on the side of the external information processing network; The configuration diagram of a heat cooking system according to Embodiment 8. FIG. FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, main operation steps of the control device for the heating cooker shown in FIG. 105 and operation steps on the side of the external information processing network; FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing, in chronological order, main operation steps of a heating cooker and operation steps of an external information processing network in a heat cooking system according to Embodiment 9; Explanatory drawing which shows the terminal side display screen of the communication terminal device used with the heat cooking system shown in FIG. FIG. 108 is an operation explanatory view showing the recipe data receiving process of the central operation unit and the central display unit of the heating cooker used in the heating cooking system shown in FIG. 107; FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing, in chronological order, the operation steps of the heat cooker and the external information processing network in the heat cooking system shown in FIG. 107;

Hereinafter, a heating cooker and a heating cooking system according to the present disclosure will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description, terms indicating directions (eg, "up", "down", "right", "left", "front", "back", etc.) are used for easy understanding. is for illustration only. Also, in each figure, the same reference numerals denote the same or corresponding parts, which are common throughout the specification.

Furthermore, in the following description, a compound heating cooker provided with a plurality of types of heating means is also simply referred to as a "heating cooker".

In the following description, the term "object to be heated placed on the top plate" refers to the case where an object to be heated such as a pot is directly placed on the upper surface of the top plate 3 described later and heated, and the case where the object to be heated such as a pot is directly placed on the upper surface of the top plate 3 to be described later. ), etc., when the object to be heated is placed on a supporting member such as a trivet placed above the top plate and heated.

In Embodiment 1, the "second heating means" HM2 refers to a heat source for heating the food stored inside the heating chamber 6, which will be described later. One using radiant heat or steam may be used.

In Embodiment 1, a magnetron is used as the microwave heating source, but there is no limit to the principle and method of microwave oscillation such as a microwave oscillator. Also, a plurality of heat sources may be provided.

In this Embodiment 1, the "third heating means" HM3 is referred to as "third" in order to indicate a difference from the second heating means HM2, but does not mean superiority or inferiority.
In Embodiment 1, a heating source using a radiant electric heat source (sheathed heater, mica heater, carbon heater, ceramic heater, infrared heater, radiant heater, etc.) is used. A heating source that generates heat may be used.

The third heating means HM3 is one capable of cooking in one heating chamber 6. FIG. A plurality of heating sources having different heating principles, such as a heating source configured by an electric heater or the like and a gas combustor (burner), may be used together. Also, an induction heating source may be used as the heating source for heating the heating chamber 6 . A steam generator 550 (boiler) (not shown) that supplies high-temperature steam (such as superheated steam) may also be used.

Furthermore, the third heating means may be either a heat source that heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 6 from the outside, or a heat source that is installed in the inner space of the heating chamber 6 and heats the atmosphere of the inner space to a high temperature. good.
In addition, a heating member that becomes high temperature by induction heating is arranged in the heating chamber, and the heating member heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 6 from the outside or heats the air inside the heating chamber 6. It can be.

As a representative example of the induction heating coil (IH coil) referred to in the first embodiment, about 30 thin copper wires or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm are bundled, and a plurality of this bundle is twisted. There is also a structure that is wound in a spiral shape. Alternatively, there is one that is configured by winding about 1000 to 1500 pieces of about 0.05 mm. There is also a proposal to construct a ring-shaped conductor made of a plate-shaped conductive material.
Any one of these forms corresponds to the "IH coil" which is the main part of the induction heating source.

In this Embodiment 1, the term "coordinated cooking" refers to two or more different heating locations for one object to be cooked (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) and for which heating operation conditions can be set independently. Cooking using a heat source.

The above-mentioned "co-cooking" corresponds to a case where a plurality of heating means are used with a time lag. For example, in the process of completing one cooking, after preheating with a microwave heating source, the food to be cooked is moved to another place and heated with an IH coil at the place after moving. It is a kind of "collaborative cooking".

In addition, the food to be cooked is heated by a gas burner (burner) inside the heating chamber 6, and then the food to be cooked is moved onto the top plate 3 and heated by a gas burner (burner) or an induction heating source. The form of heating to increase the degree of perfection of cooking is also a kind of "collaborative cooking".

"Voice input mode" refers to a control mode in which the user US inputs by voice without touching or pressing buttons of input switches (input keys) or operation surfaces.
The types of “voice input mode” include “voice input mode 1” and “voice input mode 2”.

The "voice input mode 1" is selected by operating an input key (hereinafter referred to as a "common key") corresponding to both voice input and touch (including pressing) input.
The "voice input mode 2" is selected by operating an input key dedicated to voice input (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "key dedicated to voice input") 180. FIG.

When one input operation unit has a plurality of input keys and includes the above-mentioned "multipurpose key" among them, when the above-mentioned "speech input mode 1" is changed by the above-mentioned dual-purpose key, other than this dual-purpose key The input function of (part of) the input keys (for example, 156M) is temporarily disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 1A") and not disabled (this control pattern is There are two types of "speech input mode 1B"). Both correspond to the "voice input mode 1" here.

When the "voice input key" 180 is pressed while performing touch input with an input key (for example, 153M or 153L) in one input operation unit. "Audio input mode 2" is selected. In this case, after the voice input mode 2 is selected, the input function of (part of) the input keys (for example, 156M) other than the voice input dedicated key 180 is temporarily disabled (this control pattern is referred to as " There are two cases: a case of not invalidating (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 2B"). Both correspond to the "voice input mode 2" here.

"Recipe data" CD means data used for controlling the heating cooker 1 in order to heat cook one food item.
One form of the recipe data CD includes data specifying the heating means, data specifying the heating process and order, control conditions during heating (including, but not limited to, heating power, target temperature, cooking time, etc.). , all inclusive.

Another form of the recipe data CD does not include data specifying the heating means, data specifying the heating process or order, and includes only partial data for executing a cooking menu (for example, hamburger). It is a thing.
For example, when cooking in the linked cooking mode described later, information specific to the heating means for executing one cooking menu (including information indicating the attributes of the heating means, information on the heating port, etc.), information on the cooking process, driving It does not include information indicating the order of heating means.
In this case, the data mainly consist of commands, data, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "commands" or "command data") that determine control conditions such as heating capacity and heating time. In this case, if the recipe data CD held by the heat cooker 1 is configured on the premise that, for example, one portion of food is to be cooked, the heat cooker side may A control condition (for example, one parameter called heating time) may be changed by a built-in program so as to correspond to a serving or four servings.

In the following embodiments, the format of the recipe data as described above will not be particularly distinguished and described.

Embodiment 1.
(1. Configuration of cooking system)
Embodiment 1 according to the present disclosure is described in FIGS. 1 to 54. FIG.
FIG. 1 will be described.
The cooking system of Embodiment 1 includes a cooking device 1, a smartphone 200 (also referred to as a "communication terminal device") having a function of performing wireless communication with the cooking device 1, a cloud server 300, is configured with In addition to the smart phone 200, a tablet terminal device with a communication function, a personal computer, or the like may be used. When collectively referring to these devices and the smart phone 200 , they are referred to as an “information processing terminal device” 200 .

Smartphone 200 performs wireless communication using a communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark) with a wireless router 340 (not shown) installed in a house (not shown) where cooking device 1 is used.

Cooking device 1 can acquire at least recipe data CD2 through wireless communication 400 with smartphone 200 . The recipe data CD2 will be explained later.
The smartphone 200 performs wireless communication 400 with the cooking device 1 using a communication method such as Bluetooth (registered trademark).

The smartphone 200 accesses the cloud server 300 in the external space via the wireless router 340 (not shown) and the network 201 such as the Internet. Cloud server 300 has at least one recipe data providing server 301 .

The recipe data providing server 301 is provided with a recipe DB (database) 302 that holds recipe data for executing various types of cooking, and the smartphone 200 accesses the recipe providing site operated by the recipe data providing server 301. to obtain (download) various recipe data CD1 from the recipe DB 302 .

Although the recipe data CD1 and CD2 will be described in detail later, the recipe data CD1 and CD2 include at least one of heating means and control conditions (heat power, heating time, temperature, etc.) so that the cooker 1 can cook a specific item. contains instructions (command data) that specify (including but not limited to) However, as described above, only unique data for identifying the recipe data CD1 and CD2 may be used.

In the following description, the recipe data (cooking condition data) may be described with symbols CD1, CD2, etc., but the contents of the recipe data are not necessarily different depending on the symbols, and may be the same. . These codes (CD1, CD2) are provided based on the source of the recipe data to facilitate understanding. In addition, about recipe data, when using a reference code uniformly, "CD" is used. Also, the name is unified to "recipe data" and explained.

The heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 1 includes first heating means HM1 arranged below a top plate 3 (described in FIG. A second heating means HM2 for supplying microwaves to the inside of the heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 9) formed inside the heating chamber 6, and the temperature of the internal space of the heating chamber 6 inside or outside the heating chamber 6 and a third heating means HM3 that raises and heats.

If the upper surface of the top plate 3 is defined as a "first place", the first heating means HM1 is used to heat the object to be heated (a magnetic metal pot) placed at the first place. Induction heating means are used. Alternatively, a gas combustion device equipped with a gas burner for heating a pot made of magnetic metal or non-magnetic metal can be used as the first heating means HM1.

If a closed space away from the first place is defined as a "second place", the inside of the heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 5) is the second place.

The heating cooker 1 has a function of executing a "single cooking mode" KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are individually (independently) driven.

The heating cooker 1 drives the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 at the same time or operates one of them first as a method of cooking one food, It has the function of executing a "compound cooking mode" KM2 in which the other is automatically started later. Even when the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are operated at the same time, both the cases where the heating end times of both are the same and the cases where they are different belong to the "combined cooking mode" KM2. It is one driving pattern.

In the "combined cooking mode" KM2, a pattern (RG control mode 1) in which the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are simultaneously driven from the beginning, and after the second heating means HM2, A pattern to start driving the third heating means HM3 (RG control mode 2) and a pattern to drive the third heating means HM3 first and then automatically switch to driving the second heating means HM3. (RG control mode 3) and at least. In RG control mode 1 to RG control mode 3, each heating means is automatically switched when cooking is started in heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 9).

Unlike the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the "compound cooking mode" KM2 does not have a "cooking menu" corresponding to a specific food (eg, hamburger). That is, a "control menu" for each pattern for driving the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 is prepared.

For example, one of the "control menus" is the "RG control mode 1". Various foods can be cooked in the RG control mode (RG compound cooking mode). One of the "control menus", for example, the "RG control mode 1", is controlled by recipe data that defines the control mode, but is not set for each specific food to be cooked.

That is, the operation pattern in which two or more heating sources (the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3) are operated in a predetermined sequence is the combined cooking mode KM2 having a plurality of "control menus." .

On the other hand, there is recipe data (corresponding to a specific object to be cooked) that heats and cooks the object to be cooked placed in each location inside the heating chamber 6 and above the top plate 3 in a predetermined order. What is applied is the cooperative cooking mode KM3 with cooperative cooking menus.
That is, the content of the recipe data differs between the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

In the following description, the term "control menu" refers to the type of control mode, such as the drive pattern of the heating source. For example, "Unzip" is one of the control menus.
On the other hand, when specifying cooking items that can be cooked with heat, name of dishes, etc., it is called a "cooking menu". For example, "hamburger" is one of the cooking menus.

The heating cooker 1 has a "cooperative cooking mode" in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven with a time difference determined depending on the operation of the user US (user) US. It has the execution function of KM3.

The "cooperation cooking mode" KM3 has a pattern of performing the cooking process 1 with the first heating means HM1 and a pattern of performing the cooking process 1 with the second heating means HM2.
For example, in order to finish the cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1 and move to the cooking process 2, the object to be cooked is moved to the heating chamber 6, and then the driving of the second heating means HM2 is started. Between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, there is a "heating pause period" (transition period TR) during which no heating operation is performed. This heating rest period will be described with reference to FIG.

In this "cooperation cooking mode" KM3, the recipe data CD is prepared for each specific cooking object (eg, hamburger, roast beef, gratin).
The recipe data CD specifies the heating means to be used, the order of driving the heating means, and the control conditions of the heating means (including at least one of heating power, heating time, temperature, etc.).

The recipe data CD is stored in both the cooking device 1 and the recipe DB 302 . The type of the recipe data CD in the recipe DB and the type of the recipe data CD held in the cooking device 1 need not be the same. For example, the recipe data CD of the new cooperative cooking mode KM3 may be sequentially added to the recipe DB 302, and the recipe data CD of the complex cooking menu may be sequentially accumulated.

When the cooker 1 acquires the recipe data CD for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM3 from the smart phone 200, the data is one cooking menu unit selected by the user US on the smart phone 200. This applies not only to the "cooperation cooking mode" KM3, but also to the "combined cooking mode" KM2 and the "single cooking mode" KM1.

As described above, the smartphone 200 requests the recipe data providing server 301 to provide the recipe data CD of the desired food to be cooked, and downloads the recipe data CD1 corresponding to the desired recipe.

Smartphone 200 can transmit recipe data CD<b>2 corresponding to one recipe acquired from recipe data providing server 301 to cooker 1 .
In order to use such a recipe data acquisition function, the user US of the heating cooker 1 accesses a recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and uses a recipe selection application (hereinafter referred to as a "recipe selection application"). ) is installed on the smartphone 200 .

When the user US installs the recipe selection application, the user US performs an operation of registering identification information such as the model name of the heating cooker as an initial setting. By this registration, the recipe data CD corresponding to the rated specifications of the heating cooker 1 (heating capacity of each heating means HM1 to HM3, etc.) can be obtained from the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301).

Also, the user US performs pairing between the smartphone 200 and the cooking device 1 using the recipe selection application, and establishes wireless communication 400 between the smartphone 200 and the cooking device 1 . Note that this wireless communication may use a near field communication (NFC) system.

Next, FIG. 2 will be described.
In FIG. 2, the role of the smart phone 200 is different from that of the cooking system shown in FIG. Also, it is not the smartphone 200 but the heating cooker 1 that accesses the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and acquires an application for recipe selection (referred to as a "recipe selection application"). .

The smartphone 200 and the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) are connected via a network 202 such as an Internet line.
Also, the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and the heating cooker 1 are connected via a network 203 such as an Internet line. Note that a wireless router (not shown) may be interposed between the smart phone 200 and the cloud server 300 . Similarly, a wireless router 340 (not shown) may be interposed between the cooker 1 and the cloud server 300 .

As described above, in the cooking system shown in FIG. 2, the smartphone 200 transmits the recipe data CD3 (corresponding to one recipe) created by the user US to the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301). Then, it can be temporarily stored in the recipe DB 302 and provided to the heating cooker 1 . That is, when the smartphone 200 exists in a place far away from the house where the cooking device 1 is installed (for example, outside), the recipe data CD3 of the smartphone 200 is stored in the recipe data providing server 301. It is convenient because it can be placed.

Heat cooker 1 downloads recipe data CD4 corresponding to a specific recipe stored in recipe data providing server 301 through network 203 with the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301). The recipe data CD4 in this case may be the recipe data CD2 provided by the smartphone 200 .

In order to use such a recipe data CD acquisition function, the user US of the heating cooker 1 accesses the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and installs a recipe selection application (hereinafter referred to as "recipe selection application ) is installed in the heating cooker 1 in advance. It is convenient if this installation can be easily executed in the heating cooker 1 as one menu of the "function setting mode" described later.

When the user US installs the recipe selection application, the user US performs an operation of registering identification information such as the model name of the heating cooker as an initial setting. By this registration, the recipe data CD corresponding to the specifications of the heating cooker 1 (heating capacity of each heating means HM1 to HM3, etc.) can be acquired from the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301).

In the cooking system of FIG. 2, the user US obtains the recipe data CD1 (corresponding to the recipe) as described in FIG. Alternatively, recipe data CD3 obtained by partially modifying the recipe data CD1 may be stored in the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) as described with reference to FIG.

In the cooking system shown in FIG. 1, recipe data CD2 from smartphone 200 to cooker 1 can be provided when smartphone 200 and cooker 1 are close to each other. If it is taken out, the cooking device 1 cannot directly acquire the recipe data CD2.
On the other hand, in the cooking system shown in FIG. 2, regardless of the location of the smartphone 200, if the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) can be accessed, the recipe data CD4 can be downloaded and used for cooking. can do.

Next, FIG. 3 will be described.
3 differs from the heat cooking system shown in FIG. 1 in the role of the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301).
In the heat cooking system of FIG. 3, the heat cooker 1 accesses the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and downloads the recipe data CD6.

In addition, in the heat cooking system of FIG. 3, the heat cooker 1 can access the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) to provide the recipe data CD7.
For example, if good cooking is actually performed by heating, the recipe data remaining in the storage part of the heating cooker 1 after the heating cooking is transferred as improved recipe data CD7 to the recipe providing site ( It can be provided to the recipe data providing server 301). Such favorite recipes of the user US are preferably registered (stored) in the recipe data providing server 301 as "favorite recipes". It should be noted that it is the heating cooker 1 that acquires the "recipe selection application", which is different from the heating cooking system of FIG.

The heating cooker 1 and the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) are connected by networks 204 and 205 such as Internet lines.
Note that a wireless router 340 (not shown) may be interposed between the cooking device 1 and the cloud server 300 . Similarly, a wireless router 340 (not shown) may be interposed between the networks 204 and 205 between the cooker 1 and the cloud server 300 . Also, a wireless router (not shown) may be interposed between the smart phone 200 and the cloud server 300 .

In the cooking system of FIG. 3, the user US can use the cooker 1 to directly acquire the recipe data CD6 from the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301). Therefore, even if the smartphone 200 is not owned, the desired recipe data CD6 can be obtained from the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) each time cooking is performed.

Also, as described above, when the cooking is actually performed and good cooking is achieved, the improved recipe data CD7 can be provided to the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) after the cooking. Therefore, the recipe data CD7 can be called from the heating cooker 1 and used for cooking from the next time onwards, which is convenient.

In this first embodiment, there are cases where the description of "acquiring" or "restricting acquisition" of the recipe data CD is given, so this point will be explained.
When the explanation "restrict acquisition" is given, it means that the recipe data (specific information constituting part or all of the data) CD cannot enter the heating cooker 1 from the outside via the communication unit 51 described later. Not a translation. In the heating cooker 1, the communication section 51 once receives the recipe data CD from the outside and temporarily stores it in an appropriate storage area in the storage device 41 (described in FIG. 16). At that time, the contents of the data (attributes, presence or absence of identification information 167, etc.) are analyzed. However, if the data is transmitted from the outside during the "period during which acquisition is restricted" as described above, it will not be used in the process of executing the subsequent cooking menu (i.e., the cooking process). It is automatically erased within a short period of time (at least when the main power switch 20 is turned off).

In the following description, the networks 201, 202, 203, 204, and 205 such as the Internet lines use "NW" as a uniform code.

(2. Configuration of Various Electrical Devices and Home Gateway)
A “household appliance” 402 is an electrical appliance designed mainly for home use. The home appliances 402 include a heating cooker 1 , a refrigerator 403 , a television receiver 404 , an air conditioner 405 , an air cleaner 406 , a ventilator 407 , an electric rice cooker (electric jar rice cooker) 408 , and a microwave oven 409 . , a lighting fixture 410 and an air purifier 413 are included. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the term “refrigerator” 403 includes both a refrigerator-freezer with a built-in freezer (freezer compartment) and a freezer with only a freezing function.

The “device identification information” of the home appliance 402 is unique information for specifying the home appliance 402 . Specifically, it is important information required for information communication, such as the MAC address, the manufacturer's name of the home appliance 402, the model name (model name), the model number, and the serial number.

A “home gateway” 411 is an information collection device or information processing device that relays information between two or more home appliances 402 in one home and causes them to operate in cooperation. In addition to this, it performs an operation of giving a command signal to one home appliance 402 or acquiring information (also referred to as “data”) from one home appliance 402 .
In the following description, it is assumed that the “home gateway” 411 is one form of the information processing device 411 .

The home gateway 411 may have a power control function such as a peak cut function for all or part of the home appliances 402 in order to manage the total power consumption of one household. In some cases, it may be called a “power control device” or “integrated management device”.

The home gateway 411 has a function of acquiring information about the current status of the electric home appliance 402, such as operation, stoppage, standby state, etc., from the electric home appliance 402 via a wired or wireless signal.
When wireless communication is used, the home gateway 411 is connected to the target home appliance 402 using the device identification information.

Even if the home gateway 411 functions as an “integrated management device” or a “power command device” for one home appliance (for example, the heating cooker 1) 402, other home appliances (for example, , lighting fixtures 410) do not correspond to the "integrated management device" or the "power command device" if the power consumption is not limited. For example, even if the home gateway 411 acquires the operation information of the lighting equipment 410, the total power consumption combined with the power consumption of the other home appliances 402 does not exceed the prescribed upper limit of the total power consumption. This is the case where there is no function for regulating the power consumption of the lighting device 410 itself. In such a case, the home gateway 411 does not correspond to the integrated management device or the power command device from the perspective of the lighting fixture 410 .

In FIG. 4, HA indicates one house.
Although not shown, the inside of the house HA is partitioned into a plurality of living spaces by walls and doors. Household appliances 402 such as a microwave oven 409 and an electric rice cooker 408, and kitchen furniture (kitchen furniture) 600 are arranged. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the living space includes a "living room", a "bathroom", and a room with a toilet. The living space may have other rooms.

Electric power of, for example, 200 V is supplied to all living spaces from a commercial power supply EP of an electric power company outside the house. The power is drawn into the house HA via the electricity meter 414 .

415 is a power supply line (main trunk line) connected to a commercial power supply EP with a voltage of 200 V via a breaker BK. This power line 415 is connected to a television receiver (hereinafter referred to as "TV receiver") 404 capable of receiving various broadcasts, an air conditioner 405, a lighting fixture 410, a heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 409, an electric rice cooker 408, A home gateway 411 and an environment detector 416 are connected respectively.

Next, FIG. 4 will be explained.
419 is a wide area telecommunications network (sometimes referred to as a "communications network" or "Internet").
This wide area network 419 is connected to home gateway 411 via a router (not shown). This wide area network 419 is the aforementioned network NW.

An external server 417 is one component of the cloud server 300 .
This external server 417 transmits useful information to the home gateway 411 and the communication terminal device (information processing terminal device) 200 .

The external server 417 may be, for example, a server installed by an external institution such as an earthquake information provider in a specific area or an electric power company, or a server prepared by the manufacturer that manufactured the heating cooker 1 . This external server 417 may be a distributed processing type server called a so-called "cloud server". It is known that there are three types of "cloud computing" using cloud servers: "IaaS", "PaaS", and "SaaS".

Home gateway 411 can receive various content distribution services from external server 417 . This content also includes recipe data (characters, images) CDs for various types of cooking.

Although not shown, the environment sensor of the environment detection unit 416 may be additionally provided with a temperature sensor or a humidity sensor for detecting the temperature and humidity outside the house.

Also, the external server 417 functions as information providing means for the home appliance 402 . In other words, the external server 417 may be installed by an organization such as a manufacturer (manufacturer) of the home appliance 402, a dealer, a repairer, or an information service provider, or may be installed jointly by two or more organizations. , various services related to the home appliance 402 are provided to the user US via the wide area communication network 419 .

The external server 417 may also be what is generally called a "web server" (hereinafter referred to as "web server"). The web server operates in accordance with HTTP (a protocol used to exchange data such as HTML documents and images between a web server and a web browser), various communication terminals (information processing terminal) 200, home gateway 411, etc. A service program that provides display information such as HTML and objects (images, etc.) to the web browser of the information processing device (client) side software on the "information receiving side", and the server that operates the service point to the computer.

The external server 417 stores control application software that enables remote control of the home gateway 411 from the house HA or its remote location. From the communication terminal device 200, which will be described in detail later, for example, a device called a smartphone, the aforementioned remote control can be realized by accessing the cloud server 300 and downloading (reading) control application software. can.

The communication terminal device 200 can be easily carried by the user US to make calls and communicate data (including mail information) indoors, outdoors, or on the go. It is a device that can download information from an outdoor information providing site via the wide area communication network 419, send and receive mail, and transmit remote control signals, but it may be a device that cannot make a call, and such a portability is possible. Such communication terminal equipment is generically called a communication terminal equipment 200 . A small portable personal computer is also a kind of communication terminal device 200 .

The communication terminal device 200 according to the first embodiment has a function of transmitting and receiving signals by short-range communication while the input/output unit of each home appliance 402 is brought close to (or may be brought into contact with) a few centimeters. ing. The near field communication is an international standard technology for wireless communication known as Near Field Communication (abbreviation: NFC).

In this NFC communication, a so-called wireless tag (NFC tag) is embedded in the home appliance 402 side including the induction heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 403 .
On the other hand, it is also possible to send control data (also referred to as a “control command”) from the communication terminal device 200 side to the NFC storage unit of the home appliance 402 and control the home appliance 402 according to the control command.

In this Embodiment 1, direct remote operation from the communication terminal device 200 to the home appliance 402 side is prohibited. Since some of the home appliances 402 generate high heat, such as the heating cooker 1, remote control from outside the house HA via the Internet used by many people is not adopted. Instead, as an integrated information processing device, all home appliances 400 can be operated via the home gateway 411 .

As is clear from the above description, the home gateway 411 of the first embodiment relays information between two or more home appliances 400 in one home, and performs information processing for cooperative operation. Refers to equipment. In addition to this, an operation of giving a command signal to one home appliance 400 or acquiring information (also referred to as data) from one home appliance 400 is performed.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, the kitchen 601 in the house HA is equipped with a range hood 407, which is a type of ventilator, and a ceiling-embedded air purifier 413. .

416A and 416B are the sensor units of the environment sensing unit 416 of the home gateway 411; As shown in FIG. 7, one sensor unit 416A is arranged inside the kitchen 601 as a human sensor that detects the presence of people (using infrared rays or ultrasonic waves). Another sensor unit 416B is similarly installed at a location different from the sensor unit 416B. The sensor unit 416B is for acquiring "environmental information". The environment detection unit 416 will be described later in detail.

The "environmental information" refers to temperature information of the atmosphere of the space (kitchen 601) where the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 403 are used, dust scattering amount information, and light amount information. The scattered dust amount information is the result of measuring the amount of dust (including pollen) present in the air.

“Use of environmental information” includes the following examples.
(1) When the temperature is high, the heat retaining function of the electric rice cooker 408 is operated continuously after the rice cooking process is completed. Also, the refrigerating target temperature and freezing target temperature of the refrigerator 403 are raised above the standard values.
(2) When the humidity is high, the air conditioner 405 is operated in "dehumidification mode" or "cooling mode." Alternatively, the operation of the ventilator 407 is started. Alternatively, if the air conditioner 405 is in operation, its operating conditions (target room temperature, etc.) are changed.
(3) When fine dust that floats in the air is scattered, the air cleaner 413 is operated. Alternatively, the operation of the ventilator 407 is started.
(4) When the pollen scattering amount is large, the operation of the air cleaner 413 is started.
(5) When the amount of light (the amount of visible light) is small, turn on the lighting device 410 .

A "resident" refers to a person who lives in one house HA shown in FIG. Residents include relatives such as parents and children, brothers and sisters. Note that when the home appliance 402 is used, the resident is called a "user US".

A "household" means one house HA managed by a specific manager, and may also include a multi-family dwelling with multiple rooms. That is, even in such collective housing, the upper limit of commercial power is centrally managed by one power interruption device (one breaker BK, or a plurality of power breakers, etc.) as in the case of one house HA. If so, it is considered a household here.

“Home appliance side power limit information” refers to information regarding any signal received by home appliance 402 from home gateway 411 regarding power consumption. The "power limit information on the home appliance side" includes information regarding transmission commands such as a power reduction request signal AS1, a power reduction command signal AS2, etc., which will be described later. The information includes information indicating when the signal was received (year, month and time in seconds) and the meaning of the signal. For example, it is information such as "receipt time: 17:00 on August 1, 2021, decrease the instantaneous maximum power consumption by 2%" for the power reduction command signal AS2 at a certain point in time for the heating cooker 1.

For example, in the heating cooker 1, the power limit information on the home appliance side is stored in chronological order in the storage device 41 of the control device 40, which will be described later, and does not disappear even when the main power switch 20 is turned on or off. . Turning on and off the main power switch 20 is regarded as one cooking, and at least several times are stored in memory. Any excess is automatically deleted.

Next, FIG. 5 will be described.
FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of hardware to which the heating cooker 1 and the home appliance operation management system of the first embodiment are applied. As one living space, the kitchen 601 will be described below as an example.

Kitchen 601 to which Embodiment 1 is applied includes air purifier 413 installed on ceiling surface (horizontal wall surface) 420, a plurality of freezer compartments 403A having different freezing temperatures, and refrigerator compartment 403B. A refrigerator 403 and a microwave oven 409 are installed, respectively.

Furthermore, the kitchen 601 includes a built-in (induction) heating cooker 1 arranged on the kitchen furniture 600, a range hood (ventilator) 407 arranged directly above the heating cooker 1, a home A gateway 411 is installed respectively. 5, illustration of the electric rice cooker 408, the air conditioner 405, and the lighting equipment 410 described in FIG. 4 is omitted.

The refrigerator 403 has a "storage room" 403H for storing materials (hereinafter referred to as "ingredients") for foods (including natural foods and processed foods). The storage compartment 403H includes the freezer compartment 403A and the refrigerator compartment 403B, and may be divided into specific compartments such as a "vegetable compartment" and a "meat and fish exclusive compartment" according to the type of ingredients.

In this Embodiment 1, it is assumed that there are at least two types of storage compartments 403H: a freezer compartment 403A and a refrigerator compartment 403B which is a space independent of the freezer compartment 403A. The temperature (freezing temperature/refrigerating temperature) of the internal space of the storage chamber 403H may be hereinafter collectively referred to as the "chamber temperature".

The plurality of freezer compartments 403A in the refrigerator 403 has a freezing temperature suitable for frozen food (including processed food) and perishable food (meat, fish, etc.), such as -18°C ± 2°C, -10°C, -2°C, etc. (temperature zone) can be selected.

In addition, the freezing temperature and the freezing temperature range affect the ripening of perishable ingredients (e.g., beef) when stored for a long period of time. can be changed.

As described above, there are a plurality of types of temperature inside the refrigerator. For example, one set to a temperature close to the freezing point (freezing temperature) is called a "chill room".
The volumes and shapes of the storage compartments 403H are different, and the refrigerator compartment 403B is the largest. In addition, in order to further partition the storage chamber 403H into a plurality of rooms, partition plates and lids (or doors) may be provided to increase the number of independent storage spaces.

As a cooling device (not shown), the refrigerator 403 includes an electric compressor 403C, a refrigerant pipe (not shown), a cold air circulation fan (not shown), and a storage chamber 403H to constitute a refrigeration cycle. A damper (shutter) (not shown) or the like is provided to control the inflow of cold air. In order to control the inside temperature, the operating frequency of the electric compressor may be changed or the air volume of the cool air circulation fan may be changed.

Refrigerator 403 has a display unit (display screen) 403D on the front (front) center upper part of the door (not shown). Inside the housing of the refrigerator 403, there is a storage device 403M such as a semiconductor memory, and a control device 403U mainly composed of a microcomputer. The control device 403U issues a command signal to a drive circuit (inverter circuit, not shown) of the electric compressor 403C, the cool air circulation fan (not shown), the damper (not shown), and the like. Control device 403U has a control program (not shown) for controlling the operation of refrigerator 403 as a whole.

A wireless communication unit 403T is installed inside the housing of the refrigerator 403 or on the ceiling outside the housing, and is controlled by the control device 403U. The wireless communication unit 403T can wirelessly communicate with the communication unit 425 of the home gateway 411 (see FIG. 7).

Because of the above configuration, the refrigerator 403 can wirelessly communicate with the cooking device 1 via the home gateway 411 and can also be connected to the network NW, so various information and data (described later) of the cooking device 1 can be used. (including "recipe data CD" to be used) can be obtained.
Furthermore, the refrigerator 403 can exchange data with the communication terminal device 200 by wireless communication.

When a Peltier element is used as a cooling device for the storage compartment 403H, the internal temperature can be adjusted by adjusting the power supplied to the Peltier element. The refrigerator 403 may use both the electric compressor 403C and the Peltier element.

Further, the preservation chamber 403H may contain specific foodstuffs (eg, eggs, milk, butter, etc.), and a weight sensor (not shown) for measuring the weight thereof may be arranged. It is preferable that the weight measurement by the weight sensor is periodically performed, and the control device 403U of the refrigerator 403 collects the data. Such weight data can be part of the inventory data of the refrigerator 403, so it is used when inquiring inventory data from the home gateway 411, which is one type of information processing device.

In the management database held by the storage unit 403M of the control device 403U of the refrigerator 403, the internal temperature of each storage chamber 403H (standard value, adjustable temperature range, adjustable minimum temperature range), volume, and object It holds identification information such as types and names of main foodstuffs. For example, the freezer compartment 403A has information such as that -10°C is the standard internal temperature, that the range from -5°C to -15°C can be adjusted in 20 steps, and that the volume is 30 liters. there is In addition, the maximum dimension (inner dimension) data of the storage room 403H may be retained. This is because it is used to determine whether a solid object such as a pan can be accommodated as it is. All of this data can also be provided externally by refrigerator 403 in response to an inventory data inquiry from home gateway 411 . In other words, the home gateway 411 can also acquire various data in the storage room 403H each time.

The range hood 407 has an exhaust port 427 penetrating the ceiling surface 420, and one end of a duct 428 communicating with the outdoors is connected to the exhaust port 427.
Reference numeral 430 denotes a box-shaped hood whose entire lower surface is open as a suction port 430A, and an electric fan 429 for exhaust is installed inside this hood. In addition, although this range hood 430 is fixed to the ceiling surface 420, the detailed configuration thereof will not be described.

The operation status of the range hood 407 is transmitted to the central control unit 423 via the communication unit 425 of the home gateway 411 as needed. For this reason, inside the range hood 407, between the home gateway 411, a transmission unit and a reception unit for transmitting various operation information such as the start and stop of the exhaust operation and the strength of the operation (the magnitude of the exhaust capacity) are provided. The communication unit 431 is also provided. That is, the transmission section and the reception section are integrated in hardware and provided as the communication section 431 . This communication unit 431 exchanges information with the home gateway 411 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

When the electric fan 429 is rotationally driven, air is sucked from the suction port 430A of the cooker hood 407, odors and smoke during cooking are also sucked, and the air is exhausted through the duct 428 to the outside of the house HA. Note that the range hood 407 is of a type that receives an operation signal such as an infrared signal from the heating cooker 1 side and starts the exhaust operation. This will be explained later.

In FIG. 5, an arrow FF1 indicates an air current rising from the heating cooker 1. As shown in FIG. FF2 indicates the exhaust flow from duct 427; FF3 shows the airflow moving laterally near the ceiling surface 420 . FF4 indicates the (purified) air flow blown out from the air purifier 413 .

A heat sensing sensor (thermoelectromotive force element) may be arranged on the cooker hood 407 toward the cooker 1 . According to this configuration, the range hood 407 itself senses the start of operation of the heating cooker 1 and controls the operation of the electric fan 429 .

Ceiling-embedded air cleaner 413 is installed in a manner embedded in ceiling surface 420 . A fan 436 and a filter 437 are provided inside a box-shaped main body 435 of the air cleaner 407 .

An air guide plate 440 covers the entire lower portion of the air cleaner 413 . 432 is a suction port formed by the air guide plate 431 at one end (the side close to the cooker hood 407). A blowout port 433 is formed by the air guide plate 440 at the end opposite to the suction port 432 .

The blower fan 436 sucks the dirty air inside the kitchen 601 through the suction port 432 and discharges the cleaned air through the filter 437 through the outlet 433 toward the lower part of the kitchen 601 . In this way, dust and odors in the air are removed, and the indoor air is purified.

434 is an odor sensor of the air purifier 404 and is arranged to face the inlet of the suction port 432 . This detects odors from the air taken into the air purifier 413 during operation, and detects the degree of contamination of the air. As long as the position of the odor sensor 434 is in the air passage on the suction port 432 side and in front of the filter 437, there is no significant difference in the effect regardless of the position.

Based on the detection result of the odor sensor 434, an odor sensing unit (not shown) arranged inside the main body 435 of the air purifier 413 determines the strength of the odor. It is transmitted to the environment detection unit 416 as needed. For this reason, inside the air purifier 413, a transmission unit (not shown) for transmitting various information such as the start and stop of the air cleaning operation and the determination result of the odor intensity to the home gateway 411 is provided. , and a receiver (not shown). For example, the transmission section and the reception section are integrated in hardware and provided as a communication section 438 . The communication unit 438 exchanges information with the home gateway 411 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

The air purifier 413 can detect the odor when the air purifier 413 is in operation and when the odor generated somewhere in the kitchen 601 reaches the air purifier 413 from the place of generation. is.

The air purifier 413 generally has one or a plurality of (multiple layers) filters 437 having fine air passages for trapping dust, pollen, etc. in the air. Therefore, when the oil smoke generated by cooking with edible oil is filtered by the heating cooker 1, oil particles adhere to the surface of the filter 437, and the oil particles combine to form an oil film.
Due to this oil film, the filtering performance of the filter 437 is lowered. In other words, the amount of air passing through the filter 437 is reduced, leading to a situation in which the air cleaning ability of the air purifier 413 is reduced. Therefore, the idea of avoiding the operation of the air cleaner 413 as much as possible when the exhaust gas generated by heat cooking contains oily smoke generated by oil cooking has already been proposed (for example, Patent Document JP-A-2016- 95126).

In FIG. 5, the refrigerator 403 is depicted as being installed in the vicinity of the right side of the kitchen furniture 600, but in an actual situation, it may be installed at a different location from that shown in FIG. Moreover, not only one refrigerator 403 but also a plurality of refrigerators 403 may be used.

441 is a main body case forming the outer shell of the home gateway 411 . The main body case 441 is fixed to the vertical wall surface 439 of the kitchen at a height that allows the resident to confirm input operations and displays.

445 is an alarm device fixed to a vertical wall surface 439 near the body case 441, which will be described later in detail. 600D is a water supply port installed in the kitchen furniture 600 .

Next, FIG. 6 will be described. FIG. 6 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the heating cooker 1 and the range hood 407. As shown in FIG.
In FIG. 6, 442 is a temperature monitoring device for the heating cooker 1 . In the first embodiment, this temperature monitoring device is one component of the range hood 407 in terms of hardware. However, it may be configured as one component of the home gateway 411 on hardware.

The temperature monitoring device 442 includes a temperature detection section 443 and a communication section 446 . The temperature detector 443 includes an infrared sensor (not shown), a thermal image camera (not shown), and a temperature determination circuit 444 .

As shown in FIG. 6, the temperature monitoring device 442 is always energized regardless of the exhaust operation of the range hood 407 even though it is one component of the range hood 407 in terms of hardware. In other words, the temperature monitoring device 442 constantly monitors the temperature even when the exhaust operation is not performed. It should be noted that the temperature monitoring device 442 may be configured as an independent device so as to be attached to the outside or the lower surface of the cooker hood 407 for use.

The temperature detection unit 443 divides, for example, the entire area (plane) of the top plate 3 to be described later into at least 64 areas (8 vertical×8 horizontal) (hereinafter referred to as "detection areas"). Detect the temperature of the area.

The detection area includes three heating portions (a left heating port 4L, a right heating port 4R, and a central heating port 4C) of the heating cooker 1, which will be described later.
The temperature monitoring device 442 repeatedly measures the temperature of the detection area monitored by the temperature detection unit 443 at predetermined time intervals not only during operation of the range hood 407 but also during shutdown.

The temperature monitoring device 442 transmits the measured temperature monitoring information from the communication unit 446 to the home gateway 411 . In addition to transmitting to the home gateway 411, a configuration of directly transmitting to the heating cooker 1 may be employed. Also, the temperature measurement interval for obtaining temperature monitoring information is not fixed time (for example, every 5 seconds), but the time interval is shortened in a region where the temperature is high.

The temperature monitoring device 442 detects that the light receiving unit 447 of the range hood 407 has received an infrared signal from the infrared transmission unit 31 of the heating cooker 1, and when the range hood 407 is started to operate, , to start acquiring temperature information.

The temperature monitoring device 442 continues the temperature acquisition operation even after the range hood 407 receives an infrared signal (from the infrared transmission section 31) indicating that the operation of the heating cooker 1 is finished. Then, temperature information acquisition is continued at predetermined time intervals until the estimated temperature of the entire area of the top plate 3 becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined temperature (for example, 40° C.). It should be noted that the interval between the temperature measurement operations is delayed when the temperature becomes lower than the predetermined temperature. When the temperature becomes low, the monitoring operation as described above may be temporarily terminated, but at least at the start of the operation of the heating cooker 1, the temperature monitoring operation is started again.

The heating cooker 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 600, which will be described in detail later. 6 is a heating chamber formed inside the heating cooker 1, and 7 is a door that covers the front opening of the heating chamber 113 so as to be openable and closable.

In the heating cooker 1, an object to be heated N (such as a pot made of magnetic metal) is placed on a top plate 3 covering its upper surface, and is induction-heated by IH coils 9 (9C, 9L, 9R). Reference numeral 32 denotes a bottom wall surface that divides the inside of the heating cooker 1 into two upper and lower independent spaces.
Reference numeral 33 denotes an installation space above the bottom wall surface 32 inside the heating cooker 1, in which the IH coil 9 is accommodated.

Next, FIG. 7 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the relationship between home gateway 411, home appliance 402, and temperature monitor 422. As shown in FIG. Note that the heating cooker 1 and the microwave oven 409 among the home appliances 402 are subject to power consumption control from the home gateway 411 .

For this reason, the home gateway 411 also serves as a power command device for the cooker 1 and the microwave oven 409, but since this point has been described previously, it will not be described in detail here. Although not shown in FIG. 7, the air conditioner 405 is also a device subject to power consumption (upper limit value) control.

The power amount control unit 424 constantly acquires information on the amount of power used from target home appliances (eg, the cooking device 1 and the microwave oven 409), and does not exceed the preset total power amount. In addition, it has a function of limiting the power consumption of the home appliance 402, and is already known by the name of HEMS (household power management system).

When the power amount control unit 448 acquires information indicating a power reduction request or a power reduction instruction from the outside via the communication unit 425, the target home appliances (for example, the heating cooker 1 and , microwave oven 409, and air conditioner 405).

In FIG. 7, home gateway 411 includes environment detector 416 with built-in human detector 416H. The environment detection unit 416 also receives detection results in a predetermined format from a pollen sensor (not shown) and a sensor unit 416B that detects the temperature and humidity of the kitchen. 416A is a sensor unit for measuring the temperature, humidity, etc. of the kitchen 601, as described above.

The human detection unit 416H detects the presence of people in the kitchen 601, particularly in the area in front of the heating cooker 1 and in front of the door (not shown) of the refrigerator 403. Therefore, the sensor unit 416A uses one or more infrared sensors, ultrasonic sensors, or the like.

For example, when the distance between the front of the heating cooker 1 and the door of the refrigerator 403 is short, the sensor portion 416A is placed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen 601 or the like toward the space between the front of the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 403. to be installed.

In addition, when the distance between the front of the heating cooker 1 and the door of the refrigerator 403 is slightly away, one sensor unit 416A points toward the space in the vicinity of the front of the heating cooker 1 and the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen 601. etc. Further, another sensor unit 416A for the human detection unit 416H may be installed on the ceiling surface 420 or the like facing the space in front of the door of the refrigerator 403 . That is, the number of sensor units 416A of the human detection unit 416H is not limited to one, and any necessary number may be used.

One sensor part 416A may be attached to the lower end of the hood 430 of the range hood 407 to detect the presence of the user US in front of the cooker 1 .
As described above, the place where the sensor unit 416A of the human detection unit 416H is installed may be appropriately determined in consideration of the positional relationship between the refrigerator 403 and the cooking device 1 and the sensing capability (sensing range) of the human detection unit.

The human detection unit 416H functions as one sensor of the environment detection unit 416, and is an at-home detection device (not shown) for detecting that a person is inside the house HA, that is, in the kitchen 601 or the like. may function as an independent integrated sensing device forming one part of the In that case, information from an unlocking sensor or the like that detects that the door of the entrance (entrance) of the house HA has been unlocked may also be used by the home detecting device. As a result, it is possible to improve the accuracy in the process of determining whether someone is at home or not.

The input unit 421 can set various functions of the home gateway 411 by operating touch input type keys formed on the liquid crystal display screen. As one of the functions, it is possible to specify the electric home appliance 402 for which the upper limit value of power consumption is to be set, and then set the upper limit value of power consumption, the usable time period, and the like. For example, the user US can input the maximum power consumption of the heating cooker 1, such as 4800W and 5400W.

The input unit 421 has a function of inputting by operating the touch input type keys formed on the liquid crystal display screen, as well as a function of inputting by voice. You can input various functions you want by emitting toward the ).

445 is the aforementioned alarm device that warns the occupants by means of sound or light. The central control unit 423 receives measurement data from the environment detection unit 416 and monitoring data from the temperature monitoring device 422, and an alarm device 445 transmits an alarm instruction signal. Since the alarm device 445 is not controlled by the power control unit 424, the power supply to the alarm device 445 itself will not be restricted or cut off due to changes in the power consumption of the home appliance 402. do not have.

As shown in FIG. 7, the home gateway 411 includes a communication section (receiving section/transmitting section) 425 , a central control section 423 and a storage device 426 .
The communication unit 425 is a communication unit that can individually perform wireless communication or infrared communication with the electrical appliances 402 such as the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 403 .

In FIG. 7, the storage device 426 stores operating history information of the home gateway 411, daily power control history information of the home appliance 402, daily "environmental information" acquired by the environment detection unit 416, and the like. It is a device that records a large amount of information. The storage device 426 is, for example, various semiconductor memories, HDD, or the like.

The central control unit 423 has a microcomputer serving as the core of information processing. It also incorporates ROM and RAM for the CPU of the microcomputer to read or write (store) data. The ROM stores a computer program that defines various operations.

In FIG. 7, 419 is a wide area communication circuit network (Internet) that performs wireless communication with a communication unit (receiving unit/transmitting unit) 425 . Although only one communication unit 425 is shown in FIG. 7, a communication unit (receiving unit/transmitting unit) for home appliance 402 and a communication unit for wide area communication network (Internet) 419 are separately provided. You may set it individually. Also, an NFC communication unit may be provided separately so that information can be directly exchanged with NFC (Near Field Communication) provided in the communication terminal device 200 by wireless communication.

427 is a schedule management unit. This schedule management unit has a calendar function and can store schedule information of events for at least January (maximum 31 days).

The schedule management function itself has already been proposed in many patent documents. In the first embodiment, the input unit 421 can register the scheduled date and scheduled start time (or time period) of an event (for example, shopping, going out, etc.) for each resident.

If the event information is stored in the schedule management unit 427, the schedule management unit 427 issues a notification when the stored date and time comes. The form of notification is to display on the liquid crystal display screen of the input unit 421 or to notify by a voice synthesizer (not shown). Alternatively, a method of issuing a notification to the communication terminal device 200 possessed by the resident (also referred to as “push type notification”) may be used.

When home electric appliance 402 such as heating cooker 1 is activated, the heating cooker 1 or refrigerator 403 is notified based on the event information registered from schedule management unit 427. There is

(3. Configuration of heating cooker)
Next, the configuration of the heating cooker 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 11. FIG.
8 and 9, the heating cooker 1 is a built-in IH cooking heater that is incorporated in kitchen furniture (kitchen furniture) 600 having a cooking table at the top. A heating cooker 1 has a main body 2 and a top plate 3 placed on the main body 2 . The top plate 3 is exposed above the kitchen top plate forming the top surface of the kitchen furniture 600 .

The top plate 3 is composed of, for example, a heat-resistant glass plate and a metal frame attached around the glass plate. The upper surface of the top plate 3 is provided with three heating ports 4: a left heating port 4L, a right heating port 4R, and a central heating port 4C.

The left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the central heating port 4C indicate areas in which metal cooking containers such as pots or frying pans (also referred to as “object to be heated” N with respect to the first heating means HM1) are placed. It is. Guidance marks (not shown) serving as guides for placing the object to be heated can be printed on the upper surface of the top plate 3 at the left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the central heating port 4C. Drawn.

An exhaust port cover 5 is provided on the far side (rear side) of the top plate 3 . The exhaust port cover 5 is made of a punching metal or a grid-like metal member having a large number of small through-holes, and has air permeability and low air resistance throughout. Exhaust air emitted from the interior of the heating cooker 1 passes through the exhaust port cover 5 and exits the heating cooker 1 .

A door (heating door) 7 for opening and closing a front opening of a heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 9) disposed inside the main body 2 is provided on the front of the main body 2 of the heating cooker 1 . The door 7 is provided with a handle 8 for opening and closing it.

FIG. 9 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker 1 according to Embodiment 1 as viewed from the side. As shown in FIG. 9, an induction heating coil 9L (hereinafter referred to as "left IH coil") as left induction heating means is provided below the left heating port 4L.

Similarly, an induction heating coil 9R (hereinafter referred to as a "right IH coil") as a right induction heating means is located below the right heating port 4R, and an induction heating coil 9R as a central induction heating means is located below the central heating port 4C. A heating coil 9C (hereinafter referred to as "central IH coil") is provided.

These IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R are circular heating coils formed by winding thin conductor wires such as copper wires or aluminum wires, and generate high-frequency magnetic fields when supplied with high-frequency currents. As a result, the cooking vessel (the object to be heated N) arranged on the left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the central heating port 4C is induction-heated.

The heating means including the IH coils 9C, 9L, 9R and their driving circuits (referring to high-frequency power supply circuits such as inverter circuits, not shown) may be referred to as an induction heating source or first heating means HM1. be. In the following description, the "first heating means" HM1 will be used unless otherwise contradicted.

A temperature sensor group 30 (see FIG. 16) consisting of a plurality of temperature sensors (not shown) is provided near the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R to detect the temperature of the top plate 3 and the cooking vessel (object to be heated). ) is installed. One temperature sensor 30A (not shown) constitutes one sensor in the temperature sensor group 30 . The temperature sensor here may be a contact temperature sensor such as a thermistor, or a non-contact temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor, or any one of them.

The heating chamber 6 is provided inside the main body 2 and below the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R. The heating chamber 6 is surrounded by a metal wall made of stainless steel or the like, and is a space for heating an object to be cooked (food, ingredients) accommodated in the heating chamber 6 .

The food to be cooked may be placed on a heat-resistant plastic container, porcelain, or heat-resistant glass dish, or put in a container and placed in the heating chamber 6. It is sometimes called a “heated container”. However, since these containers are not induction-heated by the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R, even if they are placed on the heating port 4 of the top plate 3, they are not called "objects to be heated" N of the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R. do not have.

A horizontally long rectangular opening (not shown) is formed in the front surface of the heating chamber 6 for taking in and out the food to be cooked. The opening on the front side of the heating chamber 6 is covered with a door 7 so as to be openable and closable. The door 7 is rotatably supported by the main body 2 via hinges and arms (not shown). As a result, the door 7 is configured to open forward to a horizontal position with its lower end as a fulcrum (rotational center). The door 7 may be pulled forward integrally with a support member (a structure such as a shelf, not shown) that supports the container to be heated from below by means of a slide rail (not shown).

The door 7 is provided with an open/close detector 10 for detecting opening/closing of the door 7 . The open/close detector 10 is, for example, a microswitch or an infrared sensor. A microwave oscillator 11 for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 6 is provided behind the heating chamber 6 . The microwave oscillator 11 is composed of, for example, a magnetron, and radiates microwaves into the heating chamber 6 to heat the food placed in the heating chamber, which is called range heating.

The heating means including the microwave oscillator 11 and its driving circuit (meaning a high-frequency power supply circuit such as an inverter circuit, not shown) may be called a second heating means HM2.

Further, the heating chamber 6 is provided with an upper radiant heating means 12a and a lower radiant heating means 12b for heating the food to be cooked from above and below by so-called heaters. The upper radiant heat heating means 12a is arranged on the outside or inside ceiling wall surface of the heating chamber 6, and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b is arranged on the inside or outside wall surface of the heating chamber 6, both of which are sheathed heaters.

Other types of radiant heating means (for example, mica heaters, carbon heaters, etc.) may be installed outside the heating chamber 6 . 5 shows an example in which both the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b are installed so as to be in close contact with the outer wall surface of the heating chamber 6. As shown in FIG.

The heating means including the upper radiant heat heating means 12a, the lower radiant heat heating means 12b, and their driving circuits (not shown) may be referred to as third heating means HM3. The upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b may be collectively referred to as "radiant heat heating means", in which case the code "12" is used.

In addition, the heating chamber 6 is provided with an infrared sensor 13 as a non-contact temperature sensor to detect the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6 in a non-contact manner. The temperature range detected by the infrared sensor 13 is set to -20°C to 100°C, for example. As a result, the degree of heating of the object to be cooked can be accurately detected in real time, for example, in increments of 1°C. This infrared sensor 13 also constitutes one sensor in the temperature sensor group 30 (see FIG. 16).

The heating chamber 6 is also provided with a contact temperature sensor (for example, a thermistor sensor) 14 which is a room temperature sensor for detecting the ambient temperature inside the heating chamber 6 or the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 6 .

Since the thermistor sensor 14 detects a temperature change by detecting a change in electrical resistance, the upper limit of the temperature that can be detected is about 250.degree. This thermistor sensor 14 also constitutes one sensor in the temperature sensor group 30 . The thermistor sensor 14 may be installed at two locations near the bottom surface and near the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 6 as shown in FIG.

Next, FIG. 10 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a top view of the heating cooker 1 according to Embodiment 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 10 , a left operating section 15L, a central operating section 15M and a right operating section 15R are provided on the front side of the upper surface of the top plate 3 of the heating cooker 1 . These three operation units may be collectively referred to as an "input operation unit", in which case reference numeral 15 is used.

On the far side (rear side) of the left operating section 15L, the central operating section 15M and the right operating section 15R, there are provided a left thermal power display section 17L, a central display section 16M and a right thermal power display section 17R, a left display section 16L and a right display section. 16R and a central heating status display portion 17M are provided.

The left display section 16L, the central display section 16M, and the right display section 16R may be collectively referred to as a "display section" in which case reference numeral 16 is used. The central display unit 16M has a horizontally long liquid crystal display screen.

The left heating power display section 17L and the right heating power display section 17R display the heating power level by means of light-emitting elements (such as LEDs), and do not have display screens.

The left heating power display section 17L, the right heating display section 17R, and the central heating status display section 17M may be collectively referred to as the "heating power display section" in which case reference numeral 17 is used.

A button (key) 20A for operating the main power switch 20 (see FIG. 16) is provided adjacent to the right operating section 15R. The main power switch 20 turns on or off the main power of the heating cooker 1 . The button (key) that is pressed for ON-OFF is the operation button 20A.

When the operation button 20A is pressed, for example, for several seconds while the main power source of the heating cooker 1 is OFF, the main power source is turned ON. Also, when the main power source of the heating cooker 1 is ON, the main power source is turned OFF by pressing the operation button 20A for several seconds, for example.

Next, FIG. 11 will be described.
In FIG. 11, an input key 180 for selecting a voice input mode is arranged in the central operation section 15M of the input operation section 15. As shown in FIG. This input key 180 may be a mechanical switch, or may be an input key of a touch type input switch like input keys 153M to 159M to be described later.

When the input key 180 for selecting this voice input is pressed once, the next input can be performed by voice.
When this input key 180 is pressed, the state is switched to "speech input mode 2".
However, this input key 180 cannot select the heating means and the heating port (the first heating means HM1) by voice.

Therefore, the input key 180 needs to be operated after the touch operation (“short press”) of the input key 153L for selecting the heating port 4L, for example. In other words, if the input key 153L is "long-pressed", it can be switched to voice input mode 2. If the input key 153L is not "long-pressed" but "short-pressed" here, if the input key 180 is subsequently pressed, can be switched to voice input mode 2.
In the central operation unit 15M, when any one of the input keys 153M, 154M, or 155M is touch-operated and then the input key 180 is operated, the control device is switched to the "voice input mode 2". An input processing unit (input limiting unit) 70 in 40 puts the audio signal analysis unit 58 (see FIG. 16) into an input standby state. Even if this input key 180 is touch-operated, five of the input key 153M, the input key 151M for starting the heating operation, the input key 152M for stopping, and the input keys 153L and 153R of the left and right operation sections 15L and 15R have input functions. is not affected in any way. Also, when these five input keys are touch-operated, the "voice input mode 2" by the input key 180 is canceled.

As described above, the "voice input mode 2" by the input of the input key 180 can be set to the touch form of specific (touch-type) input keys such as various touch-type input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M, which will be described later. This is different from the "voice input mode 1" that is set accordingly.

When the input key 180 is pressed, the 'voice input mode 2' is activated from that moment. That is, it becomes "speech input mode 2". 16, when there is an audio signal from the audio signal receiving section 56, the audio signal analysis section 58 analyzes the contents of the audio signal one by one and outputs the analysis result to the heating control section 43. FIG.

It should be noted that the "range in which touch input is invalidated" by input key 180 for selecting voice input may be limited to central operation unit 15M only. In this way, when the input key 180 is pressed, the input functions of specific (touch) input keys such as various touch input keys 154M to 159M arranged on the central operation unit 15M are disabled as described later. become. Then, it shifts to an input standby state for receiving a voice command from the user US. Note that, after the heating operation is started, touch input cannot be invalidated using the input key 180, so there is no restriction on the input of various input keys (for example, a stop command by 152M) during the heating operation.

A light emitting unit 21M emits light when the input function of the input key 180 is valid, and continues to emit light until the input function becomes invalid. One or a plurality of light emitting elements 27 (see FIG. 16) such as LEDs are arranged in each of the light emitting units 21M, and driven by the light emission control unit 26 (see FIG. 16).

An input key 151KP for function setting is arranged at a position adjacent to the left side of the input key 153M in the central operation unit 15M.

In this Embodiment 1, an input mode in which the heating cooker 1 is controlled by the user US's fingertip or the like pressing operation (including light contact) is referred to as a "touch input mode". For this reason, various input keys 151M to 159M, 151R to 155R, and 151L to 155L, which will be described later, may be called a "touch input mode selector".

Next, FIG. 12 will be described.
FIG. 12 is an enlarged view of the left display portion 16L, the left heating power display portion 17L, and the left operation portion 15L according to the first embodiment. The left display section 16L displays information about cooking in the left heating port 4L, and is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display.

The left display section 16L displays the set time of "timer cooking" for the object to be heated N placed on the left heating port 4L, the elapsed time from the start of the heating operation in the left heating port 4L, or the timer set time. Displays the remaining time until the is finished.

The "timer cooking" is cooking in which the heating operation is performed only for the time (set time) set (input) by the user US (using the input key 151L), and when the set time has elapsed, the heating operation is automatically stopped. This is one of the convenient functions for the user US.

The left display section 16L displays the automatically set temperature (default temperature) or the current temperature when preheating cooking in the left heating port 4L is selected. The automatically set temperature (default temperature) refers to the target temperature of the bottom surface of the object to be heated (for example, a metal pot) N when the object to be heated is heated in the left heating port 4L. The default temperature can be arbitrarily changed within a certain range by the user US. Also, for example, the target temperature can be set to an arbitrary temperature by touching the input keys 155R and 154R (however, if the temperature exceeds a predetermined allowable range, the setting input is rejected by the heating control unit 43). ).

The left heating power display section 17L is composed of a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) arranged in a horizontal line, and displays the heating power of the left heating port 4L in multiple stages. The left thermal power display unit 17L expresses thermal power by switching the lighting state (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc.) of a plurality of LEDs or switching the lighting color. As a result, it is possible to inform the user US of the thermal power in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner.

The left operation section 15L is for inputting an operation related to heat cooking in the left heating port 4L.
As shown in FIG. 12, the left operating section 15L has five input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L and 155L. These input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L and 155L are touch keys. For example, it is a capacitive touch sensor (touch switch) that allows input by utilizing a change in capacitance when the user US touches lightly with a finger or the like.

Light emitting units 21L are provided corresponding to the input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L and 155L. The light emitting unit 21L is composed of a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) and emits light according to the operation of the input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L and 155L. Note that two adjacent input keys 154L and 155L share one light emitting part 21L in order to exhibit the same kind of function of increasing/decreasing thermal power.

The input key 151L is a key that is touch-operated when selecting "timer cooking" on the left heating port 4L. This timer cooking is a cooking method in which the user US sets the heating operation time as described above, and the heating operation is performed only during the set time.

The input key 152L is a key that is pressed down when selecting a "control menu" to be executed in the left heating port 4L. One of a plurality of control menus can be selected each time the input key 152L is pressed. The "control menu" here means, for example, boiling water, boiling, frying (automatic cooking), and the like. The drive time, heating power, drive pattern, etc. of the left heating port 4L differ for each control menu.

The control menu in which the left heating port 4L and the right heating port 4R are operated by operating the left operating section 15L or the right operating section 15R and the central operating section 15M is not operated is a "single cooking mode" in which all induction heating is performed. It is a control menu of KM1. The "single cooking mode" KM1 will be explained later.

The input key 153L is a key that is pressed to select cooking in the left heating port 4L. That is, by pressing the input key 153L, cooking (single cooking mode KM1) using the left IH coil 9L arranged below the left heating port 4L is selected. When the input key 153L is pressed again while the left IH coil 9L is being driven, the driving of the left IH coil 9L is stopped and the induction heating operation is immediately stopped.

The input keys 154L and 155L are keys to be pressed when specifying the heating power for heat cooking in the left heating port 4L. By pressing the input key 154L on the left side, the heat power is lowered by one step. On the contrary, by pressing the input key 155L on the right side, the heating power is increased by one step. The heating power for induction cooking at the left heating port 4L is divided into 9 levels from the rated minimum heating power (heating power level 1: 150 W) to the rated maximum heating power (heating power level 9: 3200 W).

Next, FIG. 13 will be described.
FIG. 13 is an enlarged view of right display portion 16R, right thermal power display portion 17R, and right operation portion 15R according to the first embodiment. The right display section 16R displays information related to cooking in the right heating port 4R, and is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display. The information related to cooking in the right heating port 4R displayed on the right display portion 16R is the same as the information related to cooking in the left heating port 4L.

The right heating power display section 17R is composed of a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) and displays the heating power of the right heating port 4R in multiple stages. The right thermal power display section 17R, like the left thermal power display section 17L, expresses thermal power by switching the lighting state (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc.) of a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) or by switching the lighting color.

The right operation unit 15R is for inputting operations related to heat cooking in the right heating port 4R. As shown in FIG. 13, the right operation section 15R has five input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R and 155R.

The input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R and 155R are configured similarly to the left operation section 15L. For example, it is composed of capacitive touch keys that allow input by utilizing a change in capacitance when the user US touches it lightly with a finger or the like.

Light-emitting portions 21R are provided corresponding to the input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R and 155R, respectively. The light emitting unit 21R is a light emitting element (LED), and according to the operation of the input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R and 155R, the light emitting units 21R corresponding to the respective input keys emit light. However, the two adjacent input keys 154R and 155R share one light emitting part 21R in order to exhibit the same kind of function of increasing/decreasing thermal power.

The input key 151R is a key that is pressed when selecting timer cooking in the right heating port 4R. The input key 152R is a key that is pressed when selecting a control menu to be executed at the right heating port 4R.

The input key 153R is a key that is pressed to select cooking in the right heating port 4R. That is, by pressing the input key 153R, cooking (single cooking mode KM1) using the right IH coil 9R arranged below the left heating port 4R is selected. When the input key 153R is pressed again while the right IH coil 9R is being driven, the driving of the right IH coil 9R is stopped and the induction heating operation is immediately stopped.

The input keys 154R and 154R are keys that are pressed when specifying the heat power for cooking in the right heating port 4R. By pressing the left input key 154R, the heat power is lowered by one step. On the contrary, by pressing the right input key 155R, the heating power is raised one step at a time. The heating power for induction cooking in the right heating port 4R is divided into 9 stages from the rated minimum heating power (heating power level 1) of 150W to the rated maximum heating power (heating power level 9) of 3200W.

Next, FIG. 14 will be described.
FIG. 14 is an enlarged view of central display portion 16M, central operation portion 15M, and central heating status display portion 17M according to the first embodiment.

The central display section 16M displays information and alarms of the entire heating cooker 1, and is configured by a liquid crystal display. On the display screen of the central display unit 16M, selection results of induction heating means (first heating means) HM1, microwave heating means (second heating means) HM2, and radiation heat heating means (third heating means) HM3 are displayed. It displays the operating state of each heating means, caution information or warning information for cooking with heat by each heating means.

The central display section 16M is a single liquid crystal display in terms of hardware, but as shown in FIG. , and different display can be performed for each display area.

In addition, the three display areas 22 to 24 may be linked appropriately according to the display scene to form one (wide area) display area to display one or more purposes. Note that the first display area 22 is hereinafter referred to as the first area 22 . The second display area 23 is called the second area 23 . The third display area 24 is called the third area 24 .

The central heating status display portion 17M is divided into two stages in the front-rear direction. A grill light-emitting element (LED) 311 behind the character display of "oven", an oven light-emitting element (LED) 312 behind the character display of "Central IH", and behind the character display of A central IH light emitting element (LED) 313 is arranged.

On the upper (rear) side, there are letters warning "high temperature caution" and high temperature warning lights placed in front and below a figure schematically representing the heating chamber 6 and the three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R. An element (LED) group 314 is arranged.

The high temperature caution light-emitting element (LED) group 314 is composed of a heating chamber high temperature caution light-emitting element (LED) 314a and an IH high temperature caution light-emitting element (LED) 314b arranged side by side.

The heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314a lights up when the temperature in the heating chamber 6 is high, for example, 50° C. or higher.
The IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314b lights up when any one of the left IH coil 9L, right IH coil 9R, and center IH coil 9C is in operation or when the temperature of the top plate 3 is high, for example, 50° C. or higher. .

The central operation unit 15M is mainly used to input operations related to cooking in the heating chamber 6 and cooking by the central heating port 4C.
As shown in FIG. 14, the central operation unit 15M has nine input keys 151M, 152M, 153M, 154M, 155M, 156M, 157M, 158M, 159M and a function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 11).

The nine input keys 151M to 159M are capacitive type touch keys that generate an input command signal each time a touch operation is performed. Further, a light emitting section 21M is provided near each of these input keys 151M to 159M.

The function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 11) is arranged on the leftmost side of the central operation section 15M. The function setting key 151KP is used to set various operations, displays, etc., of the heating cooker 1 as a whole as desired by the user US.

When the function setting key 151KP is pressed, the control device 40, which will be described later, switches to the "function setting mode", and displays the following "function setting menu" on the display screen of the central display section 16M.
(1) Child lock setting (setting for disabling operation of various input keys).
(2) Ventilator 407 linked mode setting.
(3) Cleaning guide setting (automatic notification function setting for cleaning timing of heating chamber 6 and exhaust port cover 5).
(4) Peak cut setting (maximum power consumption is selected from four levels of 5700W, 5000W, 4800W and 4000W).
(5) Audio guide audio settings.
(6) Audio guide volume setting.
(7) Settings for preventing forgetting to take out the food to be cooked, cooking utensils, etc. from the heating chamber 6 (whether or not an alarm is issued by the voice notification unit 50 and the central display unit 16M).
(8) HEMS registration settings (settings related to the power usage limit function of a home power control device).
(9) Time unit setting for timer cooking (1 minute unit setting changed to 5 minute or 30 minute unit).
(10) Switching between beginner mode and normal (expert) mode.
(11) Setting the type (range) of inventory information to be acquired from the external device (refrigerator 403).
(12) Setting of display priority (specific cooking menu to be displayed by default, identification information 167) of each cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
(13) Setting of display priority (specific control menu to be displayed by default) of each control menu (for example, "microwave grill", "boiled under leafy vegetables") of the composite cooking mode KM2.
(14) When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 is "ON", the setting of the cooking mode to be automatically displayed on the central display unit 16M (coordinated cooking mode KM3 and combined cooking mode KM2 display priority, etc.).
(15) Setting for not automatically displaying additional information 165 and 166 (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, and setting for not notifying additional information 165 and 166 by voice by the voice notification unit 50 .
(16) When displaying individual cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 on the central display unit 16M, a setting to individually display the components of the target cooking (food) and nutritional components each time. Either one of the food component and the nutrient may be used, or both may be used, but in the first embodiment, the input key 158M is used as the display command key for the food component, and the input key 159M is used as the display command key for the nutrient component.
When either one of the input keys 158M or 159M is operated within a predetermined period of time, or when voice input mode 1 is set and a command is given by voice, the food ingredients or nutritional ingredients are displayed. In other words, it is not always displayed together with the cooking menu identification information 167 (described later), but is displayed according to the operation (including voice) of the user US. Details will be described with reference to FIG.
(17) When selecting an individual cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, setting to search for cooking menu candidates from food ingredients and nutritional ingredients and display them on the central display section 16M. In this case, the user US can search by voice by pressing the input key 180 to set "voice input mode 2". Details will be described with reference to FIG.
(18) Setting the display priority of each cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
Regarding the setting of a specific cooking menu to be displayed by default, either the food component or the nutritional component is set as the highest priority item for display. By setting this, for example, the cooking menu can be displayed in ascending order of energy amount (calorie value) among the nutritional components, as shown in FIG. Alternatively, cooking menus can be displayed in descending order of the amount of "iron" as a nutritional ingredient.

As described above, when the "function setting mode" is selected by pressing the function setting key 151KP, it is possible to add the display of food components or nutritional components, and once the display has been set, , and then can be set to be canceled in the function setting mode. Therefore, there is an advantage that the information to be set, the range, and the display method can be selected according to the desire of the user US.

The "beginner mode" is an optional function for those who are unfamiliar with the use of the heating cooker 1 (user US). The content of is more detailed and polite. Further, regarding the input operation on the input operation unit 15, the voice guidance is increased, and the display information on the display screen of the central display unit 16M is increased.

When the beginner mode is set, especially in the case of cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3, in the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, reference information displayed on the display screen of the central display unit 16M (for example, The amount of additional information 165 and 166 (including additional information 165 and 166 to be described later) is increased, or the content of the audio guide in the audio notification unit 50 is increased. Therefore, the function of assisting the input operation of the user US is enhanced.

In addition, in conjunction with the switching from the "beginner mode" to the "normal (professional) mode", the content of the voice guidance of the voice notification unit 50 may be automatically set so as not to be changed. good.

When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 is turned "ON" to be described later, the setting of the cooking mode automatically displayed on the central display unit 16M is the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode. It means to set one of KM2. Since both the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 use one central display section 16M, the user US can set to give priority to display of one of them. This will be explained in detail later.

In Embodiment 1, the "compound cooking mode" KM2 exceptionally includes several control menus for the single cooking mode KM1 by the central IH coil 9M (for example, a cooking item called "cooking rice").

When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 is turned “ON”, the control device 40 detects the opening of the door 7 .
It is presumed that the user US will cook using the heating chamber 6, and either the first specific screen 16M1 for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the second specific screen 16M2 for the combined cooking mode KM2. is automatically displayed on the central display unit 16M.
Immediately after the main power switch 20 is turned "ON", the central display section 16M displays a standby initial screen 16MH, which will be described later. After that, immediately after the door 7 is opened, the second specific screen 16M2 is automatically displayed.

After the "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen of the central display unit 16M, one specific input key (for example, 154M) other than the function setting key 151KP is "long pressed" (hereinafter referred to as " long press”) to select one setting menu from the above-mentioned “function setting menu”, and subsequently change the desired setting contents.

Alternatively, when two specific input keys other than the function setting key 151KP are "long-pressed" at the same time, one of the above-described "function setting menus" can be called up and the desired settings can be changed. can be done.

The "long press" means, for example, a state of being continuously pressed for 5 seconds or more.
The control device 40 compares the timing from ON to OFF of the touch input on the central operation unit 15M with a reference value to determine whether or not it is in the "long press" state. Alternatively, the input mode determination section 15C (see FIG. 17) inside the central operation section 15 determines.
In this first embodiment, an example will be described in which the central operation unit 15M determines whether or not it is in the "long press" state (using FIG. 17 later).

In the central operation unit 15M, the timing at which the two input keys (for example, 154M and 155M) are pressed at the same time is determined by the "ON" (when touched) signal sent from the input operation unit 15M to the control device 40. can be discriminated.

In the following description, an embodiment will be described in which it is determined whether or not the input operation unit 15M is a "long press". However, although not adopted in the first embodiment, the input operation unit 15M measures the time from when the "ON" signal changes to when it changes to the "OFF" signal, and transmits the data to the control device 40. , there is also a method of determining whether or not it is a “long press” in the control device 40 .

In the first embodiment, there is a function of determining "long press" as described above for a specific input key (for example, 154M, 153R) and switching to the "voice input mode 1".
This will be explained in detail in FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG.
Note that a touch operation other than a "long press", that is, a continuous touch state of less than 5 seconds, for example, may be referred to as a "short press". Since it is also related to the detection capability of each of the input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R, for example, if the touch time is in the range of 0.1 seconds to 4.9 seconds, it is controlled to be a “short press”. The device 40 makes the determination.

The type (range) of the inventory information acquired from the refrigerator 403 is, for example, limited to only frozen foods, or limited to foods that can be heated by a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2). .

In the stage where the control mode and control conditions (temperature, heat power, time, etc.) of the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3 are selected on the central display portion 16M, function setting The input function of the function setting key 151KP is disabled so as not to switch modes.

Next, the setting of the peak cut value of the heating cooker 1 will be described.
Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400 W, it can be set to any of 5000 W, 4800 W, or 4000 W when installed at the home of the user US.

Thus, the function of the heating cooker 1 can be changed by the function setting key 151KP according to the user US's desire, usage environment (electric power situation of the home where the appliance is installed), and the like. When the peak cut value is set in this manner, the setting result is stored in the control device 40. Therefore, when the user US selects the linked cooking mode KM3 as described later, the linked cooking mode KM3 is set. is used to determine whether or not to permit the use of (determine permission conditions). Therefore, while the recipe data CD, which will be described later, is being received from the communication terminal device 200, the peak cut value cannot be changed using the function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 11).

In FIG. 14, the light emitting portion 21M is composed of an LED and emits light according to the operation of the input keys 151M to 159M. That is, when the input function is valid, the corresponding light emitting section 21M continues to emit light.
Since the two adjacent input keys 155M and 154M change the display contents of the first area 22 in common, they share one light emitting section 21M.

Since the two adjacent input keys 157M and 156M change the display contents of the second area 23 in common, they share one light emitting section 21M.
Since the two adjacent input keys 159M and 158M change the display contents of the third area 24 in common, they share one light emitting section 21M.

The input key 151M is a start key that is pressed (touch operated) to start cooking, and the input key 152M is a cancel key that is pressed (touch operated) to stop or end cooking. is.

The input key 153M is an input key (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "first input key") for selecting the "cooking mode" KM3 when operated after the main power switch 20 is turned on.

When the input keys 154M and 155M are operated after the main power switch 20 is turned ON (without pressing the input key 153M), the input keys for selecting the "compound cooking mode" KM2 (hereinafter referred to as "second input key ”).

When the input keys 153R and 153L described in FIG. 13 are operated after the main power switch 20 is turned ON (with the input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M not pressed), the "single cooking mode" KM1 is selected. Input key (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "third input key").

The input key 151M described above has a function of determining the start of cooking for two types of cooking, the "compound cooking mode" KM2 and the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3, and is hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "start key". In the "single cooking mode" KM1, the input keys 153L and 153R have the function of deciding to start cooking.

The input key 152M has a function of ending (including pausing) the cooking of the two cooking modes of the "composite cooking mode" KM2 and the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3, and is hereinafter referred to as a "stop key". There is In the "single cooking mode" KM1, the input keys 153L and 153R have the function of determining the end of cooking.

The input keys 154M and 155M shown in FIG. 14 are input keys ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a "second input key").

The four input keys 156M to 159M have a function that allows the user US to adjust control conditions such as microwave output and cooking time (within a certain range). ” may be called.

The four input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R are also called "audio input switching keys" capable of switching to the "audio input mode 1". However, these four input keys exhibit the function of the "voice input switching key" only when the touch operation is "long press". This point will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG.

When any one of the "single cooking mode" KM1, the "combined cooking mode" KM2 and the "cooperation cooking mode" KM3 is selected, the selection result is displayed on the central display section 16M. Also, when the "speech input mode 1" is switched, a message to that effect is displayed (see FIGS. 27 and 28). The "single cooking mode", "combined cooking mode" and "cooperation cooking mode" will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIG. 14, the input keys 154M and 155M are arranged adjacent to and near the front of the first area 22 of the central display section 16M, and are displayed in the first area 22 of the central display section 16M. This is a key for switching the display contents of the displayed screen.

Next, FIG. 15 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a plan view of the central display section 16M.
When the input key 154M is pressed down, i.e., operated by the user US, the content displayed in the first area 22, for example, the display information of "manual range" of one control menu belonging to the "compound cooking mode" KM2 25A moves backward. At the same time, the display information 25B of "boiled under leafy vegetables" displayed on the front side is displayed in the center. It should be noted that the input key 154M in this case is the case of the above-described "short press", and in the case of the "long press", it functions as the "speech input switching key". 17.

Further, when the input key 155M is pressed down, that is, when the user US operates it, the display information 25A of "range manual" displayed in the first area 22 moves forward and is displayed on the rear side. The display information 25C for "warming up" is displayed in the center. In this case, unlike the input key 154M, the input key 155M is not the "speech input switching key", so the input function does not change between "short press" and "long press" (for example, , long press is not recognized as a valid input operation).

Thus, the user US can select a specific control menu (for example, "manual range") in the "control menu" by operating the input keys 154M and 155M.

The control menu for the above-mentioned "range manual" originally belongs to the "single cooking mode KM1" that uses only the second heating means HM2. The first area 22 also displays control menus (compound cooking) belonging to the mode KM3 and control menus and linked cooking menus belonging to linked cooking menus (for example, 'hamburger').

Then, by pressing the input key (start key) 151M, that is, by being operated by the user US, in the case of FIG. 14, "manual range" of the control menu displayed in the center is selected. . Corresponding heating is started, that is, the heating means (in this case, the microwave oscillation source 11) is driven. Therefore, the input keys 154M and 155M correspond to control menu selection keys operated by the user US. Similarly, it corresponds to the selection key of the control menu (for compound cooking). Furthermore, it corresponds also to the selection key of the cooperative cooking menu.

As shown in FIG. 14, the input keys 156M and 157M are arranged adjacent to and near the front of the second area 23 of the central display section 16M, and the screen displayed in the second area 23 of the central display section 16M. This is a key for switching the display contents of .

15 again, by pressing the input key 156M, the wattage (microwave output value) displayed in the second area 23 ("500 W" in FIG. 15) is increased by one step. (eg to "600W"). Conversely, by pressing the input key 157M, the wattage displayed in the second area 23 is decreased by one step (for example, to "200 W").

The user US operates input keys 156M and 157M to set the wattage (microwave output value) can be selected.

As shown in FIG. 14, the input keys 158M and 159M are arranged adjacent to and near the front of the third area 24 of the central display section 16M, and switch the display contents displayed in the third area 24. is the key for

In the example of FIG. 15, when the input key 158M is pressed, the heating operation time (set time) displayed in the third area 24 is increased by one step. Conversely, by pressing the input key 159M, the heating operation time displayed in the third area 24 is decreased by one step.

The user US can select the set time for microwave cooking to be performed in the heating chamber 6 by operating the input keys 158M and 159M, and 34M is the set time information. Note that 34 W is heating intensity information indicating the magnitude of power consumption, microwave output, etc. during heating.

Next, FIG. 16 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a control block diagram showing main functions of the heating cooker 1 according to Embodiment 1. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 16 , the heating cooker 1 includes a control device 40 that integrally controls the entire heating cooker 1 .

The control device 40 is an electronic circuit board on which electronic components such as a control circuit for controlling the operation of each part constituting the heating cooker 1 are mounted. Control device 40 controls left IH coil 9L, right IH coil 9R, and center IH coil 9C (not shown) based on the operation of left operation section 15L and right operation section 15R and the temperature of the object to be heated on top plate 3. control the drive of

The control device 40 controls the central IH coil 9C, the microwave heating means 11, the central IH coil 9C, the microwave heating means 11 and It controls the driving of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b.

Further, the control device 40 controls the display of the left display section 16L, the right display section 16R, the left heating power display section 17L, and the right heating power display section 17R based on the operations of the left operating section 15L and the right operating section 15R.

Furthermore, the control device 40 displays the central display section 16M and the central heating status display section 17M based on the open signal from the opening/closing detection section 10 and the operations of the left operating section 15L, the right operating section 15R and the central operating section 15M. Control.

The control device 40 controls data such as various programs and parameters used for controlling the heating cooker 1 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "control data"), and the display units 16L, 16R, 16M, 17L, and 17R. has a storage device 41 for storing display screen data (hereinafter referred to as "display condition data"). Further, the control device 40 activates the voice notification unit 50 as necessary, and notifies the user US of the operation status of the heating cooker 1 by voice.

The control device 40 causes the recipe data storage section 42 of the storage device 41 to store data in which information such as various programs and parameters used for the heat cooking control of the heating control section 43 are summarized in a fixed format. . This data is the aforementioned recipe data CD. As will be described later, in the heating cooker 1, recipe data CD corresponding to each of the eight cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are prepared from the beginning.

The "recipe data" CD and the "display condition data" can be acquired for each individual cooking menu from an external device such as a smart phone 200, which is a type of communication terminal device.

A storage unit 42 stores the recipe data CD and the display condition data. Note that the storage unit 42 may constitute one section (area) in the storage device 41, or may be configured separately from the storage device 41 in terms of hardware.

Reference numeral 43 denotes a heating control unit for integrally controlling the heating operation of the entire heating cooker 1, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer.
A data acquisition unit 53 acquires the recipe data CD from the smartphone 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51 . Also, the “display condition data” may be acquired from the smartphone 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51 . In addition, the external server 417 is included in the cloud server 300 .

A communication unit 51 wirelessly communicates with the outside, and has a function of performing wireless communication 400 with the smartphone 200 as shown in FIG. 1 or 3 . Alternatively, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, it has the function of forming the cloud server 300 and the network NW (203, 204, 205).

Reference numeral 54 denotes a permission condition determination unit that determines whether cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or combined cooking mode KM2 is permitted.
A power supply circuit 57 supplies power of a constant voltage to the control device 40 . A main power switch 20 is inserted into the power supply circuit 57 .

A restriction unit 55 restricts acquisition of the recipe data CD.
The restriction unit 55 allows the data acquisition unit 53 to obtain the recipe via the communication unit 51 during a standby period before starting cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (that is, before “cooking step 1” described later). It has a function to limit the acquisition of data CDs.

Furthermore, the restriction unit 55 restricts acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of one cooking menu is completed based on the recipe data CD acquired from the outside. have a function.
Note that the restriction unit 55 may be realized by one control program of a computer (not shown) that constitutes the control device 40, and it is not necessarily required to be configured separately from the control device 40 on hardware. .

As shown in FIG. 16, the input operation unit 15 has an audio signal receiving unit 56 that receives the voice uttered by the user US with a microphone (not shown) and converts it into a predetermined audio signal.

On the other hand, the control device 40 is provided with an audio signal analysis section 58 that receives the audio signal from the audio signal receiving section 56 and analyzes the content of the audio. The audio signal analysis unit 58 compares the information in the audio database in the storage device 41 , analyzes the content of the audio received by the audio signal reception unit 56 , and transmits the analysis result to the heating control unit 43 .

70 is an input processing unit. The input processing unit 70 receives an input signal from the input operation unit 15 and switches its own input reception mode to "speech input mode 1". It also controls the input signal analysis unit 52 . Furthermore, it receives the analysis result from the audio signal analysis unit 58 and transmits control data to the heating control unit 43 .

In FIG. 16, 59 is a human detection sensor. It also has a receiver (not shown) that emits ultrasonic waves or infrared rays to the front of the heating cooker 1 and receives the reflected input. This human detection sensor 59 is installed so as to radiate infrared rays in the front (forward) direction of the heating chamber 6 . A circuit dedicated to processing the signal received by the receiving unit is not provided, and the received signal is analyzed by the control device 40 to determine whether or not there is a person.

As indicated by the dashed frame in FIG. 16, the voice notification unit 50, the display unit 16, and the like may be collectively referred to as the "notification unit".
26 is a light emission control unit. This light emission control section controls light emission of a large number of light emitting elements. The light emission control section 26 controls the light emission of the light emitting element 27A composed of an LED or the like arranged in the light emitting section 21M and the light emitting element 27B arranged in the input key 154M. When two or more light-emitting elements 27 with different emission colors are arranged in one place, the user US will experience a visual effect as if the emission colors changed depending on the light-emitting states of the plurality of light-emitting elements. be.

In FIG. 16, 52 is an input signal analysis section for analyzing the input signal from the input operation section 15 .
The input signal analysis unit 52 individually analyzes the input signals transmitted from the right operation unit 15R, the left operation unit 15L, and the central operation unit 15M. In particular, the input signal analysis unit 52 has a determination function of determining whether or not the input mode switching command (voice input mode corresponding signal) MC1 has been received. Then, when it is determined that the input mode switching command (voice input mode corresponding signal) MC1 has been received, it issues a switching command for switching the input mode from the "touch input mode" to the "voice input mode 1".

In the following description, the "input mode switching command MC1" will be referred to as "audio input mode corresponding signal MC1". When the input processing unit 70 receives the voice input mode correspondence signal MC1, it issues a control signal to the voice signal analysis unit 52 to shift to a voice input standby state (for example, activates a dedicated voice analysis program). cause).

As described with reference to FIG. 13, the right operation unit 15R has various input keys (153R, 154R, 151R, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are sent to the input signal analysis unit 52. FIG.
In particular, when the input key 153R, which is one of the "voice input switching keys", is touched, the right operation unit 15R determines whether the touch state is "long press" or "short press", The determination result (command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to control device 40 .

Similarly, the left operation unit 15R has various input keys (153L, 154L, 151L, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are sent to the input signal analysis unit 52. FIG.
In particular, when the input key 153L, which is one of the "voice input switching keys", is touched, the left operation unit 15L determines whether the touch state is "long press" or "short press", The determination result (command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to control device 40 .

Furthermore, the central operation unit 15M has various input keys (153M, 154M, 155M, 156M, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are sent to the input signal analysis unit 52. FIG.
In particular, when the input keys 153M and 154M, which are one of the "voice input switching keys", are touched, the central operation unit 15M indicates whether the touch state is "long press" or "short press". Then, the determination result (command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40 .

Next, FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 17 is a block configuration diagram for explaining the relationship between the control device 40 and the central operation section 15M. Note that the audio signal receiving unit 56 described with reference to FIG. 16 is omitted. The configuration of the right operating section 15R and the left operating section 15L is basically the same as that of the central operating section 15M.

In FIG. 17, 15A is an input key identifier. The input key identifying section 15A identifies an input key that has been touch-operated. For example, when the input key 153M is touch-operated, an identification signal unique to the input key is emitted. Also, when the input key 154M is touch-operated, an identification signal unique to the input key is emitted.

15B is a touch detection unit. When the fingertip FG of the user US or the like approaches the touch electrode portion, the detection circuit emits an "ON" signal, and when the fingertip FG leaves, it emits an "OFF" signal.
15T is a time measuring unit. The time measuring unit 15T measures the time from when the "ON" signal of the touch detecting unit 15B changes to the "OFF" signal, and transmits measured time data.

15C is an input mode determination unit. This input mode determination unit 15C receives the measured time data from the time measurement unit 15T, and, as described above, sets the "speech input mode 1" if it is five seconds or longer with respect to the threshold of five seconds. I judge. If it is less than this threshold, it is determined that the operation is a normal "short press".

The input mode determination unit 15C transmits to the control device 40 a signal (speech input mode corresponding signal MC1) indicating the determination result as to whether or not the input mode is "speech input mode 1".

15D is a storage unit. The storage unit 15D stores various control parameters and threshold values for the touch detection unit 15A, the time measurement unit 15T, the input mode determination unit 15C, and program information for determination processing.

A central processing unit (CPU) 15E performs various information processing operations as an input operation unit (central operation unit 15M).
15F is an input signal transmitter. The input signal transmission unit 15F transmits the unique identification signal of the input key as described above and the voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 as a result of determining whether or not it is "voice input mode 1" to the controller 40. It is transmitted to the input signal analysis unit 58 .

In FIG. 17, the touch detection section 15A, the time measurement section 15T, the input mode determination section 15C, etc. are depicted as independent individual blocks. Computer software may be used to realize each of these functions.

In FIG. 17, the example of the central operating section 15M is explained, but the control device 40 also identifies that the input is from the respective operating sections of the right operating section 15R and the left operating section 15L. Therefore, in the input key identifying section 15A in the right operating section 15R, the signal from the input key includes data identifying the input key existing in the right operating section 15R. This also applies to the left operating section 15L.

As is clear from the above description, the heating cooker 1 illustrated in FIG.
a first heating means HM1 for induction-heating an object to be heated on the top plate 3;
a heating chamber 6 whose walls are made of metal;
a second heating means HM2 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 6;
a third heating means HM3 for heating the heating chamber 6 with radiant heat;
a notification unit 90;
a communication unit 51;
a display unit 16;
and a control device 40 .

,
After displaying the standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays dedicated display screens (first specific screen 16M1 to third specific screen 16M3) for each cooking mode.

There are three cooking modes. That is, they are the single cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

The single cooking mode KM1 includes the following three types.
(1) IH single mode in which the first heating means HM1 is operated alone (2) Range single cooking mode in which the second heating means HM2 is operated alone (3) The third heating means HM3 is alone Oven independent cooking mode to operate

In the combined cooking mode KM2, both the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are heated at the same time, or are automatically operated at different times to perform heat cooking in the heating chamber 6. It is a heating pattern to be performed.

In the linked cooking mode KM3, the length of both or one of the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 and the first heating means HM1 is determined by an instruction from the user US. It is a heating pattern that operates sequentially after a transition period TR.

The control device 40 has an operation program for executing the three cooking modes KM1 to KM3.
The data acquisition unit 53 of the control device 40 can acquire the recipe data CD from the cloud server 300 or the smartphone 200 via the communication unit 51 .

In the input operation section 15, "voice input mode 2" can be selected by the input key 180 provided on the central operation section 15M.
Further, among the input keys arranged in the central operation unit 15M, the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L, specific input keys (153M, 153R, 153L, 154M) are one of the touch modes, that is, "long press". Depending on the state, "voice input mode 1" can be selected.

(4. Structure of the control menu of the central operation unit)
Next, the control menu displayed on the central display section 16M by the central operation section 15M and selectable will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 18 shows the entire control menu that can be selected by the central operation unit 15M.
Control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 15M include a group of RG (range grill) menus that use one or both of the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2), the upper radiant heat heating means 12a, and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b. and an IH menu group using the central IH coil 9C corresponding to the central heating port 4C.

FIG. 19 shows the control menu shown in FIG. 18 classified by four viewpoints (classifications 1 to 4). As is clear from FIG. 19, the control menu is roughly divided into a single cooking mode KM1 and a combined cooking mode KM2. Although the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the central operation unit 15M can execute a cooperative cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode.

When the main power switch 20 is turned "ON" and the input key 154M or 155R is pressed without operating the input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M, the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.

Therefore, the display screen of the central display section 16M is switched to the second specific screen 16M2.
In the first area 22 of the second specific screen 16M2, the control menu "warm" described in the "left display area" of FIG. 18 is always displayed first. This is because the control menu called "warm up" is set by default.

A "left display area" in FIG. 18 is a display area corresponding to the first area 22 described in FIG. That is, the various control menus described in the "left display area" of FIG. 18 are sequentially displayed in the first area 22. FIG.

As described in the "left display area" of FIG. ) cooking”, “range grill (RG) reheat”, “range grill (RG) manual”, “grill”, “oven”, “IH keep warm”, “IH rice cooker”, “IH heat”, a total of 13 items. There is a control menu for

"Warm up", "Microwave manual", "Boil under leafy vegetables", "Boil under root vegetables", "Meat thawing", "Microwave grill (RG) cooking", "Microwave grill (RG) reheat" of the control menu, "Range Grill (RG) Manual", "Grill", and "Oven" are included in the RG menu group.
Also, "IH keep warm", "IH rice cooking", and "IH heating" are included in the IH menu group.

The contents described in the "central display area" of FIG. 18 are the contents displayed in the second area 23 of the central display portion 16M, and include the temperature, time, heat power, "strong", "weak", etc. during cooking. It relates to adjustment of heating conditions. In other words, the "central display area" describes various control conditions. The contents of the default setting of this "central display area" are listed in the "default" column in the right column of the "central display area".

The content described in the "right display area" in FIG. 18 indicates the content displayed in the third area 24 of the central display portion 16M. The contents of the default setting of the "right display area" are listed in the "default" column in the right column of the "right display area". A blank part does not mean a control condition that can be changed, and information is not displayed, or an appropriate explanation that cannot be selected or changed (for the user US) is displayed in the third area 24. means to be

Next, a total of 13 types of control menus displayed in the "left display area" of FIG. 18 will be described.
(1) Warming: Heating the food in the heating chamber 6 using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). This "warming" is also suitable for reheating the food to be cooked. Since the default setting is "80°C", the microwave heating will automatically stop when the food is heated to 80°C. Note that "80° C." is the target temperature, and this temperature can be adjusted by the user US before starting heating. As shown in the central display area of FIG. 18, for example, the range of 0° C. to 90° C. can be set in increments of 5 degrees.

(2) Microwave manual operation: This refers to heating the food in the heating chamber 6 using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). The heating time is set by the user US to a specific time between 10 seconds and 60 minutes.

(3) Boil under leafy vegetables: Using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2), cook the food in the heating chamber 6, especially vegetables whose leaves are edible, for example, leafy vegetables such as spinach and Chinese cabbage. It is suitable for boiling The infrared sensor 13 measures the temperature rise of the food to be cooked in real time and automatically stops.

(4) Boil under root vegetables: This is suitable for boiling the objects to be cooked in the heating chamber 6, especially root vegetables such as roots, rhizomes, and potatoes, using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). be.

(5) Meat thawing: suitable for thawing various frozen meats in the heating chamber 6;
(6) Range grill (RG) cooking: combining microwave heating using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) and oven heating using the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b to cook the food in the heating chamber 6 by heating.

(7) Range grill (RG) re-cooking: suitable for re-heating food that has already been cooked in the heating chamber 6;
(8) Range grill (RG) manual: The user US appropriately selects microwave heating or oven heating to heat and cook the food in the heating chamber 6 .

(9) Grill: Food in the heating chamber 6 is heated using one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b. That is, it is a control menu using the third heating means HM3.

The "grill" does not control the temperature of the heating chamber 6, nor does it detect the temperature rise of the food to be cooked and stop the heating operation. The heating operation is performed for the time specified by the user US within the range of 10 seconds to 30 minutes.

(10) Oven: One or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b are used to heat the food in the heating chamber 6. The temperature of the heating chamber 6 is measured in real time by the thermistor sensor 14, and the energization of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b is controlled so as to reach a set target temperature.

(11) IH heat insulation: An object to be heated, such as a pot, located above the central heating port 4C is heated so as to be kept at a temperature set by the user US. The heating power of induction heating is from 200 W to 750 W, from low to medium heating power, and the temperature of the object to be heated is detected in real time by a temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C. , the heating control unit 43 of the control device 40 controls the thermal power based on the detected temperature. Note that the default temperature is 80° C. as shown in FIG. For example, it is suitable for keeping soup or the like warm.

(12) IH rice cooking: Heating is performed according to the total number (amount of rice to be cooked) set by the user US. The heating power of induction heating ranges from low heating power to high heating power of 200W to 1500W. A temperature sensor (not shown) installed in the vicinity of the central IH coil 9C is used to detect abnormal heating of the object to be heated (also referred to as overheating, overheating, hereinafter the same), and when an abnormal temperature is detected The control device 40 reduces the heating power and stops the heating operation.

(13) IH heating: Heating is performed according to the heating power of induction heating set by the user US. There are five levels of thermal power that can be set, thermal power 1: 200 W, thermal power 2: 500 W, thermal power 3: 750 W, thermal power 4: 1000 W, and thermal power 5: 1500 W. A temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C is used to detect abnormal heating of the object to be heated. A stop is made. The default thermal power is 500W.

Next, FIG. 19 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a classification table of the RG control menu (“RG menu group” in FIG. 18) and the IH control menu (“IH menu group” in FIG. 18) for the single cooking mode KM1 by the first heating means HM1. .

The "left display area" of the first area in FIG. 18 means the first area 22 (see FIG. 10). As is clear from Category 2 in FIG. 19, the name of the control menu is also displayed in characters in the first area 22 of the central display portion 16M, and is used by the user US to select the control menu.

Next, FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the storage structure of various cooking control menus in the cooperative cooking mode and the compound cooking mode and the input keys.
"Information indicating the main point of each control menu" shown in Category 2 in FIG. 19 is stored as data in the third layer of the recipe data storage section 42 as shown in FIG.

Therefore, when a desired control menu is selected by operating the input keys 154M and 155M, each of the control menus shown in category 2 in FIG. Information outlining the control menu can also be automatically or optionally displayed by the user US. FIG. 21 shows an example of such automatic display.

Next, the display on the central display section 16M when the central operation section 15M is operated will be described based on the schematic diagram of FIG.
First, when the user US presses the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 (see FIG. 16) to turn on the main power, the input functions of the left operation section 15L, the central operation section 15M, and the right operation section 15R are enabled. Become. In other words, the control device 40 is in a state of accepting operation signals from the respective operation units 15L, 15M, and 15R, and although not shown in the central display unit 16M, a predetermined screen (hereinafter referred to as "standby initial screen" 16MH) is displayed. ) (see FIG. 46) is displayed.

In this state, when the user US presses the input key 154M or 155M, the display screen 16ST is displayed as shown in FIG.
FIG. 21 shows the second specific screen 16M2.
As is clear from the display screen 16ST, the name (identification information) 160 of the control menu "warm" is displayed in a large size in the center of the first area 22 in the front-rear direction.

Behind the control menu identification information 160 labeled "warm" displayed in the center of the first area 22, characters (control menu identification information) 161 labeled "IH heating" are displayed, and conversely, on the front side is labeled "manual range". characters (control menu identification information) 162 are displayed in a slightly smaller size.

As a result, when the user US selects the control menu, it can be seen that the next candidates are "IH heating" and "range manual". At this stage, if the input key 154M is pressed once, the control menu identification information 162 of "manual range" moves (backward) to the character (control menu identification information) 160 of "warm". Is displayed. It should be noted that the characters of the control menu identification information 162 are not actually moved, but only the display information is switched.

Also, when the input key 155M is pressed once, the character (control menu identification information) 161 of "IH heating" (control menu identification information) moves (forward) to the position of the character (control menu identification information) 160 of "warm". displayed large. Also in this case, the control menu identification information 162 is not actually moved, but only the display information is switched.

As shown in FIG. 21, the target temperature of "80° C." is displayed in the second area 23 of the display screen 16ST. When the microwave heating is performed at this target temperature, the microwave heating is automatically stopped when the infrared sensor 13 detects that the temperature of the food to be cooked is 80°C.

If you want to change the temperature displayed in the second area 23 to change the temperature at which the automatic stop is to be made, you can operate the input key 156M or 157M. Then, the temperature rises by 5°C to 85°C, and when the input key 167M is pressed once, the temperature drops by 5°C to 75°C as shown on the display screen 16DN1.

In addition, in the second area 23, a heat source display portion 163 is displayed that indicates in characters that the heat source is the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2).

Reference information 164 automatically displays the control menu recommended for warming side dishes, as described above. The content of this reference information may be another additional information 165, and two or more types of information are alternately displayed for several seconds each on the display screen of the central display unit 16M (for example, the third area 24), or sequentially. may be displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in category 2 of FIG. 18, information (reference information) 164 indicating the main points of each control menu may be displayed at any time according to the operation of the input key 158 or 159. FIG.
That is, in the first embodiment, the control menu (for example, "warm up") corresponds one-to-one with the control menu (for example, "warm up") so that the user US does not hesitate whether to select the control menu (for example, "warm up"). Reference information 164 is displayed.

Furthermore, when the reference information 164 is displayed as shown in FIG. More detailed additional information 166 may be displayed in the third area 24 instead of the reference information 164 .

As shown in FIG. 21, a plurality of heating means having different heating principles, such as the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, are driven simultaneously or automatically switched with a time lag. The mode of driving and cooking the common food is the "compound cooking mode" KM2 described above.

In FIG. 21, the display screen shown on the central display section 16M is a dedicated display screen for the "compound cooking mode" KM2, and is called a "second specific screen" 16M2.

Next, FIGS. 22 to 28 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of central display section 16M and central operation section 15M in composite cooking mode KM2. It shows the operation procedure before starting the heating operation.

In FIG. 22, FG indicates the fingertip of the user US.
When the main power switch 20 is turned "ON" to activate the control device 40 and the input key 154M or 155M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed, the standby initial screen 16MH (see FIG. 46) is displayed as shown in FIG. is switched to the second specific screen 16M2. That is, it becomes a setting operation scene of a single cooking mode such as microwave heating or a "compound cooking mode" KM2 such as range grill (RG) cooking.

If the input key 153M is pressed before the input key 154M or 155M, the input process is changed to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. That is, from that stage, the standby initial screen 16MH (see FIG. 46) switches to the first specific screen 16M1.

When one of the input keys 154M or 155M is pressed with the fingertip FG as described above, the first area 22 of the display screen (second specific screen) 16M2 of the central display section 16M displays a plurality of objects of the combined cooking mode KM3. Three control menu candidates are displayed.
That is, identification information (including graphic marks and names of cooking items) 160, 161, 162 for specifying the control menu on a one-to-one basis is displayed. Among these, the position where the identification information 160 of one control menu is displayed may be hereinafter referred to as "display position A".

In FIG. 22, there are three control menus displayed on the central display section 16M. That is, "warm", "IH heating" and "manual range". The number of control menus in this way is called "the number of control menus for complex cooking".

In this first embodiment, the positions where the identification information 161 and 162 are displayed may be hereinafter referred to as "display position B" and "display position C", respectively.

In the first embodiment, the control menu displayed at "display position A" ("warm up" in FIG. 22) has the highest selection priority. That is, when the input key 151M is pressed in the state of FIG. 22, the heating operation is started with "warm".

In FIG. 22, when the input key 154M on the right side of the input key 155M is touched (ordinary "short press" operation), "manual range" is displayed at the display position A. FIG.

Also, to change the target temperature of 85° C. in “warm”, touch the input key 156M or 157M. In this case, even if a "long press" is performed instead of the usual "short press" operation, only normal temperature change input can be performed. In other words, the change to voice input mode 2 cannot be performed with the input keys 156M and 157M.

In FIG. 22, one light-emitting portion 21M corresponding to the input key 153M is marked with a star-shaped figure. , indicates that it is operable.

As is clear from FIG. 22, at the stage of displaying the control menu in the first area 22, one light-emitting portion 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M is still flashing (or in a color different from that of the other light-emitting portions). does not emit light). That is, it indicates that input operation is impossible.

Next, FIG. 23 will be described.
As is clear from FIG. 23, after the control menu is displayed in the first area 22, one light-emitting section 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M flashes (or blinks in a color different from the other light-emitting sections). It emits light), indicating that it is possible to input control conditions such as heating time and temperature.

In FIG. 23, one light emitting portion 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is surrounded by a dashed circle. ), indicating that it is waiting for a command to start cooking.

By the way, in FIG. 23, during the touch operation of the input key 154M, which is one of the "voice input switching keys", if the touch state is "long press", the touch portion of the input key 154M is surrounded by , a mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to "voice input mode 1" is displayed by the light emitting element 27B (see FIG. 16). That is, the light-emitting element 27B (see FIG. 16) such as an LED arranged below the top plate 3 is lit by a signal from the light emission control section 26, and a frame as shown in FIG. display. Alternatively, the entire touch portion of the input key 154M is illuminated from below so that it can be clearly distinguished from other input keys.

By the time the mark 154V is displayed, the control unit 55 of the control device 40 has already announced the input of the "control conditions" (temperature, heating time, etc.), which are subcommands of the control menu (e.g., "warm up"), by voice. It is in a state of receiving via the signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 16) (hereinafter also referred to as "input standby state").

Therefore, instead of inputting the control condition by touching the input key 156M or 157M, the user US can input the control condition by voice.

Next, FIG. 24 will be described.
As is clear from FIG. 24, after the mark 154V is displayed, one light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M blinks (or emits light in a color different from that of the other light emitting sections). ) did not. In other words, these input keys are not recommended for inputting control conditions such as heating time and temperature. However, when switched to "Voice Input Mode 1", the input functions of the input keys not required for voice input are restricted, so after the mark 154V is displayed, e) The input keys 156M and 157M cannot be touch-operated for input.
In addition, in order to maintain the touch input function of the specific input key (such as 156M) for inputting the control condition even after switching to the voice input mode, it is necessary to switch to the voice input mode 1B. Must be set.

As is clear from FIG. 24, after the mark 154V is displayed, auxiliary information 179 of voice input mode 1 is displayed in a wide display area combining the second area 23 and the third area 24. FIG.

The auxiliary information 179 includes three types of information: voice input mode display information 179A indicating that voice input is being accepted since the mode is voice input mode, and information 179B and 179C indicating ranges and numerical values of control conditions that can be input. be.

The information 179B is the conditions shown in "area 2" described in FIG. In other words, this indicates that the user US can only select a temperature within the range of 0°C to 90°C.
The information 179C is the condition shown in the "area 2" similarly explained in FIG. In other words, the user US can only select a temperature within the range of -10°C to 0°C in the "warm" control menu for microwave heating of frozen food.

The information 179 (179A to 179C) shown in FIG. 24 indicates that the user US can input by voice and indicates in advance the range of control conditions that can be input by voice. etc. can be avoided, and as a result, the operability for the user US is improved.

As is clear from FIG. 24, after the mark 154V is displayed, the auxiliary information 179 of the voice input mode 1 remains displayed in the wide display area combining the second area 23 and the third area 24. This state does not meet the conditions for starting the heating operation.
That is, in the state of FIG. 24, it is not recommended to press (touch operation) the input key (start key) 151M as in FIG. Therefore, the light emitting unit 21M is not in a state of emitting light (blinking).

In other words, in the first embodiment, after switching to the voice input mode, the heating operation cannot be started in the state where the predetermined control condition is not input (the state in FIG. 24).

Next, FIGS. 25 to 28 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the central display section 16M and the central operation section 15M in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. It shows the operation procedure before starting the heating operation.

In FIG. 25, when the main power switch 20 is turned "ON" to activate the controller 40 and the input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed, the standby initial screen 16MH (see FIG. 46) is displayed as shown in FIG. is switched to the first specific screen 16M1 shown in FIG.

If the input key 154M or 155M is pressed before the input key 153M, as shown in FIG. 22, the input process is changed to the composite cooking mode KM2, and the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.

In addition, even if the input key 155M or 156M is pressed first and the setting operation of the single cooking mode such as microwave heating or the "compound cooking mode" KM2 such as range grill (RG) cooking is being performed halfway, even if the input key If it is the stage before pressing 151M, the input process for the "linkage cooking mode" KM3 is changed from the stage when the input key 153M is pressed. That is, from this stage, only the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display portion 16M.

FIG. 25 shows the state immediately after the input key 153M is pressed, and the identification information 167 of the specific default cooking menu (eg, hamburger) is displayed in the first area 22. FIG.

After the input key 153M, when the input key 154M or 155M is touched, a plurality of targets of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are displayed in the first area 22 of the display screen (first specific screen) 16M1 of the central display section 16M. Further identification information (including graphic marks and names of cooking items) 168 or 169 is displayed for specifying the cooking item (which is the linked cooking menu).

In FIG. 25, the number of "cooking items" that can be executed in the cooperative cooking mode displayed on the central display section 16M is three. That is, there are hamburger, gratin, and roast beef, and the number of items to be cooked in this way is called the "number of cooperative cooking menus."

In this Embodiment 1, there are eight cooperative cooking menus in total. Details will be described with reference to FIG. However, it is possible to obtain recipe data CD from a smartphone (communication terminal device) 200, which will be described later, to further increase the number of linked cooking menus.

In FIG. 25, 167, 168, and 169 are identification information, and in this first embodiment, the information indicates the name of the food to be cooked (eg, hamburger, gratin, roast beef) on a one-to-one basis. It should be noted that the reference numeral 167 is used when describing all the identification information of the linked cooking menu.

The position where the control menu identification information 160 described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24 is displayed is called "display position A".
On the other hand, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the position where the identification information 167 is displayed may be hereinafter referred to as "display position B".

In the first embodiment, the "display position B" and the "display position A" (see FIG. 21) are the same position, but they may be set to different positions. However, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the eight cooperative cooking menus are always set to the same position (display position B) so as not to confuse the user US. Also in the composite cooking mode KM2, it is preferable to always unify the same (one) "display position A" in each control menu.

If the input keys 154M and 155M are not operated (within a certain period of time), the process automatically proceeds to the next step and switches to the display screen of FIG.
In FIG. 26, heating unit specifying portions 171L and 171R are displayed in the first specifying screen 16M1. Therefore, the user US can select either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L by operating the left and right adjacent input keys 157M and 156M. Note that, in the first embodiment, the left heating unit 4L is set by default, and the operation of the input keys 157M and 156M is not essential.

In FIG. 26, as the operation support information 170, "Press the start button to start heating the left IH". This means that when the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed, the left IH coil 9L can start induction heating (in the cooperative cooking mode KM3). However, in the first embodiment, it is necessary to press the input key 153L on the left operation section 15L after pressing the input key 151M.

As shown in FIG. 26, identification information 168 indicating the name of another food (for example, gratin) is displayed above the identification information 167 displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (rear position in plan view). It is

Under the identification information 167, identification information 169 indicating the name of another cooking item (for example, roast beef) is displayed. In FIG. 26, one light emitting portion 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is surrounded by a dashed circle. , indicates that the cooking start command is awaited.

Each time one of the input keys 154M and 155M is operated, the identification information 167 indicating the name of the food to be cooked (for example, a hamburger) is sequentially moved upward or downward by one step. Display changes. In other words, the identification information 167 can be sequentially displayed at the predetermined position (front-rear center position) of the first area 22, in other words, at the display position B by forward feeding and reverse feeding.

In this Embodiment 1, there are a total of eight types of food to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 as described above. Therefore, for example, if the left input key 155M is operated eight times, the identification information 167 of one cooking item (eg, hamburger) is cycled. Conversely, if the right input key 154M is operated eight times, the identification information 167 of one cooking object (eg, hamburger) is cycled.

By the way, after selecting a cooking menu (eg, hamburger), as described above, after selecting the left and right heating units 4L and 4R or inputting the control conditions (eg, preheating temperature), a command to start the heating operation is input. It must be given with key 151M.

Input of the left and right heating units 4L, 4R and control conditions (for example, preheating temperature) as described above requires the user US to press either one of the input keys 154M and 155M repeatedly. will ask for touch operation many times. This is the same for the composite cooking mode KM2 described above. For example, as described with reference to FIG. 18, the temperature setting in the case of “warming up” can be selected in the range of 0 to 90° C., but both the input keys 156M and 157M can be set to 5 degrees by one touch operation. For example, to input 15 degrees, it is necessary to perform the touch operation three times (“short press”).

Therefore, in this embodiment 1, in order to reduce troublesome input operations, in this linked cooking mode KM3, the identification information 167 of one cooking menu is shown in FIGS. In the state displayed at the predetermined position B, the input key 154M can be used to change to the voice input mode.

As described above, during the touch operation of the input key 154M, which is one of the voice input switching keys, if the touch state is "long press", the touch portion of the input key 154M is surrounded as shown in FIG. , a mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode is displayed.

At the timing when the mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode is displayed, the voice input mode display information 179A indicating that the voice input is accepted is displayed as the auxiliary information 179 as shown in FIG. It may be displayed on one specific screen 16M1.

The state of FIG. 27 is a state in which the left and right heating units 4L and 4R have not yet been selected. , the selection of the left heating unit 4L is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1.
In the state of FIG. 28, one light-emitting portion 21M corresponding to the input key 151M flashes (or emits light in a color different from that of the other light-emitting portions) as encircled by a dashed line, and cooking is performed. Since the process proceeds to the state after waiting for the start command, pressing the input key 151M starts the heat cooking operation.

Next, FIG. 29 will be described.
In FIG. 29A, FG indicates the fingertip of the user US. Each time the input key 155M is pressed, the display contents of the first specific screen 16M1 change to display screens 29A to 29D as shown in FIG. 29(B).

As described above, the user US sets the input operation unit 15 to the function setting mode (using the function setting key 151KP) in advance, and operates a plurality of input keys of the input operation unit 15 during the function setting mode. Then, when displaying the individual cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 on the central display unit 16M, it is possible to set to display one of the food ingredients and the nutritional ingredients with priority.

For example, when the function setting key 151KP is pressed as described above, a dedicated display screen for "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen of the central display section 16M.
Therefore, it is preferable to make a setting in advance so that a specific input key (for example, 156M) other than the function setting key 151KP can be "long-pressed" to automatically select the food ingredient display mode. For example, one setting menu (for example, hamburger) in the above-described "function setting menu" is set to a display screen that automatically displays "food component display" and "nutrition component display".

Furthermore, while the display screen for setting such "food component display" and "nutrition component display" is displayed, one specific input key other than the function setting key 151KP (for example, any one of 156M, 157M, etc.) 1), it may be possible to cancel the conditions for setting the "Food ingredient display" and "Nutrition ingredient display" and the settings. For example, as a specific range, it may be set so that only the "iron content" of the nutrients and the "energy (calorie conversion value)" of the ingredients are displayed.

Therefore, if the function setting key 151KP is set to give priority to either the food component or the nutrient component, and to be displayed preferentially based on that, the display shown in FIG. "Hamburger" is not always displayed first.

Meanwhile, as described above, the user US can search the cooking menu by voice by pressing the input key 180 . Therefore, for example, if a voice input such as "a menu with a small calorie value" is performed at the stage of FIG. It is displayed at a predetermined position (front-back center position) of the first area 22 in 16M1.

For example, in FIG. 29, three types of cooking menus, gratin, hamburger steak, and roast beef, are displayed. Therefore, if the input key 180 is pressed at this time, voice input mode 2 is entered. After this, the user US may give a voice input of "low calorie menu". Incidentally, the amount of energy (unit: kilocalories) per 100 g of weight is about 152 for gratin (macaroni gratin), about 223 for hamburger steak, and about 196 for roast beef. Therefore, macaroni is extracted as "the menu with the lowest calorie value" among these three.

On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 29, the input key 154M may be "long-pressed" to switch to voice input mode 1, and a menu with a low calorie value may be extracted by voice input.

Next, FIG. 30 will be described.
FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the central display unit 16M in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and an example of displaying the standard ingredients and nutritional ingredients for "hamburger" which is one of the cooking menus. is.

26 to 29, when the user US issues a voice input command to display either the food component or the nutritional component, or when the operation support information 170 is displayed (see FIG. 26). ), when the input key 158M or 159M is touched, the first specific screen 16M1 is temporarily switched to the display screens of FIGS. 30A and 30B. When the input key 158M is pressed, it means that the display of the ingredients of the food has been commanded.

In the following description, the display screen of FIG. 30(A) is called a "food component display screen" 16M1A, and the display screen of FIG. 30(B) is called a "nutrition component display screen" 16M1B.

The food component display screen 16M1A and the nutritional component display screen 16M1B automatically return to the original state of the first specific screen 16M1 after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed.
Alternatively, when the user US makes some command by voice input, or when one of the input keys 158M and 159M is operated once again during the predetermined time (10 seconds), the original first The display program of the control device 40 prescribes to return to the state of the specific screen 16M1.

FIG. 31 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a list showing the correspondence relationship between the cooking menu in the "cooperation cooking mode" KM3 and the operation support information 170 (see FIG. 26).

As can be seen from FIG. 31, the operation support information 170 includes two types of operation support information A and operation support information B. FIG. One is the information that "Press the start button to start heating the left IH", and the other is the information that "Press the start button to decide". This "start button" is the input key 151M.

The two types of operation support information 170 described above are automatically switched before the start of the cooking process of the "cooperation cooking mode" KM3. For example, they are displayed alternately every few seconds.

Next, FIG. 32 will be described.
In this Embodiment 1, a "linked preheating cooking mode" KM4 is provided as one of the linked cooking modes KM3.
There are two types of associated preheating cooking modes KM4.

An example of a cooking menu using the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 is "hamburger". In the case of this "hamburger", the preheating process is performed by the first heating means HM1.

If the cooking process 1 is started while the preheating process is being performed, the heating operation of the preheating process is not stopped when the cooking process 1 is started.
Therefore, the energization of the first heating means HM1 and the energization of the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) and the third heating means HM3 in charge of the cooking process 1 are performed in parallel in the same time zone. It will be.

In other words, in the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, the heating source (the first heating means HM1 in the above description) that has started operating before the cooking process 1 is not necessarily stopped at the start of the cooking process 1, During cooking step 1, both the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) and/or the third heating means HM3 may be energized.

Unless otherwise contradicted, the following description is based on the premise that the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is included in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

At the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, when the identification information 167 indicating the name of the food to be cooked is displayed on the central display section 16M, the left operation section 15L of the left IH coil 9L is operated for other cooking menus. It becomes unusable (also called "occupied state").

Specifically, among various input keys of the left operation unit 15L, at least the input key 153L is disabled by the heating control unit 43. FIG. The meaning of "invalidate" means that a valid command signal is not transmitted from the input key 153L to the heating control unit 43, and even if a valid command signal is transmitted, the heating control unit 43 does not transmit the command signal. It has both the meaning of not treating it as a valid command signal. In any case, heating by the left IH coil 9L cannot be selected.

At the same time, when the identification information 167 is displayed, the right operation portion 15R of the right heating port 4R may be disabled (by "disabling" the input key 153R). However, if the user US has previously set the function (using the function setting key 151KP) in the input operation unit 15 so as not to "invalidate" the right IH coil 9R, the other control menu If the right IH coil 9R has already been used for heating (heating operation is ongoing), the right IH coil 9R can be used as it is. On the other hand, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is determined that it cannot be used due to the fact that it has been used before (by the heating control unit 43).

Therefore, only the left IH coil 9L is "occupied" by selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Also, from the perspective of the entire first heating source HM1, the use of only a portion of the three heating units 4L, 4C, and 4R (the left IH coil 9L) is "restricted." Incidentally, when the right IH coil 9R is not in use for other cooking, the right IH coil 9R may be similarly occupied.

Next, FIG. 32 will be described.
This FIG. 32 shows the operation steps when "fried chicken" is performed in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. In FIG. 32, #1 to #9 indicate the operations of the user US and the state changes of the heating cooker 1. In FIG.

Unlike the above-described "hamburger", the "fried chicken" shown in FIG. 32 is prepared in the heating chamber 6 in the cooking step 1 and in the first heating means HM1 in the cooking step 2. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 32, the user US first selects the left IH coil 9L and presses the input key 151L before starting the cooking process 1 in order to cook "fried chicken". Then, preheating of the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 3 is started. The object to be heated N in this case is a metal pot, frying pan, or the like, and a certain amount or more of cooking oil is put therein.

On the other hand, the user US opens the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 and puts the ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 6 (#1).
Then, after closing the door 7, an operation A23 called "pressing the start button" is performed. This is to press the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M.

At this time, the microwave heating source (second heating means HM2) operates to start the cooking step 1 of microwave heating cooking. Then, notification 1 of reference information is performed.

The notification 1 is to notify the time until heating is finished, for example, "Microwave heating has started. Heating time is 0 minutes." Alternatively, when the temperature of the food to be cooked is detected and control is performed to determine the heating end time, information indicating the target temperature, such as "heat up to 00°C", may be reported.

Also, during this cooking process 1, preheating of the left IH coil 9L is completed (for example, the object to be heated is heated to 180° C., which is the standard temperature for preheating). The completion of preheating is notified to the user US by voice, text, etc., through the voice notification unit 51 and the central display unit 16M (first specific screen 16M1) (#2).

The user US can stop the microwave heating at any timing during the cooking process 1 . In order to stop, the door 7 should be opened. The microwave heating can be temporarily stopped by pressing the input key 152M of the central operation unit 15M only once. However, if the input key 152M is pressed twice in succession in a short period of time, the cooking mode is cancelled, and the selection of "fried chicken" in the cooperative cooking mode is cancelled.

The opening of the door 7 immediately stops the microwave heating operation, and the cooking process 1 ends (#3).
Next, the user US moves the food heated in the heating chamber 6 into the object to be heated that is preheated on the top plate 3 (#4).

Then, the cooking process 2 is started with the left heating port 4L (#5).
In the cooking process 2, since the input key 153L (see FIG. 12) of the left operating section 15L is pressed first before starting preheating, it is not necessary to operate the left operating section 15L at the start of the cooking process 2. . That is, for example, when the food (deep-fried chicken material) is moved into the object to be heated that is preheated to 180 ° C., the heating of the food is started at the temperature of the object to be heated (this time is the cooking process 2).

As described above, the user US does not need to operate the input operation unit 15 in order to start the cooking process 2 (#5).
The cooking process 2 starts when the food is placed on the food to be heated. The temperature sensor group 30 (see FIG. 16) may detect the temperature drop to electrically determine the start point of the cooking process 2 .
The end of the cooking process 2 can be ended at an arbitrary timing if the user US operates the left operation unit 15L.

Next, the user US moves the food to be cooked again.
First, the door 7 is opened, the food to be cooked is put into the heating chamber 6, and the door 7 is closed (#6).
Then, the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed to start the cooking process 3 of the range grill control menu (RG control menu).

In this case, in order to prevent microwave heating or the like (so-called "drying") without putting the food in the heating chamber 6, the door 7 is opened once after the cooking process 1 is finished, and then Only when the closing of the door 7 is detected again (by the open/close detector 10 of the door 7), the input key 151M can be pressed to start the heating operation. In addition, the timing of operating the input key 151M is limited to a fixed time (for example, 3 minutes) from the end of the cooking process 1, or a fixed time (for example, 2 minutes) from the time the door 7 is opened and closed again. minutes) to improve safety.

The notification 2 of the reference information 5 is performed when a predetermined time (TN5) has passed since the cooking process 3 by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 6 was started by the operation input A26 of the user US.

The notification 2 of the reference information is information including guidance such as, for example, "heating will end in 30 seconds. If you want to extend the heating time further, please set the time." In addition, since it is known that the final cooking process will be completed, the user US can start preparations for taking out the "fried chicken" from the heating chamber 6 from the time of notification 2 of this reference information. Also, in synchronism with this, the content of the notification 2 is displayed in characters or the like on the central display section 16M. Note that the notification 2 is displayed at a specific position on the first specific screen 16M1, like the operation support information 170.

After that, the microwave heating operation is stopped, and the cooking process 3 ends (#7). Note that this cooking process 3 can be stopped immediately when the user US opens the door 7 .
After that, the user US moves the food heated in the heating chamber 6 into the object to be heated which is preheated on the top plate 3 (#8). In this case, if the object to be heated is maintained in a state of being heated by induction heating until after the cooking step 3 is finished, induction heating (cooking step 4) may be further performed (#9).

Induction cooking can be ended by operating left 15L. In other words, the operation A28 of the user US at this time is to press the input key 153L of the left operation section 15L corresponding to the left IH coil 9L.

The cooking sequence shown in FIG. 32 can shorten the time required from the start of the induction heating operation (the start of the preheating process) to the end of the cooking process 1 .
That is, the cooking process 1 is started by putting the foodstuff (to be cooked) into the heating chamber 6 before completion of preheating by induction heating or notification of the completion of preheating.

Since the preheating by the first heating means HM1 is completed before the cooking process 1 is completed, the food to be cooked is immediately transferred to the food to be heated on the top plate 3 after the cooking process 1 is completed, and cooked. Step 2 can begin.

In the example of "fried chicken" in FIG. 32, the cooking process 3 is included, but the cooking process 3 and the cooking process 4 are not necessarily required. Depending on the type of food to be cooked and the wishes of the user US, the necessary cooking process may be completed.

Further, in FIG. 32, the "left IH coil drive period" continues even after the cooking process 2 is finished. You can stop driving 9L at any time. However, as indicated by the dashed frame in FIG. 32, if the left IH coil 9L is also used in the cooking process 4, it is necessary to start the preheating operation again before the cooking process 4.

Next, FIG. 33 will be described.
This FIG. 33 shows the operation steps when "fried chicken" is performed as a cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, as in FIG.
In FIG. 33, #1 to #9 show the operations of the user US and the state changes of the heating cooker 1, as described with reference to FIG. Other symbols correspond to those in FIG.

A difference between FIG. 33 and FIG. 32 will be described.
FIG. 33 shows a case where the cooking process 1 is started in the heating chamber 6 after waiting for the completion of preheating of the object to be heated by the first heating means HM1 and notification thereof (#2).

When the completion of preheating of the object to be heated by the first heating means HM1 is displayed by the first specific screen 16M1 and the left and right display units 16L and 16R, and the voice notification unit 50 notifies the user US by voice, The door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened, and the ingredients for "fried chicken" (seasoned chicken, etc.) are put into the heating chamber 6 (#1).
Then, after closing the door 7, the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed.

At this point, cooking step 1 of microwave heating cooking is started. Then, the notification 1 of the reference information is performed. After this, the process is the same as that shown in FIG.

In the cooking sequence shown in FIG. 33, the time required from the start of the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 (the start of the preheating process) to the end of the cooking process 1 is longer than in FIG.

However, after waiting for the completion of preheating by the first heating means HM1 or the notification of the completion of preheating, the food (to-be-cooked food) is started to be heated in the heating chamber 6. , there is a guarantee that the cooking process 2 can be started immediately by the first heating means HM1 whenever the food to be cooked is moved. Therefore, this method is suitable for the user US who is not very familiar with the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4.

Although FIG. 33 shows that the “driving period of the left IH coil 9L” continues even after the cooking process 2 is finished, the first heating means HM1 is turned off after the cooking process 2 is finished. When not in use, the driving of the left IH coil 9L may be stopped at any time by the left operation section 15L after the cooking process 2 is finished. However, as indicated by the dashed frame in FIG. 33, if the left IH coil 9L is also used in the cooking process 4, preheating must be started again before the cooking process 4.

32 and 33, the first heating means HM1 is energized first to start the preheating operation, while the cooking step 1 is performed in the heating chamber 6. In FIG.
The "coordinated preheating cooking mode" KM4 of Embodiment 1 is not limited to the cooking process 1 being performed in the heating chamber.

In the other cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, first, the heating operation by the first heating means HM1 is started, and an object to be heated such as a frying pan is heated to a preheating target temperature (for example, 180°C), and reaches the target temperature. In this method, the object to be cooked is placed on the object to be heated in this state, and the cooking step 1 is started. After this preheating step, the object to be cooked is moved into the heating chamber 6 while being placed on the object to be heated. The cooking step 2 may be performed in order to further heat by the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3.

Next, FIG. 34 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the heating control section 43 until transition to the linked cooking mode KM3.

In the cooperative cooking mode KM3 of Embodiment 1, the pattern ( There is a first cooperative cooking mode). As shown in the list of FIG. 31, there are four representative examples of cooking menus suitable for cooking in this pattern, from "hamburger" to "gratin".

There is also a second cooperative cooking mode in reverse order. As shown in the lower half of the list in FIG. 31, there are four representative examples of cooking menus suitable for cooking in this second cooperative cooking mode, from "fried chicken" to "tempura".

The steps in FIG. 34 are common to both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode.
First, at the first step SB1, the input key 153M of the central operation section 15M is operated. This starts the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

In the next step SB2, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display portion 16M, and various information for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed. In this step SB2, in order to select the cooking menu for each linked cooking mode, the “name of the food to be cooked” (for example, “hamburger”) 167 as one type of the identification information 167 is set to the center of the first area 22 in the longitudinal direction. , that is, at the display position B.

Depending on the selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, any of the following two timings may be used when the heating means (the first heating means HM1 to the third heating means HM3) are "occupied".
(1) As described above, for example, after the case when the left IH coil 9L for the cooking process 1 is selected (in FIG. 34, "occupation state start (case 2)" after step SB4 corresponds).
(2) After step SB2 as shown in FIG. 34 (in FIG. 34, "exclusive state start (case 1)" corresponds).

At the next step SB3, it is determined whether or not at least one of the input keys 154M and 155M has been operated. 14 and 25 to 28, by operating the two input keys 154M and 155M, it is possible to select the identification information 167 indicating the name of the food (eg, hamburger) that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. .

If the input keys 154M and 155M are not operated (within a certain period of time), the process proceeds to step SB4.
Step SB4 is a step of selecting either one of the two heating unit specifying portions 171L and 171R displayed in the first specifying screen 16M1 as described above. The user US can select either one of the right IH coil 9R and the left IH coil 9L by operating the input keys 157M and 156M adjacent to the left and right.

Note that the left heating port 4L may be set as a default, the heating portion specifying portion 171L may be displayed first on the first specifying screen 16M1, and the process may proceed to step S5. In the example described with reference to FIG. 25, the left heating port 4L is set as a default and the left IH coil 9L is set to be preferentially selected when hamburgers are cooked in cooperative cooking.

At the next step SB5, it is determined whether or not an input operation for canceling the selection of the cooperative cooking mode has been performed. If the input key 152M has been operated once, the determination is "Yes". Then, the process returns to step SB3. If the input key 152M is operated twice in succession within a certain short period of time (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is cancelled, and the standby time before step SB1 is determined. Returns to the initial screen state. Therefore, the selection of the three cooking modes KM1-KM3 returns to the initial stage.

On the other hand, if the input key 151M is operated while the input key 152M is not operated, the process proceeds to the next step SB6. Then, the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started.

In FIG. 34, step SB7 is, in the operation program of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, according to the "cooking conditions" (including "control conditions" such as thermal power and heating time) of a specific cooperative cooking menu (recipe) such as "hamburger". , various functional parts start. That is, from this stage, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is entered.

First, at Step SB7, the display section corresponding to the heating section selected at Step SB4 is activated. However, in the case of a cooking menu that uses the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) or the third heating means HM3 in the cooking process 1 (as described above, for example, "fried chicken"), the central display unit 16M has been activated, a new display unit is not activated in this step SB7.

In the cooking process 1, for example, in the case of the cooking menu using the left IH coil 9L, the left display section 16L is activated at step SB7. Then, the input function of the left operation unit 15L is enabled, and the state waits for input from the user US. Then, the process proceeds to step SB8.

At step SB8, after the operation of the input key 153L, the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started.
The contents displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 in step SB8 are as follows: the first cooking process 1 uses the left IH coil 9L, and the next cooking process 2 uses the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). is used, is displayed as described in FIG.

Next, FIGS. 35 and 36 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the heating control section 43 until transition to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode and determination results.

FIG. 35 will be described.
Steps ST1 to ST8 are operation steps defined in the operation program (including the recipe data CD) of the linked cooking mode KM3 of the heating control section 43. FIG.
First, when the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pushed (ST1), in the next step ST2, the heating control section 43 determines whether or not there is an abnormality.

At the stage of step ST2, the central display unit 16M is activated to display a message that "there is no abnormality and cooking can be started". At this stage, the heating control unit 43 also confirms whether or not a command for setting the upper limit of the total power consumption has been received from the input operation unit 15 .

At the stage of step ST2, if the setting is such that the activation information is transmitted from the cooking device 1 to the communication terminal device 200 or the external server 417 (cloud server 300), at this stage from the communication unit 51 Startup information (operating state data OS) is transmitted wirelessly.

At the next step ST3, the central display section 16M and the voice notification section 51 also perform notification for prompting selection of the heating means and voice guidance.
In the next step ST4, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display section 16M, and usage caution information is also displayed to the user US.

Then, it is determined whether or not an input key (for example, 154M) other than the input key 153M has been operated (ST5). If the input key 153M has been operated, step STC becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step ST6. In other words, the process proceeds to the step of using the "Coordinated Cooking Mode" KM3.

In step ST6, the permission condition determination unit 54 checks whether or not the "permission condition" is satisfied. For example, it checks the usage status of the heating sources used in the "cooking mode" KM3.
The permission conditions and determination results will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 36 below.

At step ST5, the first input operation is checked. For example, before the input key 153M is pressed, it is determined whether the left operation section 15L or the right operation section 15R is operated, and the central operation section 15M (by the input key 154M or 155M) selects the "compound cooking mode" KM2. Determine if selected.

If the input key 153M is operated for the first time within a certain grace period (for example, 30 seconds) from step ST3, the display for the "cooperation cooking mode" KM3 is started as described above.

On the other hand, if the input key 153M is not operated and another input key (for example, the input key 155M or 154M) is touched, step ST5 is determined to be "Yes", and the "cooperation cooking mode" is selected. ' Proceed to step ST9 for starting cooking other than KM3. A detailed description of step ST9 is omitted here.

In FIG. 35, steps ST6 and ST7 are operation steps of "permission condition 1" for determining whether or not to permit cooking in the "cooperation cooking mode" KM3.
Step ST6 is a step of determining "permission condition 1".

Here, "permission condition 1" is
(1) The "peak cut value" that defines the upper limit of the maximum power consumption that can be used in the heating cooker 1 is 5000 W or more;
(2) When there is a power reduction command signal received by the control device 40 via the communication unit 51 from the external cloud server 300 or the communication terminal device 200, the peak cut value of the reduction command is 5000 W or more,
If these two conditions are satisfied, the determination in step ST6 is "Yes".

The "permission conditions 2" in the next step ST7 are the following four.
(1) In the first heating means HM1, the central heating port 4C is not in heating operation.
(2) one or both of the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are not in heating operation;

(3) In the first heating means HM1, both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L are not used for heating operation (or only one is being used for heating operation). That is, neither the left IH coil 9L nor the right IH coil 9R are used for heating operation.
(4) Satisfying "permission condition 4" described later. That is, the latest temperature of the top plate 3 is a limit value (for example, the temperature should not exceed 100° C.).

If the above three conditions are satisfied, step ST7 will be judged as "Yes". Then, the process proceeds to step ST10. That is, it is possible to proceed to the cooking start input step of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

When the judgments of steps ST6 and STR7 result in "No", the process proceeds to step ST8, and the central display section 16M and the voice notification section 50 notify the user US that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected.

Here, the meaning of "5000 W or more" defined in the "permission condition 1" will be explained. For the sake of simplicity, the following description will not specifically refer to the power consumption of electrical components other than the heat source, such as the internal cooling fan (not shown) of the main body 2 .

The reason why the required demand (preliminary securing of the power demand) when implementing the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 is 5000 W or more is necessary. This is because it is as follows.

(1) Range operation (second heating means HM2): 1000 W
(2) During oven operation: 2000 W (upper radiant heat heating means 12a: 1000 W, lower radiant heat heating means 12b: 1000 W)
(3) Range grill operation: 1500 W (second heating means HM2: 500 W, upper radiant heat heating means 12a: 1000 W)

On the other hand, the maximum electric power of the cooking menu in the "cooperation cooking mode" KM3 is 1500W.
Therefore, in the cooperative cooking mode, the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 may operate simultaneously.

That is, "1000 W" of the second heating means HM2, "1000 W" of the third heating means HM3 (2000 W is alternately energized in increments of 1000 W), and "1500 W" of the first heating means HM1 that performs induction heating. The total power of the three is 3500W.

When the demand (prior securing of power demand) is 5000W:
When the right IH coil 9R is heating at 3000 W (normal heating), the remaining demand is 2000 W.
When the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 is executed from this state, the remaining demand is 1500W short of the electric power 3500W required for cooperative cooking. can be started.

If the demand (prior securing of power demand) is 4000 W:
When the right heating port 4R is frying (maximum 1500W required), the rest of the demand is 2500W.
If cooperative cooking is to be performed from this state, the remaining demand is 1000 W short of the electric power required for cooperative cooking of 3500 W, so the heating power of the right IH coil needs to be reduced. However, if the heating power is lowered while the automatic control menu is being executed, cooking will not go well, so the heating power of the automatic control menu cannot be lowered.
Ultimately, with 4000 W, the required thermal power for the automatic control menu cannot be secured.

As is clear from the above description, before starting the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3, the electric power (3500 W) required for cooperative cooking and the electric power (1500 W) required for the cooking menu of the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L ), it is necessary to determine (confirm) whether or not there is a demand of 5000 W (prior security of power demand).

Next, FIG. 36 will be described.
This FIG. 36 shows the judgment processing of steps ST6 and ST7 of FIG. These determinations are performed by the permission condition determination unit 54 .
Step ST5 is the step of operating the input key 153M.
In the next step STX1, the permission condition determination unit 54 of the control device 40 compares the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 with the latest state of the heating cooker 1, and determines the state that satisfies the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2. Determine whether or not

In step STX1 of FIG. 36, voice (notification) 1 to voice (notification) 4 indicate the contents notified to the user US by the voice notification unit 50. FIG. That is, it specifically shows the contents of step ST8 in FIG.

Display 1 to display 4 in FIG. 36 show the contents displayed on the central display section 16M. Note that these displays 1 to 4 are not displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 displayed from the time of step SB2 in FIG. 34, but are displayed on the central display section 16M where the first specific screen is not displayed. is.

The first specific screen 16M1 is not displayed unless the premises (permission condition 1 and permission condition 2) for shifting to the "cooperation cooking mode" KM3 are satisfied. Therefore, after the user US sets (selects) various conditions (for example, the identification information 167) of the "cooperation cooking mode" KM3, it is determined that the permission condition 1 or the permission condition 2 is not satisfied, and the first It does not mean returning to the standby initial screen (step ST4 in FIG. 35). Therefore, the user US is not forced to perform useless input operations.

Next, FIG. 37 will be described.
FIG. 37 illustrates the operation from starting up the cooking device 1 to acquiring the cooking recipe data CD for the cooking device 1 from the communication terminal 200 or the external server 417 (cloud server 300). is.

In this Embodiment 1, the recipe data CD of the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 includes the number of the cooperative cooking menu (identification information 167), the order of the plurality of heating means used, the heating means used in the cooking process 1, the cooking Heating means used in step 2, if there are also cooking steps 3 and after, heating means used for each cooking process, default (standard setting) control conditions (thermal power, heating time, heating target temperature etc.), if any, including, but not limited to, the setting value or range of setting values.

In FIG. 37, steps SS1 to SS8 are operation steps defined in the integrated control program of the control device 40, and are basically the same as those defined in the operation program of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 described in FIG. ing.

First, when the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed (SS1), the next step SS2 is a step in which the heating control section 43 determines whether or not there is an abnormality.

Steps SS1 to SS4 are the same as steps ST1 to ST4 described with reference to FIG. 35, so redundant description will be omitted.

In step SS5, the cooker 1 asks the user US whether or not to send a signal requesting the provision of cooking recipe data CD to the smartphone (communication terminal device) 200 or the cloud server 300 registered and set in advance. This is the operation for the purpose of asking for confirmation in advance. A "confirmation screen" is displayed on the central display portion 16M, and the voice notification portion 50 also notifies. This "confirmation screen" is a kind of standby initial screen 16MH, which will be described later.

If the user US sets the function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 7) of the input operation unit 15 in advance to automatically execute the external connection in step SS5, the external connection is automatically executed at a prescribed timing. .

That is, as described with reference to FIG. 1 , smartphone 200 and cooking device 1 can be automatically paired to establish wireless communication 400 between smartphone 200 and cooking device 1 .

In the external connection in step SS5, transmission and reception are alternately repeated several times between the heating cooker 1 and an external communication device (such as the smart phone 200 and the cloud server 300). For example, when the standby signal 1 is first transmitted from the heating cooker 1, the external communication device receives the standby signal 1, transmits the setting signal 1 including the setting information, and receives the setting signal 1, which is received by the heating cooker. 1 is a process of confirming the internal standby state (for example, the set value of total power consumption, etc.) and, if there is no problem, transmitting a standby signal 2 for proceeding to the next stage.

Finally, reception of necessary setting information (including recipe data CD) from the external communication device is completed. That is, on the side of the heating cooker 1, once the setting information is received, the alternating communication is performed several times such as immediately after returning the confirmation signal, and finally the reception of the necessary setting information is completed. In such a series of flows, there is a step of requesting the user US side to determine whether or not to receive the recipe data CD. In other words, in this heating cooker 1, there is a step in which the user US can clearly and in advance recognize that the recipe data CD will be received. It prevents that.

On the other hand, if the external connection as described above is not set to be automatically executed, in step SS6, a predetermined icon or the like is displayed on the central display section 16M to inform the user that the recipe data CD can be provided. Inform US. This is shown in the display screen 2C of FIG. The display to inform the user US is briefly displayed, for example, in letters, as indicated by 60P on the display screen 2C. 60P is called acquisition operation support information.

In step SS6, if you do not agree to connect to the external device (smartphone 200, etc.), as shown in step SS9, the registered external device (smartphone 200 or cloud server 300) will display the message "Currently, recipe data CD A non-receipt message is sent, such as "We have not received In this way, the user US can be set to reject reception.

On the other hand, in step SS6, when the user agrees to connect to the external device and instructs data acquisition, the cooking device 1 acquires the recipe data CD from the external device via the communication unit 51 by the data acquisition unit 53. . The acquired recipe data CD is stored in a predetermined "temporary storage section" (not shown) in the recipe data storage section 42 (step SS7).

In the next step SS8, the content of the recipe data CD obtained from the external device, especially the identification information 167 is displayed on the central display section 16M. Also, the voice notification unit 50 notifies the fact of reception, for example, "The hamburger recipe has been received."

By the way, in the first embodiment, after the main power switch 20 is turned on and the supply of electric power is started, the control device 40 waits for a command to start the heating operation during the standby period. The program permits the acquisition of the recipe data CD by the data acquisition section 53 when the input key 180, which is the selection section for mode 2, is operated.

That is, if the user US presses the input key 180 at step SS6, the step is determined to be "Yes", and acquisition of the recipe data CD is permitted. However, several conditions must be satisfied before the recipe data CD is actually acquired by the controller 40, which will be described in detail later.

Next, FIGS. 38 to 43 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the main input steps for the three cooking modes after the main power is turned on in the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart 1 showing an input process after turning on the main power in the heating cooker 1 . FIG. 40 is a flow chart 1 showing an input process in the case of the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart 1 showing an input process in the case of the combined cooking mode in the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 42 is a flow chart 1 showing an input process in the single cooking mode in the heating cooker 1. FIG.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring the recipe data CD from the outside in the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 44 is a flow chart 2 showing the operation of acquiring the recipe data CD from the outside in the cooking device 1 .

FIGS. 38 to 44 are for the above-described "speech input mode 1A". That is, in one input operation unit 15 (for example, the central operation unit 15M), the input key 154M as the "common key" is provided among a plurality of input keys.
Therefore, when the input key 154M changes to the "speech input mode 1A", the input functions of the input keys (156M, 158M, etc.) other than the input key (double-purpose key) 154M are disabled from that point on. 38 to 44 will be described with respect to the pattern (the state of the "speech input mode 1A").

FIG. 38 will be described. In FIG. 38, white symbols (such as 153M) indicate input keys 153M and the like to be operated in steps S2 to S15 below.
In FIG. 38, the main input keys are also displayed in white characters.
Also, the range indicated by the dashed frame indicates the range that can be input by voice in the "voice input mode 1" switched when the input key (multipurpose key) 154M is "long-pressed".

Steps S2 to S6 represent operation steps in the linked cooking mode KM3.
Steps S7 to S11 show the operation steps for the combined cooking mode KM2.
Steps S12 to S15 represent operation steps for the single cooking mode KM1 using the first heating means HM1.

When the main power switch 20 is turned on, the standby initial screen 16MH is first displayed on the central display section 16M (step S1).
Next, when input key 153M is touched, cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected (step S2), and first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (step S3).

Step S2A shows a process of acquiring the recipe data CD from the external communication terminal device 200, the cloud server 300, or the like.

25 to 28, at least three cooking menus are displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 at this stage. A cooking menu can be displayed (step S4).

In step S5, if the control conditions for one cooperative cooking menu are sufficient, pressing the input key 151M enables the transition to the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (step S6).

As is clear from FIG. 38, when the input key (multipurpose key) 154M is "long-pressed" at the stage of step S4, the control device 40 switches to the "input standby state" by voice. You can input the range condition by voice. For example, the user US can utter a set of cooking menus and control conditions, such as "hamburger preheat 180° C.". It should be noted that only the control conditions other than the food to be cooked may be input by voice, such as "thermal power 7 hours 10 minutes".

Next, FIG. 38 will be described.
In step S2, if the input key 154M or 155M is touched without touching the input key 153M, the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected (step S7) and the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed (step S8).
Each time the input key 154M or 155M is touch-operated, another control menu (see FIG. 18) can be displayed one after another (step S9).

Step S7A shows a process of acquiring the recipe data CD from the external communication terminal device 200, the cloud server 300, or the like.

In step S9, if one control menu (for example, "warm") displayed on the second specific screen 16M2 is sufficient, then pressing the input key 156M or 157M allows control conditions (microwave output, heating time, etc.) can be selected (step S10).

In step S10, if the control conditions for one composite cooking mode are sufficient, pressing the input key 151M allows the transition to the cooking process 1 of the composite cooking mode KM2 (step S11).

As is clear from FIG. 38, when the input key (multipurpose key) 154M is “long-pressed” at the stage of step S7, the control device 40 switches to the “input standby state” by voice. You can input the range condition by voice. For example, a control menu (in this case, "warm up") and a control condition can be input as a set by the user's voice, such as "warm up 500W". It is also possible to input only the control condition by voice, such as "500W, 10 minutes".

Next, FIG. 38 will be described.
If neither the input key 153M is touched in step S2 nor the input keys 154M and 155M are touched in step S7, either the input key 153L or 153R of the right operation section 15R or the left operation section 15L is touched. , the single cooking mode KM1 by the first heating means HM1 is selected (step S12), and the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed on the right display section 16R or the left display section 16L (step S13).

Step S12A shows a process of acquiring the recipe data CD from the external communication terminal device 200, the cloud server 300, or the like.

Each time the input key 152L or 152R is touch-operated, another control menu (see FIG. 46) can be displayed one after another (step S14).

In step S14, if one control menu (see FIG. 46) displayed on the third specific screen 16M3 is sufficient, then input key 155L or 156L (in case of left operation section 15L), input key 155R or 156R (right operation) 15R), it is possible to select control conditions (induction heating thermal power, heating time, etc.) (step S15).

In step S15, if the control conditions for one single cooking mode KM1 are sufficient, induction heating is automatically started for a certain period of time (10 seconds) without pressing the input key.

As is clear from FIG. 38, when the input key (multipurpose key) 153L or 153R is "long-pressed" at the stage of step S12, the control device 40 switches to the "input standby state" by voice. Range conditions can be input by voice from to S15. For example, a control menu (in this case, "water heater") and a control condition can be input as a set by the user's voice, such as "water heater, thermal power 6". It should be noted that only the control conditions may be input by voice.

Alternatively, the input key 151L or 151R may be operated (step S14) to set the timer setting time using the input keys 154L, 155L (154R, 155R). These can also be input by voice after switching to the voice input mode 1 . For example, it is sufficient to say something like "heat power 6 timer 10 minutes".

As is clear from FIG. 38, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is
The input operation section 15 includes a first input operation section (a right operation section 15R and a left operation section 15L) for the first heating means HM1 and a second input operation section for the second heating means. (Central operation unit 15M) and
input keys A (153L, 153R) arranged on the first input operation units 15L, 15R and input keys B (153M, 154M) arranged on the second input operation unit 15M, respectively;
The control device 40 validates the touch input of the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), whichever comes first, and activates the heating cooking mode (linked cooking mode KM3, combined cooking mode). KM2, single cooking mode KM1) or control mode ("warm" etc.) control conditions (thermal power, heating time, etc.) are input, and the input process using the other input key is not started until cooking is started. It was a configuration characterized by

In other words, the three heat cooking modes (linked cooking mode KM3, combined cooking mode KM2, single cooking mode KM1) are controlled by only one of the first touch-operated input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R. The command is accepted by the device 40, and the other input keys are in a state where the input commands are not accepted.

Therefore, for example, if the input key 154M is touch-operated and the input mode is switched to the voice input mode by long pressing, the other input keys cannot be input (however, the input functions of the input keys 151M and 152M are maintained). is done).

Therefore, when the voice input mode is started by any one of the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), selection of other heat cooking modes and control modes is disabled. Therefore, setting conditions are not input carelessly by voice input.

Also, when inputting the linked cooking mode KM3 with one input key (for example, 154M) using the voice input mode, when the input key 151M is pressed to start cooking, the voice input up to that point is mode is canceled. Therefore, when the user US performs a touch operation when selecting another cooking method after that, confusion does not occur.

Next, FIG. 39 will be described.
In FIG. 39, white symbols (153M, for example) indicate input keys (153M, etc.) operated in steps SM3, SM4 and SM8.
In FIG. 39, step SM1 performs processing corresponding to steps ST2 and ST3 in FIG. That is, the central display unit 16M is activated, and the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed. Abnormality determination is executed, and if there is no abnormality, a message to the effect that "there is no abnormality and cooking can be started" is displayed. Then, in the standby initial screen 16MH and the voice notification unit 51, a notification for prompting selection of the heating means and a voice guide are performed.

Furthermore, at the stage of this step SM1, if the communication terminal device 200 or the cloud server 300 is set to transmit activation information from the heating cooker 1, the activation information from the communication unit 51 at this stage (Operating state data OS) is transmitted wirelessly. Note that the standby initial screen 16MH also displays usage caution information for the user US, as will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

In the next step SM2, the input functions of all the input operation sections 15M, 15L, and 15R are enabled to prepare for touch input operation of each input key (153M, 154M, 153L, 154R, etc.). In addition, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 17) of the input operation unit 15 starts measuring the elapsed time. Although FIG. 17 shows an example of the central operating section 15M, the right operating section 15R and the left operating section 15L also have the same configuration as the central operating section 15M. Therefore, it has a configuration corresponding to the time measurement unit 15T.

In the next step SM3, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected. At step SM4, selection of the composite cooking mode KM2 is performed. At step SM8, the single cooking mode KM1 is selected by the first heating means HM1.

First, in step SM3, it is determined whether or not the input key 153M has been touch-operated, and if so, the process proceeds to route A1 shown in FIGS.
In step SM3, if there is no touch operation, the determination is "No", and the process proceeds to step SM4. At step SM4, if either the input key 154M or 155M is touch-operated, the answer is "Yes", and the process proceeds to route B1 shown in FIGS.

In step SM4, if there is no touch operation, the determination is "No", and the process proceeds to step SM8. At step SM8, if either the input key 153L or 153R is touch-operated, the answer is "Yes", and the process proceeds to route C1 shown in FIGS.

In step SM8 shown in FIG. 39, if there is no touch operation, the determination is "No", and the process proceeds to step SM5. In this step SM5, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 17) determines whether or not a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SM3.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SM5 that the preset time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM6 to automatically cut off the main power supply (hereinafter referred to as "automatic cut-off process 1"). done. Then, the series of operations is completed (SM7). In this manner, when no input operation is performed, the main power switch 20 is automatically opened when the time limit (for example, 30 minutes) is exceeded.

Next, FIG. 40 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing operations after input key 153M is touch-operated in step SM3.
When the input key 153M is touch-operated, if the touch operation is "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination section 15C (see FIG. 17) of the central operation section 15M.

Then, the determination in step SM40 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM41. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination is "No", and the process proceeds to step SM50.
Step SM41 is a step for judging whether or not the aforementioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied. If these permission conditions are not met, the permission is denied at this stage (step SM47). The disapproval process is the process of step ST8 described with reference to FIG.

If the determination in step SM41 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM42.
At step SM42, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.
FIG. 26 shows, for example, the state when the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed. After that, the input key 154M or 155M is further touch-operated to select a specific cooking menu (eg, hamburger) (may be touch-operated multiple times).

In FIG. 40, at step SM43, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 17) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether or not the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After step SM43, if the user US makes an input by voice via the voice signal receiving section 56 (see FIG. 16), step SM44 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step SM45.

By the way, at the stage of step SM43, the control device 40 has already switched to the "speech input mode 1A". Therefore, if the input key 155M is touch-input after step SM43, the input of the input key 155M is not accepted by the control device 40 because of the "voice input mode 1A". In other words, since step SM44 does not become "Yes" unless voice input is performed, the process cannot proceed to step SM46 for completion of input. If the "voice input mode 1B" is set, touch input can be continued as described above. In addition, exceptionally, the voice input control program may be changed so that the "voice input mode" is canceled when the input key 154M is touch-inputted again (in this case, "short press"). .

As described above, in the first embodiment, immediately after the input key 154M is "long-pressed", the mode is switched to the voice input mode 1A, and the voice input mode 1A is automatically continued thereafter. However, this voice input mode 1A is canceled when the heating operation is started (that is, when the input key 151M is touch-operated).

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM46. At step SM46, it is determined whether or not the input has been completed. If the determination at step SM46 is "Yes", a standby state awaits input from the input key 151M (A21).

On the other hand, if the results in steps SM44 and SM46 are "No", the process returns to step SM44 and waits for voice input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM45 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM45 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM48 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutdown processing shown in step SM6 of FIG. is displayed or notified by voice from the voice notification unit 50 . After that, the process proceeds to step SM5, and in some cases the process proceeds to step SM6 for automatic cutoff processing.

Steps SM50 and subsequent steps will be described with reference to FIG.
Step SM50 is a step for judging whether or not the above-described "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied. If the "permission condition 1" and the "permission condition 2" are not satisfied, a non-permission process is performed at this stage (step SM56). The disapproval process is the process of step ST8 described with reference to FIG.

If the determination in step SM50 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM51.
At step SM51, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.
FIG. 26 shows, for example, the state when the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed. After that, the input key 154M or 155M is further touch-operated to select a specific cooking menu (eg, hamburger) (may be touch-operated multiple times).

In FIG. 40, in step SM52, the time measuring unit 15T (see FIG. 17) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether or not the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM52, if the user US performs a touch input, for example, using the input keys 156M and 157M via the audio signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 16), step SM53 becomes "Yes", and the next step is performed. Proceed to step SM54.

By the way, at the stage of step SM53, the control device 40 has already switched to the touch input mode. Therefore, when touch input is performed on the input key 155M after step SM52, the input on the input key 155M is accepted by the control device 40 for the touch input mode. In other words, as long as the input is touch input, the result of step SM53 is "Yes", so the process advances to step SM46 for completion of input. Exceptionally, when the input key 154 is touch-inputted again (in this case, "long press"), the touch input mode may be canceled and the mode may be changed to return to the "voice input mode 1". .

Thus, in the first embodiment, the touch input mode is maintained unless input key 154M is "long-pressed", and the touch input mode is automatically continued thereafter. This touch input mode is automatically canceled when the heating operation is started.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM55. Then, it is determined whether or not the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM55 is "Yes", a standby state awaits input from the input key 151M (A22).

On the other hand, if "No" in steps SM53 and SM55, the process returns to step SM53 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM54 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM54 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM57 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutdown processing shown in step SM6 of FIG. is displayed or notified by voice from the voice notification unit 50 . After that, the process proceeds to step SM5, and in some cases the process proceeds to step SM6 for automatic cutoff processing.

Next, FIG. 41 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing operations after the touch operation of either the input key 154M or 155M in step SM4.
When the input key 154M is touch-operated, if the touch operation is "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination section 15C (see FIG. 17) of the central operation section 15M.

Then, the determination in step SM60 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM61. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination is "No", and the process proceeds to step SM70.
Step SM61 is a step for determining whether or not "permission condition 3" is satisfied.
The “permission condition 3” referred to here is different from the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 of the cooperative cooking mode (see FIGS. 35 and 36). The "permission condition 3" in this compound cooking mode is when the latest temperature of the heating chamber 6 is checked by the temperature sensor group 30 and is, for example, 100°C. This is because it exceeds the temperature detection range (90° C. or less) for “warming up”.

If the "permission condition 3" is not satisfied, a disapproval process is performed at this stage (step SM67). The non-permission process is a process of displaying a message such as "the heating chamber is too hot to cook" on the initial standby screen 16MH, or performing a similar notification by the voice notification unit 50. FIG. When cooking is performed in the heating chamber 6 by the third heating means HM3, the heating chamber 6 may remain at a high temperature for a while even after the cooking is finished due to residual heat.

If the determination in step SM61 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM62.
At step SM62, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.
FIG. 22 shows, for example, the state when the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed. After that, the input key 154M or 155M is further touch-operated (it may be touch-operated multiple times) in order to select a specific control menu (eg, warm up).

In FIG. 41, in step SM63, the time measuring unit 15T (see FIG. 17) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether or not the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After step SM63, if the user US makes an input by voice via the voice signal receiving section 56 (see FIG. 16), step SM64 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step SM65.

By the way, the control device 40 has already switched to the voice input mode 1 at the stage of step SM63. Therefore, if the input key 155M is touch-input after step SM63, the input of the input key 155M is not accepted by the control device 40 because of the voice input mode (the "voice input mode 1A”). In other words, since step SM64 does not become "Yes" unless voice input is performed, the process cannot proceed to step SM66 for completion of input. Exceptionally, when the input key 154M is touch-inputted again (in this case, "short press"), the "voice input mode 1" may be canceled. Further, when the “voice input mode 1B” is set, the touch input of the input key 155M is accepted by the control device 40 .

As described above, in the first embodiment, the mode is switched to the voice input mode 1 immediately after the input key 154M is "long-pressed". 151M is touched), it is automatically canceled.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM66. At step SM65, it is determined whether or not the input has been completed. If the determination at step SM66 is "Yes", a standby state awaits input from the input key 151M (B21).

On the other hand, if steps SM64 and SM66 are "No", the process returns to step SM64 and waits for voice input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM65 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM65 becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step SM68 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutdown processing shown in step SM6 of FIG. is displayed or notified by voice from the voice notification unit 50 . After that, the process proceeds to step SM5, and in some cases the process proceeds to step SM6 for automatic cutoff processing.

Subsequently, steps after step SM60 will be described with reference to FIG.
Step SM70 is a step for judging whether or not the aforementioned "permission condition 3" is satisfied. If permission condition 3 is not satisfied, permission is denied at this stage (step SM76). The "non-permission processing" in this case has the same content as the non-permission processing of step SM67.

If the determination in step SM70 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM71.
At step SM71, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.
FIG. 22 shows, for example, the state when the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed. After that, the input key 154M or 155M is further touch-operated (it may be touch-operated multiple times) in order to select a specific control menu (eg, warm up).
At this stage, if the input key 154M is "long-pressed", the mode is switched to voice input mode 1, and the process proceeds to step SM63. However, if the input key 155M is operated for input or the input key 154 is "short-pressed" without "long-pressing" the input key 154M, the "touch input mode" is maintained and the process proceeds to step SM72.

As described above, in the first embodiment, in the selection of the composite cooking mode and the control menu (eg, warming), immediately after the input key 154M is "long-pressed", the voice input mode is switched to the voice input mode 1. 1 is not automatically continued thereafter, but is canceled at the start of the heating operation. Note that if the same input key 154M is "short-pressed", the voice input mode 1 may be canceled at this point.

In FIG. 41, in step SM72, the time measuring unit 15T (see FIG. 17) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether or not the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After step SM72, if the user US performs a touch input, for example, using the input keys 156M and 157M via the audio signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 16), step SM73 becomes "Yes", and the next step is performed. The process proceeds to step SM74.

By the way, at the stage of step SM72, the control device 40 has already switched to the touch input mode. Therefore, when the input key 155M is touch-input after step SM72, the input of the input key 155M is accepted by the control device 40 for the touch input mode. That is, as long as the input is touch input, the result of step SM73 is "Yes", so the process advances to step SM75 for completion of input. Exceptionally, when the input key 154M is touch-inputted again (in this case, "long press"), the touch input mode may be canceled and the mode may be changed to return to the "voice input mode 1". .

Thus, in the first embodiment, the touch input mode is maintained unless input key 154M is "long-pressed", and the touch input mode is automatically continued thereafter. This touch input mode is automatically canceled when the heating operation is started. Therefore, it returns to normal touch input mode.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM75. Then, it is determined whether or not the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM75 is "Yes", a standby state is entered to wait for input from the input key 151M (B22).

On the other hand, if "No" in steps SM73 and SM75, the process returns to step SM73 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM74 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM74 becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step SM77 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutdown processing shown in step SM6 of FIG. is displayed or notified by voice from the voice notification unit 50 . After that, the process proceeds to step SM5, and in some cases the process proceeds to step SM6 for automatic cutoff processing.

Next, FIG. 42 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the operation after either the input key 153L or 153R is touch-operated in step SM8 of FIG.
In order to simplify the following description, the following description will be limited to the case where the left operation unit 15L is operated.

When the touch operation of the input key 153L is "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination unit 15C (see FIG. 17) of the left operation unit 15L. Although FIG. 17 shows an example of the central operating section 15M, the left operating section 15L has the same configuration as that shown in FIG.

Then, the determination in step SM80 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM81. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination is "No", and the process proceeds to step SM90.
Step SM81 is a step for determining whether or not "permission condition 4" is satisfied.
The "permission condition 4" here is different from the permission conditions 1 and 2 of the cooperative cooking mode (see FIGS. 35 and 36) and the above-described "permission condition 3". The "permission condition 4" in the single cooking mode KM1 is, for example, when the latest temperature of the top plate 3 is checked by the temperature sensor group 30 and the result is a high temperature exceeding 100°C. This is because, when induction heating control is performed by detecting the temperature of the object to be heated N without contact, accurate temperature control and induction heating control may be hindered if the temperature is high from the start of the heating operation.

If the "permission condition 4" is not satisfied, a disapproval process is performed at this stage (step SM87). The non-permission process is a process of displaying a message such as "the top plate is too hot to cook" on the initial standby screen 16MH, or performing a similar notification by the voice notification unit 50. FIG. When induction cooking is performed, the top plate 3 may remain at a high temperature for a while even after the cooking is finished.

If the determination in step SM81 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM82.
At step SM82, the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed.
FIG. 46 shows, for example, the state when the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed. Thereafter, the input key 154L or 155L may be further touch-operated to select a specific control menu (eg, preheating) (multiple touch-operations may be performed).

By the way, at this stage, since the mode has already been switched to "speech input mode 1", in the next step SM83, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 17) determines whether or not the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. Elapsed time measurement is started for determination. After step SM83, if the user US makes an input by voice via the voice signal receiving section 56 (see FIG. 16), step SM84 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step SM85.
For example, if the user US utters “preheat 200° C.”, the audio signal receiving section 56 converts this audio input into an electrical signal and inputs the electrical signal to the audio signal analysis section 58 .

At step SM85, it is determined whether or not the time limit TY has been exceeded, and if it has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM86.
At step SM86, it is determined whether or not the input has been completed, and if the determination at step SM86 is "Yes", the induction heating operation is automatically started within a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds). That is, in the first heating means HM1 (in the case of the single cooking mode HM1) using the left operation part 16L, there is no need to operate a special input key to start heating, and the heating operation is started as it is (C21 ).

On the other hand, if steps SM84 and SM86 are "No", the process returns to step SM84 and waits for voice input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM85 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM85 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM88 for error processing. The error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutdown processing shown in step SM6 of FIG. is displayed or notified by voice from the voice notification unit 50 . After that, the process proceeds to step SM5, and in some cases the process proceeds to step SM6 for automatic cutoff processing.

Subsequently, steps after step SM80 will be described with reference to FIG.
Step SM90 is a step for judging whether or not the above-described "permission condition 4" is satisfied. If permission condition 4 is not satisfied, permission is denied at this stage (step SM96). The "non-permission processing" in this case has the same content as the non-permission processing of step SM87.

If the determination in step SM90 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM91.
At step SM91, the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed.
FIG. 46 shows, for example, the state when the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed. After that, the input keys 154L, 155L, 151L, etc. are further touch-operated to select a specific control menu (eg, preheating) (multiple touch-operations may be performed).

In FIG. 41, in step SM92, the time measuring section 15T (see FIG. 17) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether or not the preset time limit TY has been exceeded.

By the way, at this stage, it is in the "touch input mode", so in the next step SM93, the time measuring unit 15T (see FIG. 17) determines whether or not the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. Elapsed time measurement is started.

By touching the input keys 154L, 155L, 151L, etc., a control menu (eg, preheating) and control conditions such as preheating temperature may be sequentially input (multiple touch operations may be performed). In this way, when the touch input is performed by the user US, step SM93 becomes "Yes", and if the time limit TY is not exceeded, the process proceeds from step SM94 to the next step SM95.
For example, if the user US sequentially inputs the conditions of "preheating" and "200° C." by touch input, the left operation unit 15L converts this input into an electric signal and inputs it to the input signal analysis unit 52 (see FIG. 16). do.

It should be noted that if the input keys 154L and 155R are "long-pressed", since these input keys do not have the function of switching to voice input mode 1, input by voice cannot be performed.

Thus, in the first embodiment, selection of the single cooking mode HM1 of the first heating means HM1 and selection of the heating units (right heating unit 4R, left heating unit 4L) (using the input keys 153R and 153L) are performed. Therefore, immediately after the input key 153R or 153L is "long-pressed", the mode is switched to the voice input mode 1, and the voice input mode 1 is automatically continued thereafter.

That is, once the input key 153L or 153R is "long-pressed", the voice input mode 1 is maintained regardless of the operation of the voice input key thereafter (the "voice input mode 1B" is set). if any). Even if the input key 153L (153R) is "long-pressed" again (twice in succession), the voice input mode 1 remains.

If it is determined in step SM94 that the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM95. Then, it is determined whether or not the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM95 is "Yes", the induction heating operation is automatically started within a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds). That is, in the first heating means HM1 (in the case of the single cooking mode HM1) using the left operation section 16L, there is no need to operate a special input key to start heating, and the heating operation is started as it is (C22 ).

On the other hand, if "No" in steps SM93 and SM95, the process returns to step SM93 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM94 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM94 becomes "No", and the process proceeds to step SM97 for error processing. The error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutdown processing shown in step SM6 of FIG. is displayed or notified by voice from the voice notification unit 50 . After that, the process proceeds to step SM5, and in some cases the process proceeds to step SM6 for automatic cutoff processing.

Next, FIGS. 43 and 44 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring the recipe data CD from the outside in the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart 2 similarly showing the operation of acquiring the recipe data CD from the outside.

In FIG. 43, at step SL1, a process corresponding to the process of step SM1 in FIG. 38 is performed. The next step SL2 performs processing corresponding to the processing of step SM2 in FIG.
Step SL3 is a process corresponding to step SS5 for connection and notification of the external connection described with reference to FIG. That is, this step is for the purpose of asking the user US to confirm in advance whether or not to transmit a signal requesting the provision of the recipe data CD to the smartphone (communication terminal device) 200 or the cloud server 300 registered and set in advance. .

As described above, it is also possible to automatically execute the external connection from the stage of step SL3 (SS5) (when previously set by the function setting key 151KP described above).
When the control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD, the next step SL4 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SL5.

The next step SL5 is a process of determining whether or not the received recipe data CD meets predetermined permission conditions. As described above, in cooperative cooking mode KM3, for example, cooking menus that do not satisfy "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are not permitted (see FIGS. 35 and 36). Further, in the composite cooking mode KM2 as well, it is determined whether or not a specific "permission condition 3" is satisfied. Permission condition 3 is the same as that described in step SM61 of FIG. Furthermore, the first heating means HM1 must satisfy the above-described "permission condition 4" (see step SM81 in FIG. 42).

If it is determined in step SL5 that the permission condition is not satisfied, as described in step ST8 of FIG. 24, a signal (data ) (step SL9). In addition, in FIG. 24, although it was the case of cooperative cooking mode KM3, such a "non-reception message" is transmitted also about combined cooking mode KM2 and single cooking mode KM1.

If the permission condition is satisfied, the determined recipe data CD is stored as normal data in a predetermined storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42 (step SL6).
Further, the identification information 167 and 160 and the control conditions (thermal power, heating time, target temperature, etc.) included in the recipe data CD are displayed on the central display section 16 . For example, if it is cooperative cooking mode KM3, it will be displayed on the 1st specific screen 16M1 (step SL6).

The next step SL7 is a control condition correction step. For example, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the control conditions displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (eg, heating time, target heating temperature, thermal power, etc.) can be set by operating the input keys 156M to 159M of the central operation unit 15M. Can be changed as appropriate. Since the recipe data CD is obtained for each cooking menu, the specific cooking menu (for example, hamburger) is already fixed, and it cannot be changed to another cooking menu (for example, roast beef).

When it is desired to modify the control conditions, for example, in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is sufficient to appropriately input the contents of the modification through the central operation unit 15M (step SL10). In this case, either "voice input mode 1" or "voice input mode 2" can be selected, and voice input is also possible.

If it is determined in step SL4 that the recipe data CD has not been received, the process proceeds to step SL8. At this step SL8, it is determined whether or not a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SL4. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SL11. Step SL11 is "automatic shutdown processing 1" for automatically shutting down the main power supply, like step SM6 described with reference to FIG. Note that the time limit TX of step SL8 and the time limit TX of step SM6 described with reference to FIG.

Next, FIG. 44 will be described.
In FIG. 44, step SS5 is the same as that explained in FIG. 26, so redundant explanation is omitted.
Step SS10 is a step for judging whether or not the input key 180 of voice input mode 2 has been operated. If the input key 180 is pressed once, the result is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SS11. If the input key 180 is not operated, the normal touch input mode is entered (step SS15).

If the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, step SS11 becomes "Yes".
If it is determined in step SS11 that the recipe data CD has not been received, the process proceeds to step SS16. At step SS16, it is determined whether or not a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SS11. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SS17. Step SS17 is "automatic shutdown processing 1" for automatically shutting off the main power supply, like step SM6 described with reference to FIG. Note that the time limit TX of step SS17 and the time limit TX of step SM6 described with reference to FIG.

The content of the recipe data CD received in step SS11 is judged whether or not it satisfies the aforementioned "permission condition" (see step SL5 in FIG. 42).

If the permission condition is not satisfied, as described in step SL9 of FIG. 43, the communication section 51 transmits a signal (data) to inform the outside that the recipe data CD cannot be received (SS18).

If the permission condition is satisfied, the determined recipe data CD is stored in a predetermined storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42 as regular data.
Further, the identification information 167, 160, etc. and the control conditions included in the recipe data are displayed on the central display section 16. FIG. For example, when the recipe data CD is the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS13).

The control conditions displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (for example, heating time, target heating temperature, thermal power, etc.) can be appropriately changed by voice input acquired via the voice signal receiving unit 56 of the input operation unit 15 (step SS14, SS15).

After "audio input mode 2" is selected by input key 180, "audio input mode 2" continues until the heating operation of one cooking menu is started. It does not switch to "touch input mode" during the input stage on the way. This is because switching in the middle of the input process may cause confusion in the operation of the user US.

If the touch input mode is desired, the input key 180 may be pressed again in the middle of the process. It returns to the touch input mode from the step of pressing. For example, when the input key 154M is "long-pressed" after returning to the touch input mode, the mode is switched to "voice input mode 1". Therefore, in the case of voice input mode 1 (set to voice input mode 1B), for example, when the input key 156M is operated for input, the input function of the input key is not invalidated, so input is possible.

Next, FIG. 45 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the heating control section 43 when the control device 40 switches to the voice input mode 1 in the heating cooker 1 . Although FIG. 45 shows the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is basically the same in the other cooking modes.

In FIG. 45, step SS20 indicates the point in time when the input mode of the control device 40 is switched to voice input mode 1. FIG.
In the next step SS21, the voice notification unit 50 and the central display unit 16M notify that acceptance of voice input has started. The state of the central display unit 16M at this time is as shown in FIG. 27, for example. That is, the mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode is displayed on the central operation unit 15M, and the voice input mode display information 179A indicating that the voice input is accepted as the auxiliary information 179 is displayed in the first specific mode. It is displayed on the screen 16M1.

In the next step SS22, the audio signal analysis section 58 shifts to an input standby state for receiving a voice command from the user US. Also, a time measuring unit (not shown) inside the control device 40 starts measuring the elapsed time.

Input information in the form of voice uttered by the user US is acquired by the voice signal receiving unit 56 via a microphone (not shown). The audio signal reception unit 56 converts the acquired audio information into a predetermined audio signal and transmits the audio signal to the audio signal analysis unit 58 (step SS23).

The audio signal analysis unit 56 analyzes the received audio signal (step SS24), and displays the input content on the central display unit 16M (first specific screen 16M1). For example, as described with reference to FIG. 28, a voice message such as "Hamburger right IH accepted" is announced, and characters are also displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS25).

At step SS25, if the input information is insufficient, the voice notification unit 50 further provides guidance such as "Specify the preheating temperature" by voice. Alternatively, a specific control condition range may be notified, such as "200° C. is recommended for the preheating temperature. Please specify the temperature."

If the input of the control conditions necessary for starting the heating operation is insufficient, the process returns to step SS23. Before returning to step SS23, the voice notification unit 50 points out the control condition for which the input is insufficient and prompts for input (not shown).

When the heating control unit 43 determines that the input of the control conditions necessary for starting the heating operation has been completed (step SS26), the process proceeds to step SS27. In step SS27, since the input by voice is completed, it is announced that the voice input mode 1 will be canceled, and it is recommended to touch the input key 151M (step SS27). Note that the voice input mode 1 is canceled when the input key 151M is touch-operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SS23 that the voice command has not been received, the process proceeds to step SS28. At step SS28, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from step SS22 has exceeded a predetermined time limit TZ. If the time limit TZ has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SS23. However, if the time limit TZ (for example, 5 minutes) is exceeded, the process proceeds to step SS29. Step SS29 is "automatic shutdown processing 2" similar to step SM6 in FIG. In addition, this "automatic shutdown process 2" issues an alarm to the user US by the voice notification unit 50 in the state of the first specific screen 16M1, then automatically switches to the standby initial screen 16MH, and then automatically switches to the standby initial screen 16MH. This is a series of processing to open the main power switch 20 at the beginning of the process. This ensures safety by avoiding being left for a long time for some reason during the input process.

Next, FIG. 46 will be described.
FIG. 46 shows the display contents of the central display section 16M corresponding to each main operation step after the main power switch 20 is turned on.

FIG. 46 will be described. When the main power switch 20 is turned off, the central display section 16M is not activated, so no information is displayed.
In the state where the main power switch 20 is turned on, the control device 40 performs self-diagnosis such as whether there is an abnormality or the like as described above, and then performs a "display screen", which is one display form of the standby initial screen 16MH of FIG. 1” is displayed on the central display unit 16M.

In the display screen 1 shown in FIG. 46, 60A is a display text notifying that the power is on. 60B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for guiding to the recipe data providing server 301, which is a dedicated recipe posting site, via the network NW. 60C is a sentence explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code (hereafter referred to as "two-dimensional information explanation").

When the two-dimensional code 60B is optically read by the smartphone 200, the smartphone 200 can be guided to and connected to the recipe data providing server 301 that holds information on various cooking recipes. The two-dimensional information explanatory text 60C and the display text 60A are one type of "standby common information" 60N.

After the display screen 1 of FIG. 46 is displayed, the display screen 2A or 2B may be displayed automatically.
Furthermore, after the display screen 2A or 2B of FIG. 46 is displayed, the display screen 2C may be displayed automatically. This display screen 2C prompts the user US to perform an input operation by a recommendation sentence 60H to select a heating source.

In the display screen 2A, the character display "caution for bumping" is one of the caution displays 60E. This "bumping" is, for example, when heating a viscous food (liquid) such as curry or stew, the inside of the food is overheated above the boiling point and suddenly A phenomenon that causes violent boiling. Hot liquid droplets can be hazardous as they erupt from the hot liquid. It is said that the timing and cause of the occurrence of bumping are contamination or impact from outside. Therefore, when a metal pot or the like containing the food to be cooked is placed on the top plate 3 and induction-heated, attention is drawn to stirring the food to be cooked. The information displayed in this alert is one type of "standby common information" 60N.

The four display screens, display screen 1 and display screens 2A to 2C shown in FIG. 46, are called a "common screen" or "standby initial screen" 16MH. Forms other than these four may be included in the common screen 16MH.

In the display screen 2B, 60E is a caution display warning that the inside of the heating chamber 6 is at a high temperature and that it should not be touched carelessly. When the control device 40 detects that the heating chamber 6 is not sufficiently cooled after the oven cooking is performed in the heating chamber 6, the state is automatically switched to the display screen 2.例文帳に追加

Although the display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed at the same time, they may be displayed alternately at intervals of several seconds to call attention to both the bumping indication and the high temperature indication. Also, the content of the attention calling on the display screens 2A and 2B may be performed by voice by the voice notification unit 50 in parallel.

In the display screen 2C of FIG. 46, 60P is the acquisition operation support information described above. As shown in FIG. 46, the cooking device 1 acquires the recipe data CD from the smartphone 200 or the like, and stores the acquired data in the recipe data storage unit 42 (see FIG. 16) by the input key 180. By pressing (for selection of voice input mode 2), the user US can recognize that it can be obtained by voice (in accordance with this display, the voice notification unit 50 may give a voice notification).

As is clear from the display screens 1 to 2A to 2C in FIG. 46, the display of various information including the acquisition operation support information 60P is performed using the entire display screen. In other words, the first area 22 to the third area 24 are identified in order to secure as wide a display area as possible instead of partially displaying by any of the first area 22 to the third area 24 described above. It is displayed in an integrated manner so that it appears to the user US that it is displayed on the entire central display section 16M.

Next, FIG. 47 will be described.
FIG. 47 is an enlarged plan view for explaining the operation of the left display section 16L of the heating cooker 1. FIG.
FIG. 47 shows the third specific screen 16M3 for the single cooking mode KM1. This FIG. 47 is displayed when the input key 153L (see FIG. 12) is operated after step SS4 in FIG.

Next, when the input key 152L is operated, the control menus to be executed by the left heating port 4L are displayed one by one on the left display section 16L. As in the display screen 3A of FIG. 47, the control menu that is displayed first (default setting) may be set to "keep warm", "deep-fried food" on the display screen 3B, or " The user can set separately, such as whether to preheat.

Further, when the input key 153L is operated at the stage of step SM8 in FIG. 39 and the input key 152L is operated at the stage of step SM93 in FIG. Is displayed. Each time the input key 152L is pressed once, the display of the control menu changes one by one (such as heat retention, frying, preheating, etc.). That is, each time the input key 152L is pressed, one can be selected from a plurality of control menus.

Control menus (for the induction heating single cooking mode KM1) that can be selected with the left heating port 4L include, for example, “warming”, “boiling”, “simmering”, “frying (automatic cooking)”, and “preheating”. The driving time, heating power, driving pattern, etc. of the left IH coil 9L differ for each control menu.

The display screen 3A of FIG. 47 is displayed when the control menu of "Keep warm" is selected. The display screen 3B is displayed when the control menu for "fried food" is selected. The display screen 3C is when the "preheating" control menu is selected.
179A is the auxiliary information. After switching to the voice input mode, the auxiliary information 179A is displayed adjacent to the display portion of each control menu name on the third specific screen 16M3. Therefore, it is not displayed at a stage other than the voice input mode.

In addition, in the central display unit 16M, when using the central IH coil 9M in charge of the central heating port 4C and selecting "keep warm" in the control menu (of the induction heating single cooking mode KM1), The display screen 3A shown is displayed. In this case, the central display section 16M has a display form like the display screen 3A, and this screen is called a "third specific screen" 16M3.

Next, FIG. 48 will be described.
FIG. 48 illustrates the operation steps of the control device 40 of the heat cooker 1 from when the heat cooker 1 is activated until just before the heat cooking is started. This is when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected.

In FIG. 48, when the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed and the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display unit 16M, the recipe for the cooperative cooking mode is displayed from the external device (the smartphone 200 or the cloud server 300). A determination is made as to whether or not the data CD has been obtained (step SU2).

In step SU3, the control device 40 compares the state of the heating cooker 1 with the latest state, and determines whether or not the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 are satisfied.

When it is determined that the permission conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied at the same time (SU6), the identification information 167 included in the recipe data CD acquired from the external device (the smartphone 200 or the cloud server 300) is displayed on the central display unit 16M. indicate. In this case, the identification information 167 (for example, "name: hamburger") is displayed in the first specific screen 16M1 (step SU7).

At step SU7, the identification information 167 (for example, "name: hamburger") is displayed as shown in FIG.
Operation support information 170 is also displayed. This prompts the user US to press the input key 151M to start cooking. Note that the voice notification unit 50 also provides notification such as, for example, "Press the start key to start cooking with heat" (step SU8).

After step SU7, when the user US presses one of the input keys 158M or 159M once, a food ingredient display screen 16M1A (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is displayed. Further, when either one of the input keys 158M or 159M is pressed once, the food ingredient display screen 16M1B (see FIG. 30) is displayed.

At the stage of step SU8, the user US may appropriately set the heating power, heating time, etc. by operating input keys (eg, 156M or 155M) that can select control conditions (eg, heating power value).

On the other hand, the case where the control device 40 compares the state of the heating cooker 1 with the latest state at the stage of step SU3 and determines that the permission conditions 1 and 2 are not satisfied (step SU4) will be described.

The contents of the standby initial screen 16HM in the central display section 16M are partially changed, and the fact that the recipe data CD acquired from the external device cannot be executed by the current heating cooker 1 is displayed in characters. In addition, the voice notification unit 50 also gives voice notification of the same purpose (step SU5). Then, the process returns to step SU1. This operation corresponds to the operation of step ST8 described with reference to FIG.

Next, FIG. 49 will be described.
FIG. 49 is the same as the portion explained in FIG. 25, and is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation section 15M and the central display section 16M.

In FIG. 49, reference numeral 173 denotes an external recipe identification unit indicating that the recipe data CD is acquired from an external device (the smart phone 200 or the cloud server 300). It is easy to understand that the cooking menu (for cooking hamburger) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 is the recipe obtained from the outside by displaying "RECEIVE RECIPE" in characters.

In FIG. 49, the light emitting portion 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is in a standby state ready to start the heating operation. In order to display this fact, the input key 151M is blinking to prompt the operator to operate it. A dashed circle indicates that the light emitting portion 21M is blinking.

In FIG. 49, a star-shaped figure is drawn at the position of the light emitting portion 21M. The figure indicates that the input function of each input key (for example, 156M, 157M) arranged on the front side of the light emitting part 21M is effective, and if the touch operation is performed at this point, the heating power, heating time, etc. can be adjusted. means that

In FIG. 49, the light emitting portions 21M corresponding to the input keys 157M and 156M emit light. That is, the user US can select either one of the heating unit specifying unit 171L that selects cooking with the left heating port 4L and the heating unit specifying unit 171R that selects cooking with the right heating port 4R.

The recipe data CD acquired from the external device is displayed by the external recipe identification section 173 and preferentially displayed on the first specific screen 16M1. That is, the identification information 167 of the received recipe data CD is displayed at the "display position B" of the first specific screen 16M1. Therefore, by pressing the input key 151M as shown in FIG. 49, cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be started immediately.

As described above, the recipe data CD acquired from the external device (the smart phone 200 or the cloud server 300) is limited to specific heating portions (the right heating port 4R, the central heating port 4C, and the left heating port 4L) for cooking. There are two types: the case where cooking is performed, and the case where cooking is performed by specifying the range of the heating unit that can be used according to the user US's desire. Therefore, even when the user US uses the recipe data CD acquired from the outside, the usability is not impaired.

Next, FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking menu and the operation of the input operation section.
In the example of FIG. 50, the cooperative cooking menu is composed of three cooking processes 1, 2 and 3.
The cooking process 1 is an example using the first heating means HM1.

In the example of FIG. 50, the recipe data CD defines the following conditions in a predetermined computer program format. Control conditions such as thermal power may also be specified.
(1) Waiting for an input from the input key 151M to start the induction heating operation at the right heating port 4R (or the left heating port 4L).
(2) To stop the heating operation when there is an input from the input key 153R (153L), or to stop the heating operation when certain conditions (continuous cooking time or reaching the target temperature) are met.

Although the program included in the recipe data CD defines a heating pause period P3 and a heating pause period P5, which will be described later, the lengths of the heating pause periods P3 and P5 are not defined. However, in order to prevent the heat cooking from being interrupted for an excessively long time, for example, the elapsed time is counted based on the end point of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2. When, for example, 30 minutes have passed, A warning may be issued and processing such as forcibly stopping the execution of the cooking menu may be included.

In the example of the recipe data CD in FIG. 50, the cooking process 1 is performed by the first heating means HM1, the cooking process 2 is performed by the microwave heating source (second heating means HM2), and finally the food to be cooked is placed on the top plate 3. A cooking step 3 is provided for moving the heating element to the top and performing induction heating for finishing by compensating for the lack of heating.

In addition, in this heating cooker 1, a measure is added to prevent the setting of the cooking mode, the control conditions, etc., from being carried out inadvertently in response to a command signal from the outside.

In the example of FIG. 50, the first heating means HM1 is operated first, and after the heating operation is completed, the second heating means HM2 is operated. , the radiant heat heating means 12 may be operated.

As shown in FIG. 50, the linked cooking menu shown here consists of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 153M is operated to execute the cooperative cooking menu until the (induction) heating cooking operation is started by the input key 153R. .

When the input key 153M is operated and the "permission condition" as described above is satisfied, the control device 40 displays the first specific screen 16M1. Note that FIG. 50 does not show the first specific screen 16M1.

When the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, one of the cooperative cooking menus can be selected by operating the input keys 154M and 155M. After that, if the input key 153R is operated, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode (using the right heating port 4R), and proceeds to the heat cooking step of P2.

When the identification information 167 of the cooperative cooking menu desired by the user US is displayed at a predetermined position of the first specific screen 16M1 (default display) when the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the input key 154M, No manipulation of 155M is required.

P2 is a heat cooking period (cooking step 1) by the first heating means HM1.
In this cooking step 1, when an appropriate object to be cooked N such as a metal pot is placed on the right heating port 4R and the input key 153R is pressed, the heating and cooking operation is started.

At the stage of starting the cooking process 1, the control device 40 has already determined the permission conditions (1 and 2). I know it. In other words, the usage state of both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L is grasped.
Therefore, as a default setting, the control device 40 determines to use the "right heating section" 4R in the cooking process 3 of the cooperative cooking mode, and puts the right heating port 4R in an exclusive state.

The cooking process 1 is basically determined in advance by the operation program of the cooperative cooking menu. For example, when the standard heating time elapses, the voice notification unit 50 notifies, and the first specific screen 16M1 also displays a message such as "O minutes will elapse soon". That is, the user US is notified that the end of the cooking process 1 is approaching.
The user US may press the input key 153R once to finish the cooking process 1.

P3 is a heating rest period from when the cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1 is once stopped until the cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2 is started.

This heating pause period P3 is a period necessary for checking the degree of heating of the food to be cooked in the cooking process 1, adding seasoning, or adding another food to perform the cooking process 2. . Furthermore, it is a period necessary for moving the food to be cooked to the heating chamber 6 .
The heating pause step P3 ends when the input key 151M is pressed, and the process proceeds to the cooking step 2 of P4.

This cooking process 2 is started when the control device 40 confirms that the door 7 has been opened once during the rest period P3 and then closed. A door open/close signal from the open/close detector 10 is used by the controller 40 .
The control device 40 measures the time required from the time the door 7 is opened until the door 7 is closed again. A safety measure is adopted so that the heating operation will not start even if 151M is pressed.

The cooking process 2 basically ends automatically when the heating time predetermined by the operation program of the linked cooking menu elapses or when the temperature of the food to be cooked rises to a set value (e.g., 90°C). . For example, in a certain cooperative cooking menu, heating is started with a microwave output of 500W. Further, if the user US opens the door 7 at an arbitrary timing, the irradiation of microwaves is stopped instantaneously, and the heating operation is stopped.

In the cooking process 2 on P4, the user US may be able to individually set the control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating at least one of the four input keys 156M to 159M. Depending on the cooking menu, the user US may not be able to change the control conditions.

The example of FIG. 50 shows the case where the input key 152M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed to end the cooking process 2. FIG. When the input key 152M is pressed to issue a command to stop cooking, the cooking process 2 ends, and the process proceeds to the heating pause period of P5.

During this heating pause period P5, the user US opens the door 7, takes out the food to be cooked from the inside of the heating chamber 6, and places it on the top plate 3. The object to be cooked is placed in an object to be heated N such as a metal pan.
Then, when the input key 153R of the right heating section 4 is pressed to command the start of cooking, the heating pause step P5 ends and the process proceeds to the heating cooking period P6 ("cooking step 3" of induction heating).

This heating pause period P5 is a period required for checking the degree of heating of the food to be cooked in the cooking step 2, adding seasonings, or adding another food to be cooked and performing the next cooking step 3. is. For example, in the cooking process 2, only the frozen food is heated as the food to be cooked, and in the cooking process 3, the food to be cooked is immersed in seasoning or cooking liquid or separately cooked by preheating or the like, and the same food is heated. It can be added into the thing N. Therefore, the range of cooking is widened.

P6 switches from the cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source) to the cooking process 3 by the first heating means HM1 (in this case, the induction heating means, for example, the right heating port 4R).
In this cooking step 3, if the right heating port 4R is used for cooking as described above, the input keys 154R and 155R (see FIG. 8) can be operated to set control conditions (eg, cooking time, target temperature, etc.). ) can be individually set by the user US.

In addition, if the cooking process 3 is performed by the left heating port 4L, the user US can individually set control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 154L and 155L. can be set to

Then, when the input key 153R is pressed to command the stop of cooking, the cooking process 3 ends and the operation of the linked cooking mode ends. In the case of timer cooking, the induction heating cooking is automatically terminated when the time elapses, and the cooking step 3 is terminated.

As is clear from FIG. 50, it is not at the stage of selecting the linked cooking menu, that is, at the time when the identification information 167 indicating the name of the cooking of the linked cooking menu is displayed on the central display section 16M, but at the time of displaying the central operation section 15M. The right operation portion 15R of the right heating port 4R cannot be used from the time when the start of cooking is determined by the input key 151M. Note that if the left heating port 4L is set by default, the left heating port 4L will be in an exclusive state.

As is clear from the above description, the control device 40 performs the following function restriction processing.
(1) An input signal from the right operation unit 15R is invalidated or input is restricted. For example, the input functions of input keys 151R and 152R are disabled. As a result, during the heat cooking period (cooking process 1) to the heat cooking period (cooking process 3), the right heating port 4R cannot be used (inputted) except in situations where input is required in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Gone.
(2) The left operation unit 15L can be used even during the heat cooking period (cooking step 1) (the input signal from the left operation unit 15L is not invalidated).

Thus, when the cooking period (cooking process 1) is entered, the control device 40 is in a state where only the right heating port 4R of the cooking process 3 is occupied from the cooking process 1 stage.

Therefore, the right heating port 4R is "occupied" by the selection of the cooperative cooking menu. Also, when viewed from the whole of the first heating means HM1, the use of only a portion (right side) of the three heating portions is "restricted".

Even when the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) ends, the restricted state of the right heating port 4R is not released.
At the stage of the cooking process 1, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, and the user US can easily understand that the cooperative cooking mode is entered. Execution by other cooking menus is not restricted to the means HM2. This is the same for the heating pause period P3 to the cooking step 2 as well.

Note that even if the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state before starting the heat cooking period (cooking step 2), the temperature in the heating chamber 6 is used as the reference. If it is higher than the value, there is a concern that the control device 40, the non-contact (infrared) sensor 13, and the thermistor sensor 14 may erroneously recognize the abnormally high temperature as the completion of cooking even before cooking is started in the heating chamber 6. There is
Therefore, before the start of the heat cooking period (cooking step 1), if the temperature of the heating chamber 6 is too high, the first specific screen 15M1 will display the message "Due to high temperature, the second heating will be performed immediately. Means HM2 (microwave heating means) cannot be used" is displayed.

The periods indicated by thick arrows in FIG. 50 are the limited period for receiving one recipe data CD and the limited period for obtaining additional recipe data CD.

After the input key 153M is touched once and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the limiting operation by the limiting unit 55 is performed as follows.
Note that the communication unit 51 enables the reception/transmission function when the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (before that, at least the reception function is disabled).

That is, the restriction unit 55 built in the control device 40 operates as follows.
As shown in FIG. 50, it is not possible to change the externally obtained cooking menu A for the specific cooperative cooking mode OK3 to another cooking menu B (for example, "hamburger") for the same cooperative cooking mode KM3. In order to change it, it is necessary to operate the input key 152M to temporarily release the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and return to the scene of the initial standby screen 16MH.

In other words, when entering the restricted period indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 50, the cooking by the specific cooperative cooking menu A once obtained from the outside can be canceled at any time by operating the input key 152M. When the cancellation operation is once performed in this manner, the screen returns to the standby initial screen 16MH, and in that state, it is necessary to touch the input key 153M again.

Further, for a specific linked cooking menu A based on the recipe data CD acquired from the outside, the recipe data CD of another linked cooking menu C is externally ( cannot be acquired from the smartphone 200 or the like).

That is, when entering the restricted period indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 50, by operating the input key 151M, it is possible to decide to start cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and to start the specific cooperative cooking menu A obtained immediately before this decision. Cooking can be performed using the recipe data CD. However, the recipe data CD cannot be additionally acquired from the outside until all the cooking steps of this cooking menu A are completed.

Next, FIGS. 51 to 55 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable interval and control operation in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 in the cooking device 1. FIG. FIG. 52 is a time chart 1 for explaining the overall recipe data obtainable section and control operation in the combined cooking mode KM2 in the cooking device 1. FIG. FIG. 53 is a time chart showing Modification 1 of the time chart shown in FIG. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing display contents of the input operation section 15 and the central display section 16M in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 corresponding to the modification of FIG. FIG. 55 is a time chart showing Modification 2 of the time chart shown in FIG.

SA1 to SA9 in FIG. 51 indicate the operation of the control device 40. FIG.
First, the control device 40 detects that the main power switch 20 has been turned ON (step SA1), transmits data indicating that it has been started (operating state data OS) from the communication unit 51 to the outside, and performs self-diagnosis. mode is started (SA2). In other words, it is checked whether or not the components such as each circuit and sensors of the heating cooker 1 are normal.

Next, the display unit 16 is activated to display the standby initial screen 16MH (SA3). After that, display prompting the user US to select a heating means through the standby initial screen 16MH and similar voice guidance by the voice notification unit 50 are performed (SA3A).

Next, the user US presses the input key 153M to select the cooperative cooking mode KM3. This is step SA4 in FIG.

The "initial standby period" TP referred to in the first embodiment is a period starting from step SA3A, and the timing at which the initial standby period TP ends is when the input key for starting the heating operation is pressed (SA7). is. The start input key is the input key 151M in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

The initial waiting period TP cannot exceed the first time limit (first time limit TX). That is, by the process of step SM5 described in FIG. 42, the maximum time is, for example, 30 minutes or less.

Next, if the input key 153M, which also serves as the selector for the voice input mode 1, is not pressed during the initial standby period TP for waiting for a command to start the heating operation as described above, cooking in the linked cooking mode KM3 is performed. Menu cannot be selected.
Therefore, when the input key 153M is operated, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" described later is satisfied. That is, the program permits the acquisition of the recipe data CD by the data acquisition section 53 .

In other words, if the user US presses the input key 153M after step SA3A, acquisition of the recipe data CD for the linked cooking mode KM3 is permitted at the stage of pressing the input key (if the combined cooking mode KM2 is , enter key 154M or 155M). In the case of the single cooking mode KM1 using the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, it is necessary to press the input key 153R or 153L.

By the way, the input key 153M also serves as a selector for the voice input mode 1. FIG. Therefore, when the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) by "long-pressing" at the stage of step SA4, the voice input mode is automatically switched to the voice input mode 1 (step SA5).

Therefore, since the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 from the time of step SA5 shown in FIG.
Note that the voice input mode 1 is automatically terminated when a command to start the heating operation is given by the input key 151M.

Next, the case of the composite cooking mode KM2 will be described.
In FIG. 52, user US operates input key 154M to select composite cooking mode KM2 (step SA4).
Then, during the initial standby period TP, at the time of step SA4 when the input key 154M is pressed, the "recipe acquisition condition" is satisfied.

If the "recipe acquisition condition" is satisfied during the initial standby period TP, the data acquisition unit 53 acquires the recipe data CD of the control menu (for example, "warm") of the composite cooking mode KM2 only once via the communication unit 51. can.

Furthermore, during the initial standby period TP, the recipe data CD of the cooking menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 that has been acquired from the outside can be canceled with the input key 152M.
Actually, during the initial standby period TP, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed first, and the input key 152M is pressed after the identification information 160 of the recipe data CD is displayed in the screen.

Furthermore, during the initial standby period TP, the control conditions of the acquired recipe data CD can be changed as appropriate by operating the input keys 156M to 159M (some control conditions cannot be changed). In this case, too, the control conditions are displayed in the displayed second specific screen 16M1.

By the way, the input key 154M also serves as a selector for the voice input mode 1. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) by "long-pressing" at the stage of step SA4, the voice input mode is automatically switched to the voice input mode 1 (step SA5).

Therefore, since the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 from the time of step SA5 shown in FIG.
Note that the voice input mode 1 is automatically terminated when a command to start the heating operation is given by the input key 151M.

In the case of FIG. 52 as well, the initial standby period TP ends when the input key 151M is operated (SA7). Then, the actual heating operation is started immediately after that (SA9).
Since the initial waiting period TP ends at step SA9 as described above, the recipe data CD for another combined cooking mode KM2 cannot be acquired from the outside after this (however, during the cooking process, the recipe data CD may be input If the composite cooking mode KM2 is canceled with the key 152M, the recipe data CD can be obtained again).

The time difference between acquisition of the recipe data CD in steps SA3 and SA4 in FIG. 52 is limited to within 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, the control device 40 forcibly turns off the main power switch 20 for safety because the user US may have forgotten the operation input. Alternatively, the voice notification unit 51 issues a warning or other operation command (see step SL8 in FIG. 43).

It should be noted that instead of restricting the time difference between step SA3 and step SA4 in obtaining the recipe data CD to within 30 minutes, the period from step SA3A to step SA4, which is the point at which the initial waiting period TP begins, should be within 30 minutes. may be changed to limit to

As is clear from FIG. 52, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 in the initial waiting period TP is the acquisition possible period TB1 of the recipe data CD in the combined cooking mode KM2.

The period from steps SA4 to SA7 in the initial waiting period TP is the cancelable period TB2 of the recipe data CD in the complex cooking mode.
Also, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 is the control condition (control data) changeable period TB3 of the recipe data CD of the composite cooking mode KM2.

Next, FIG. 53 will be described. FIG. 53 is a time chart showing Modification 1 of the time chart shown in FIG. Similar to FIG. 51, SA1 to SA9 show the operation of the heating control section 43 of the control device 40 when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is executed.
Step SA4 is when the user US touches the input key 153M to select the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Even in the case of FIG. 53, the initial waiting period TP is a period that starts from step SA3A and ends when the input key 151M is pressed.

Even in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG. 53, the input key 153M is pressed during the initial standby period TP limited to a predetermined time (for example, within 30 minutes). At that point, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is satisfied.

When the “recipe acquisition permission condition” is satisfied, the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD of the cooperative cooking mode KM2 only once via the communication unit 51 .
In FIG. 53, the acquisition timing of the recipe data CD is different from the example shown in FIG. 51 as described below.

Unless the input key 153M serving as the selector for the voice input mode 1 is pressed during the initial standby period TP, the cooking menu for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected. In other words, the recipe data CD to be acquired cannot be specified.

Therefore, when the input key 153M is operated, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is satisfied. That is, the data acquisition section 53 is a program that permits acquisition of the recipe data CD. The recipe data CD can be acquired from the time of this step SA4. may be required).

By the way, the input key 153M also serves as a selector for the voice input mode 1. FIG. Therefore, when the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) by "long-pressing" at the stage of step SA4, the voice input mode is automatically switched to the voice input mode 1 (step SA5).

However, there are cases in which it is not known that the user US has switched to voice input mode 1 at the stage described above. Alternatively, it is assumed that the long press operation was not conscious.
Therefore, in the example of FIG. 53, after the automatic switching, when the fact that the recipe data CD has been acquired is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1, the fact that the voice input mode has been switched to 1 is displayed on the screen. At the same time, the voice notification unit 50 also notifies. An example of the actual first specific screen 16M1 is shown in FIG.

Therefore, input in voice input mode 1 is accepted from the time of step SA5 shown in FIG. Therefore, the control conditions for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be set by voice input from step SA5.
Note that the voice input mode 1 is automatically terminated when a command to start the heating operation is given by the input key 151M.

Next, FIG. 54 will be described.
FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing display contents of the input operation section 15 and the central display section 16M in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 corresponding to the modification of FIG.
The auxiliary information 179 shown in FIG. 62 is of two types. That is, one is voice input mode display information 179D indicating that voice input is accepted because the mode is voice input mode. The other is reference information 179E that recommends input of control conditions and includes examples (standard values) of control conditions that can be input.

At the stage of FIG. 54, as is clear from the fact that the light emitting units 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M to 169M are not emitting light, it is not possible to input control conditions by touching these input keys (in this example, , because it is set to the "touch input mode 1A" described above).
Further, as is clear from the fact that the light-emitting portion 21M corresponding to the input key 151M does not emit light, even if the input key 151M is pressed, the heating operation cannot be started at this stage. This is because the input of control conditions has not been completed.

Next, FIG. 55 will be described.
FIG. 55 is a time chart for explaining the whole of the recipe data CD obtainable section and the control operation in the linked cooking mode KM3, and shows a modification 2 of the time chart shown in FIG.

SA1 to SA9 in FIG. 55 indicate the operation of the control device 40 as in FIG.
In the example of FIG. 55, the hardware configuration of the dedicated voice input key 180 is changed. Specifically, the operation surface of the input key 180 is illuminated from below by a light-emitting element (LED) (not shown) arranged below the operation surface.

The input function of the input key 180 becomes valid when the input key 153M or the input key 154M is touch-operated (step SA4) after the control device 40 is activated. Further, after the input function becomes valid, it is illuminated by the light-emitting element (not shown) and becomes conspicuous in the operation section 15 .

Further, the initial standby period TP starts at the time when the user US is prompted to select the cooking mode on the standby initial screen 16MH (step SA3A).

Step SA4 is the time when either one of the input key 153M or the input key 154M is touch-operated, as in FIG. At this point, since the "recipe acquisition permitting condition" is satisfied, the recipe data CD can be acquired. After that, the initial waiting period TP ends when the input key 151M is operated.

In the example of FIG. 55, the recipe data of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be acquired from the outside via the communication unit 51 after the touch operation of the input key 153M. In addition, when input key 153M is not touch-operated and input key 154M is touch-operated, recipe data of combined cooking mode KM2 can be obtained.

After the input key 153M or 154M is operated, when the input key 180 is touch-input-operated at step SA5, the control device 40 shifts to the voice input mode 2. FIG. Therefore, after step SA5, the user US can input control conditions by voice.
In the example of FIG. 55, since the voice input mode is 2A, the input function of (part of) the input keys (for example, 156M) other than the dedicated voice input key 180 is temporarily disabled. . Therefore, even if the input keys 156M and 157M are touch-operated, nothing can be input.

Next, FIG. 56 will be described.
FIG. 56 shows the main processing of the controller 40 up to the start of cooking with recipe data CD acquired from the outside. In particular, it shows the process of displaying food composition and nutritional data.

In FIG. 56, the recipe data CD acquired from the smart phone 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication section 51 is stored in the recipe data storage section 42 of the storage device 41 (step SS30). Then, it is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS31). This stage corresponds to step SS13 described in FIG.

At the stage of step SS31, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display portion 16M. That is, at least the identification information 167 is displayed (see FIG. 27, for example).

In the next step SS32, it is determined whether or not there is a display command from the user US in order to display the ingredients of the food. Assuming that in the example of FIG. 27, the mode has already shifted to voice input mode 1, if a prescribed term (phrase) such as "food ingredient" or "calorie" is uttered by voice, this step SS32 is "Yes". will be judged. The audio signal is analyzed by the audio signal analysis unit 58 (see FIG. 16), and the data of the food ingredients of the cooking menu to be processed is read out from the storage device 41 .

A food component display screen 16M1A as shown in FIG. 30A is displayed on the first identification screen 16M1 (step SS33). Then the amount of energy, proteins, fats and carbohydrates are displayed.
Next, the process proceeds to step SS34 for determining whether or not the input key 151M has been pressed. In this step SS34, input is waited for a certain amount of time until the user US performs an operation. If the input key 151M is pressed during the standby time, the display returns to the first specific screen 16M1. Then, the driving of the heating means (first heating means HM1, etc.) is started (SS35).

If the input key 158M is not pressed for a certain period of time from the time of step SS31, and if there is no voice command to display food components, the determination of step SS32 is "No".

If the determination in step SS32 is "No", the process proceeds to step SS36. At step SS36, it is determined whether or not there is an instruction to display the nutritional components of the food. In the example of FIG. 27, since the voice input mode 1 has already been entered, at the stage of step SS36, a prescribed term (phrase) such as "nutrition" or "nutrition" is spoken.

Then, the audio signal is analyzed by the audio signal analysis unit 58 (see FIG. 12), and the data of the nutritional components of the target cooking menu is read out from the storage device 41 . And step SS36 becomes determination of "Yes". Even if the input key 180 is pressed again to cancel the voice input mode 2 and the input key 156M is pressed, the result of step SS36 is "Yes".

If the determination in step SS36 is "Yes", the display unit 16 displays a nutritional component display screen 16M1B as shown in FIG. 30(B) (step SS37). Then, the amount of energy, protein, fat and iron are displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step SS34.

As described above, if the input key 151KP for function setting is operated in advance and the setting is not made to display the ingredients of the food and the nutritional ingredients individually each time before the start of cooking. , the operations of steps SS33 and SS37 shown in FIG. 56 are not performed.

Although the examples of FIGS. 51 to 55 do not show the single cooking mode KM1, similar to the recipe data CD of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3, during the initial standby period TP, via the communication unit 51 Can be obtained from outside.

Summary of Embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, the first embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 related to the first disclosure as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker related to the first disclosure is
heating means for heating the object to be heated N (first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, etc.);
an input operation unit 15 that receives user commands;
a communication unit 51 that receives the recipe data CD from the outside;
a notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
and a control device 40,
The input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys (151M to 159M, etc.) for selecting cooking contents,
The input operation unit 15 instructs the control device 40 to start the voice input mode according to the touch state of the input key,
After activating the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays the standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
When the control device 40 receives a command to start the voice input mode from the input operation unit 15 while the standby initial screen 16MH is being displayed, the control device 40 receives the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51. and accepting a control condition setting command for the recipe data CD.
Specifically, the input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys (153M, 154M, 153L, 153R, etc.) for selecting three types of cooking modes (cooperation, combination, single) or cooking menus. ,
The input operation unit 15 determines whether or not it is necessary to switch the voice input mode (voice input mode 1) from the touch state of the input key, and issues a voice input mode support signal MC1.
When the control device 40 receives the voice input mode correspondence signal MC1, the control device 40 enables acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, and accepts a control condition setting command from the user US. It is a configuration characterized by

With such a configuration, the input operation unit 15 can control the timing of acquiring various recipe data CDs from the outside. In addition, since it is possible to switch to the voice input mode by using the touch-type input keys on the input operation unit, it is possible to input the troublesome work of the input process before starting the heating operation by voice. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability of the user US and reduce the workload.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 related to the first disclosure,
The control device 40 has a cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which one cooking is performed by driving the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 with a time difference,
When the control device 40 receives a command 1 (see step SB1 in FIG. 34) for selecting the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 from the input operation unit 15, the permission condition (see FIGS. 24 and 25) is satisfied. If so, the first specific screen 16M1 for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the display unit 16 (see step S2 in FIG. 23),
While the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the control device 40 issues the command 2 from the input operation section 15 (input keys 158M, 159M or the voice signal receiving section 56). When receiving the information, the display unit 16 displays at least one of the amount of food ingredients or nutritional ingredients related to a specific cooking item (see FIG. 30) that can be executed in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. It had a configuration to

With such a configuration, when a specific cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") is selected in the linked cooking mode KM3, information on the ingredients and nutrients of the food related to the cooking menu can be easily obtained. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the selection operation of the cooking menu by the user US.

For example, the user US can select an appropriate cooking menu based on information on the amount of food ingredients and nutritional ingredients according to the health management of the family, dietary restrictions, etc., thereby contributing to the improvement of eating habits. can.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 related to the first disclosure,
Identification information 167 of one cooking menu (for example, "hamburger"), a dedicated food ingredient display screen 16M1A showing food ingredients, and a dedicated nutrition ingredient display screen 16M1B showing identification information 167 and nutritional ingredients. Since the information is switched and displayed, the user US can easily and clearly identify each piece of information.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 1, the heating cooker 1 regarding 1st indication was implement|achieved by the following forms.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 disclosed in this Embodiment 1 is
a first heating means HM1 for heating an object to be heated;
a second heating means HM2 for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 6;
an input operation unit 15;
a notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
a communication unit 51 that receives recipe data CD for executing heat cooking from the outside;
and a control device 40,
The control device 40 has a cooperative cooking menu KM3 in which one cooking is performed by driving the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 with a time difference,
The input operation unit has an audio signal receiving unit 56 as an audio input means, and various input keys 151M to 159M, 151R to 155R, and 151L to 155L as a touch input means,
The control device 40 includes a heating control section 43 that controls a heating operation corresponding to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and a data acquisition section 53 that acquires the recipe data CD via the communication section 51 with respect to specific cooking items. and
The control device 40 enables the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD during the initial standby period TP,
When the control device 40 receives a command 1 for selecting the cooperative cooking menu KM3 from either the voice input means or the touch input means, the control device 40 selects the cooperative cooking mode KM3 if the permission condition is satisfied. display a specific cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") on the display unit 16 as a first specific screen 16M1,
When the control device 40 receives a command 2 from either the voice input means or the touch input means while the first specific screen 16M1 is being displayed, , at least one of the information is displayed (food component display screen 16M1A or nutritional component display screen 16M1B),
The control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD when the voice input means and the touch input means are operated within the first limited period TX,
The input operation unit 15 determines whether or not it is necessary to switch the voice input mode (voice input mode 1) from the touch state of the input key, and issues a voice input mode correspondence signal MC1,
When the control device 40 receives the voice input mode correspondence signal MC1 from the input operation unit 15 during the display period of the first specific screen 16M1, the control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51. and accepting a control condition setting command by voice of the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56;
It is a configuration characterized by

With such a configuration, when a specific cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") is selected in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is possible to easily obtain information on the ingredients and nutrients of each food to be cooked. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the selection operation of the cooking menu by the user US. For example, the user US can select an appropriate cooking menu from information on food ingredients and nutritional ingredients in accordance with family health management, dietary restrictions, and the like, thereby contributing to improvement of eating habits.

Furthermore, since the recipe data CD relating to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is received by a special operation of the user US, the timing of data acquisition from the outside is controlled.
In other words, the recipe data CD can be acquired when the voice input means and the touch input means satisfy the conditions for being operated within the first limited period TX (especially, see FIG. 43). Therefore, the recipe data CD is not inadvertently received due to the proximity of the communication terminal 200 or the like. Therefore, it is possible to improve the sense of security of the user US.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, specific input keys (input keys 154M, 153L, 153R) of the input operation unit 15 are also used as selection units for the voice input mode 1 .
With this configuration, an increase in the number of operation keys (operation units) of the input operation unit 15 can be avoided, and switching to the voice input mode 1 by the user US can be easily performed. can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 according to the first disclosure, the specific input keys (input keys 154M, 153L, 153R) that are the selector for the voice input mode 1 are also used for acquiring the recipe data. .
With this configuration, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of operation keys (operation units) of the input operation unit 15, thereby preventing deterioration in operability for the user US.

In addition, in the cooking device 1 relating to the first disclosure, the first specific screen 16M1 is not displayed unless the prerequisites (permission condition 1 and permission condition 2) for starting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are satisfied. For this reason, after the user US sets (selects) various conditions (for example, heating power level, target temperature, heating time, etc.) of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is determined that permission condition 1 or permission condition 2 is not satisfied. Therefore, the step is not forcibly returned to the stage of the initial standby screen 16MH. Therefore, the user US is not forced to perform useless input operations.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 according to the first disclosure, the input operation unit 15 is provided with a selection key 180 for selecting voice input mode 2 using the voice input means.
Therefore, even when the user US cannot perform touch operations because his/her hands are full during the cooking process, instructions can be given by voice, which is convenient.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 related to the first disclosure, the acquisition condition for acquiring the recipe data CD from the outside is that the input key 180 and one input key (for example, the input key 153M) of the touch input unit are , was satisfied if operated within said first time limit (TX).

That is, the initial waiting period TP cannot exceed the first time limit (first time limit TX). For example, the maximum is 30 minutes.

Therefore, even if the user US left the operation of the input operation unit 15 interrupted for some reason, the heating cooker 1 automatically disabled input (forcibly turning the main power switch 20). open). Therefore, the cooking control data and the like are not acquired from the outside without the knowledge of the user US, and the safety is improved.

The input operation section 15 is provided with an input key 180 as a selection section for voice input mode 2 and an input key (for example, an input key 158M) for instructing display of the information of the food component data DD. Therefore, the operability for the user US is good.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11 of Embodiment 1, the input key 180 and the input key (for example, the input key 158M) for commanding the display of the information of the food component data DD are provided on the central operation unit M. In the configuration in which the central display unit 16M is arranged in the vicinity of the central display unit 16M, when the user US is cooking while standing in front of the central operation unit 15M, the operation range of the user US can be visually recognized. The necessary display unit and operation unit exist within the range, and the user US can perform operations without moving the standing position. As a result, benefits such as reducing the physical burden on the user US during cooking can be expected.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 according to the first disclosure, the control device 40 controls the input key 180 when the input key 180 is not operated, and one input key (154M) of the input operation unit 15 is also the first If the operation is not performed within the time limit (TX), at least one of cutting off the supply of the main power supply or commanding an alarm operation by the notification unit 90 was executed (Fig. 44 automatic shutdown processing 1).

That is, as described with reference to FIG. 27, the elapsed time from the step (SS10) of determining whether the input key 180 or the input key 154M capable of switching to the voice input mode 1 has been operated is, for example, within 30 minutes. is limited to Alternatively, the limit of the elapsed time from the first step SS5 in which the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed is set within 30 minutes.

Therefore, if the user US forgets to perform the input operation for some reason or is unable to perform the operation, the control device 40 forcibly opens the main power switch 20 or issues an alarm from the viewpoint of safety. It is configured to improve safety by performing the operation of issuing

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 related to the first disclosure, the input operation unit 15 has a function setting key 151KP,
When the function setting key 151KP is operated, the control device 40 shifts to a function setting mode,
The function setting mode is configured to set whether or not the food component or the nutritional component should be displayed on the central display portion 16M or the conditions.

With this configuration, it is possible to set the functions according to the wishes of the user US and the degree of proficiency of the user.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment,
The restriction unit 55 is characterized by restricting acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of the cooking menu to which the acquired recipe data CD is applied is completed. A heating cooker 1 was disclosed.

With this configuration, the two heating means can be selected to sequentially perform cooking in the single cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM3 without interfering with each other. This makes it possible to provide a cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, since there is the restriction unit 55, if the recipe data for one specific linked cooking menu A is acquired once, then the recipe data CD for another linked cooking menu B can be obtained immediately before the cooking process starts or during the cooking process. The control device 40 does not inadvertently obtain the information during the process. Therefore, for example, another cooking menu (including the control menu for the combined cooking mode and the control menu for the single cooking mode) is not accidentally received in the middle of the cooperative cooking. Therefore, there is no concern about confusion of the user US due to reception or interference with the operation of the heating cooker 1 side.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The input operation unit 15 includes input keys 153L and 153R for selecting the single cooking mode KM1, input keys 154M and 155M for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2, and input key 153M for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3. are disclosed separately.

With this configuration, three cooking modes can be individually selected by the respective input keys (input means), so even if the heating cooker 1 has an increased number of heat sources, the operability for the user US can be improved. can be improved.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1,
The restriction unit 55 restricts acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of the cooking menu to which the acquired recipe data CD is applied is completed,
If the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled by the input operation unit 15 after the recipe data is acquired but before the cooking process is started, the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD again. It was a configuration characterized by

For this reason, it is possible to prevent inadvertent reception of another cooking menu (including the control menu of the combined cooking mode and the control menu of the single cooking mode) in the middle of the cooperative cooking, and the stable reception of the recipe data CD. Cooking menu can be executed.

Furthermore, due to careless reception of the recipe data CD of another cooking menu in the middle of the cooking process, the operation of the control device 40 may be hindered, or the user US may be misunderstood or confused. can be prevented.

Furthermore, when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is canceled, the recipe data CD that was acquired before and is not used for cooking can be canceled and the desired recipe data CD can be acquired. You can avoid confusion.

Furthermore, one form of the heating cooker 1 disclosed in Embodiment 1 is
a first heating means HM1 for heating the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 3;
an input operation unit 15 that receives commands from a user US;
a communication unit 51 that receives the recipe data CD from the outside;
a notification unit 90 having a display unit 16 for displaying cooking information and an audio notification unit 50;
and a control device 40,
The control device 40 has a function of performing a cooperative cooking mode KM3, a combined cooking mode KM2, and a single cooking mode KM1,
After the main power supply is turned on by the input operation unit 15, the control device 40
(1) display the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH on the display unit 16;
(2) When the touch-type input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M for selecting one of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 are operated, acquisition and use of the recipe data CD acquired from the communication unit 51 are performed. , limited by the limiting unit 55,
(3) When the input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M are operated, the display of the initial screen (common screen) 16MH is automatically changed to the display of the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2,
(4) With the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2 displayed, shift to an initial waiting period TP for receiving a cooking start command from the input operation unit 15,
(5) during the initial standby period TP, the acquisition of the recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 is limited to once;
(6) When a specific input key (154M) among the input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M is touch-operated, the voice input mode correspondence signal MC1 issued from the input operation unit 15 according to the touch state is received. Then, it shifts to the "control condition voice input mode" for executing the recipe data CD.

According to this configuration, when the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH is displayed, if the selection input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M are operated thereafter, the dedicated first screen for the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode is displayed. It can be easily understood that the specific screen 16M1 and the second specific screen 16M2 can be displayed and the recipe data can be obtained from the outside.
You can also switch to voice input mode using some of the input keys.
Therefore, it is possible to avoid confusion and misunderstanding in the input operation of the user US from immediately after turning on the main power until the start of cooking, and it is expected that usability will be improved by utilizing voice input and touch input.

Furthermore, in Embodiment 1, the heating cooker 1 regarding the 2nd disclosure was disclosed as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker related to the second disclosure is
a first heating means HM1;
a second heating means HM2;
a first input operation unit (right operation unit 15R, left operation unit 15L) that receives a user's instruction regarding the first heating means;
a second input operation unit (central operation unit 15M) that receives a user's instruction regarding the second heating means;
a communication unit 51 that receives the recipe data CD from the outside;
a notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
and a control device 40,
The first input operation unit (right operation unit 15R, left operation unit 15L) has touch-type input keys A (153L, 153R) for selecting cooking content,
The second input operation unit (central operation unit 15M) has touch-type input keys B (153M, 154M) for selecting cooking content,
The one input operation unit (right operation unit 15R, left operation unit 15L) instructs the control device 40 to start the voice input mode according to the touch state of the input key A (153L, 153R),
The second input operation unit (central operation unit 15M) instructs the control device 40 to start the voice input mode according to the touch state of the input key B (153M, 154M),
When the controller 40 receives a command to start the voice input mode from the second input operation unit (central operation unit 15M), the controller 40, via the communication unit 51, generates recipe data CD regarding the second heating means HM2. and accept a control condition setting command for the recipe data CD,
The configuration is characterized in that the setting of the voice input mode for the second input operation section (central operation section 15M) is canceled when the cooking using the recipe data CD is started.

With such a configuration, the input operation unit 15 can control the timing of acquiring various recipe data CDs from the outside. In addition, since it is possible to switch to the voice input mode by using the touch-type input keys on the input operation unit, it is possible to input the troublesome work of the input process before starting the heating operation by voice. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability of the user US and reduce the workload.

Furthermore, when the input process for one heat cooking is completed and the heat cooking is started, the voice input mode is automatically canceled and the touch input mode of the default setting is restored. When starting the voice input mode, there is no need to touch an input key or the like just to cancel the voice input mode, which is convenient.

Furthermore, in the cooking device according to the second disclosure, the control device 40 commands the voice input mode start command for the second input operation section (15M) and the first input operation section (15L, 15R). is not accepted at the same time as the start command of the voice input mode.

Because of this configuration, in the heating cooker 1 having a plurality of input operation units (the central operation unit 15M and the left and right operation units 15L and 15R), while performing an input operation with one input operation unit, other Even if the input operation part is operated, the input work in the input operation part started first can be executed without being affected by the input operation part started later (setting of voice input mode). Therefore, even if the user US accidentally touches a different input operation unit, the original input work will not be invalidated or interrupted.

Furthermore, in the cooking device according to the second disclosure, the control device 40 enables the earlier touch input of the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), This configuration is characterized in that the input process using the other input key does not start until the start key 151M is operated to receive a heat cooking start command after finishing the input of the control conditions in the heat cooking mode or the control mode.

Because of this configuration, in the heating cooker 1 having a plurality of input operation units (the central operation unit 15M and the left and right operation units 15L and 15R), while performing an input operation with one input operation unit, other Even if the input operation part is operated, the input operation part started later cannot perform any effective input to the control device 40, so the influence of the input operation part operated later (speech input mode setting ), the original input work can be performed. Therefore, even if the user US accidentally touches a different input operation section, the original input operation of the input operation section will not be invalidated or interrupted.

In addition to the above description, the heating cooker 1 disclosed in the first embodiment has the following characteristic configuration.
(1) At least one input key that can select "voice input mode 1" (can be "long-pressed") is provided for each cooking menu. That is, a total of I have 4 of them.
That is, it has four input keys 153M (for cooperative cooking mode), 154M, 153L, and 153R.

(2) The control menu group of the induction heating single cooking mode KM1 can be executed by heating cooking with the heating port 4R by the right operating unit 15R and heating cooking with the left heating port 4L by the left operating unit 15L. Input keys 153L and 153R capable of selecting "speech input mode 1" (operable by "long pressing") are provided corresponding to the left and right operating units 15L and 15R, respectively.

(3) Although it has three input operation units, only one input operation unit (for example, the central operation unit 15M) has an input key (for example, 154M) that can select "voice input mode 1" on that operation unit ) is pressed, the input process of the other input operation units (in this case, the left and right operation units 15L and 15R) cannot be started, so the voice input mode 1 cannot be selected either. However, in the above case, when the other input operation units (in this case, the left and right operation units 15L and 15R) are performing heat cooking, the input keys on the input operation unit can be operated by "touch input". It is possible. Therefore, changing the heating power and stopping heating during cooking can be performed without any restrictions.

In other words, when one input key (for example, 154M) is pressed in order to set the "speech input mode" in any one of the plurality of input operation sections, "start new cooking" in the other input operation sections is activated. cannot start the input process for Input operations other than the voice input mode are possible with the input operation unit that is already in the process of cooking with heat. Therefore, it is possible to control the heating cooking in progress (for example, stop heating, change heat power, etc.) by (touch, press) operations other than voice input.

With such a characteristic configuration, it is possible to avoid simultaneous input by voice in one input operation part and the other input operation part, so when cooking with heat at two places at the same time, cooking with heat at one place In addition to this, there is no interference with the input command when another cooking is to be started, so that the input operation can be performed reliably and the safety is high.

Embodiment 2.
57 to 80 show a heat cooker and a heat cooking system according to Embodiment 2. FIG. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configuration of the first embodiment described in FIGS. 1 to 56 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

In this second embodiment, the configuration of the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1 is different from that of the first embodiment. Also, the configuration of the cloud server 300 is changed.

Also in this second embodiment, when acquiring recipe data (including the above-mentioned "display condition data") from an external communication terminal device 200 or the like, the restriction unit 55 is configured so that the input function and the display function of the heating cooker 1 side are restrict some. Therefore, the data acquisition unit 53 issues various control commands in response to the operation of acquiring recipe data from the smartphone 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51 .

FIG. 57 will be described.
A refrigerator 403 and a cooking device 1 are installed in the kitchen 601. The refrigerator 403 and the cooking device 1 can exchange information with the wireless router 340 by wireless communication.

The wireless router 340 is also an access point for a network NW such as the Internet. The wireless router 340 can access the first server 321 in the external space.
The cloud server 300 described in Embodiment 1 includes, in this Embodiment 6, a first server 321, a second server 322, a recipe data providing server 301, and a food ingredient information server 326, which will be described later. .

Cooking device 1 can acquire at least recipe data CD through wireless communication 400 with communication terminal (smartphone) 200 . The recipe data CD includes not only the cooking control data for executing the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3, but also the cooking control data of the composite cooking mode KM2.

The communication terminal device 200 can directly communicate with the wireless router 340 for the cooking device 1 in this second embodiment. This communication terminal device 200 has the same basic configuration as the communication terminal device 200 described in the first embodiment.

The communication terminal device 200 has notification data 223 and remote control data 224, as will be described with reference to FIG. The notification data 223 and the remote control data 224 may be obtained by connecting to the first server 321, which is information providing means, via the network NW and downloading from the first server 321. FIG.

The heating cooker database 217 stores food component/nutrition component data 226. This food component/nutrition component data 226 is sent from a food component information server 326 that provides various food component information to a second It is acquired via the server 322 . Code DD is food component information including both food components and nutritional component data.

The food ingredient information server 326 may use, for example, the data of "Japanese Food Standard Composition Tables 2020 Edition (8th Edition)" publicly available by the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology.

The communication terminal device 200 can transmit the recipe data CD and the remote control information RS such as commanding the cooking operation to the cooking device 1 .

The communication terminal device 200 has a voice input section 222 (see FIG. 59) that converts voice from the user US into a predetermined voice input signal VS.
Therefore, when the user US speaks to the communication terminal device 200 , a voice input signal (voice data) VS can be transmitted to the second server 322 . In other words, necessary input operations can be performed without touching the touch operation unit 215 (see FIG. 59).

When the heating cooker 1 is activated, the user US gives speech information to the communication terminal device 200 by voice, for example, extracts the desired recipe data CD from the recipe data providing server 301, and can be provided to

For example, as the utterance information, since the party that receives the voice input signal VS is the second server 322, for example, "000 (a name that identifies the second server 322, an example of a nickname), a recipe for cooperative cooking Look for ".
The utterance information “000, look for a recipe” is one of the external command information that can be applied to the heating cooker 1 .

In addition, the utterance information “000, look for a recipe for cooperative cooking” is information specifying the cooking mode for the heating cooker 1 .

Furthermore, the utterance information "000, look for recipes that can be made with a microwave and IH" is utterance information for extracting possible cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

These utterance information are utterance information that can be converted into pre-prepared standard commands in the second server 322 .

The utterance information sent from the user US to the communication terminal device 200 is converted into text data in the communication terminal device 200 and transmitted to the second server 322 in the text data (voice input signal VS) format of the utterance information. .

The control unit 322C of the second server 322 receives the text data (voice input signal VS) via the input/output unit 322A and determines whether it can be converted into the standard command stored in the storage unit 322R.

The control unit 322C converts text data of speech information (voice input signal VS) into various commands prepared as standard commands (also referred to as "command data"). The “command” here includes a command for extracting recipe data for executing one cooking from the recipe database stored in the recipe data providing server 301 . The input/output unit 322A is, for example, an API gateway.

The first server 321 and the second server 322 are connected by a network NW such as the Internet.
An inquiry signal (inquiry data) SN is transmitted from the input/output unit 322 A of the second server 322 to the first server 321 . This inquiry signal SN is a command requesting extraction of the recipe data CD from the recipe data providing server 301, for example. Also, it is a command signal generated by an input operation of the communication terminal device 200 when it is desired to know various data on the operating state of the heating cooker 1 (for example, the contents of the cooking process and the degree of progress). In other words, these data are the operation support data GS for the user US.

In addition, since the second server 322 does not require special control or processing peculiar to the heating cooker 1, existing servers such as servers of various systems such as AI assistant, intelligent assistant, and smart speaker can be used. can.

The first server 321 shown in FIG. 57 is operated by the company (manufacturer) that manufactured the heating cooker 1, and has special controls and processes specific to the heating cooker 1 (hereinafter collectively referred to as (hereinafter referred to as "cooker control information"), it is possible to accurately grasp the operating state of the heating cooker 1 (including both during heating and non-heating operations). The storage unit 321R stores data corresponding to the "cooker control information". Therefore, if the first server 321 acquires the operating state data OS, which will be described later, the operating state of the heating cooker 1 can be accurately analyzed in real time on the first server 321 side.

The first server 321 receives various "operating state data" OS from the heating cooker 1 as will be described later.
is obtained at any time via the wireless router 340.

The operating state data OS includes data indicating ON/OFF of the main power switch 20, selection data of the linked cooking mode KM3, data of control conditions such as heating temperature and heating time, and further, top plate 3 and heating chamber 6. The latest temperature measurement data etc. are included.

The recipe data providing server 301 can exchange information with the first server 321 by wireless communication. A "system control server", which is a control means for mutually linking the recipe data providing server 301, the first server 321, the recipe data providing server 301, etc., is not shown.

The recipe data providing server 301 may be integrated into the first server 321 . The food ingredient information server 326 is connected to the first server 321 via a wired or wireless communication network NW.

In the first server 321, each heating cooker 1 is registered in advance, and the operating state data OS transmitted from each heating cooker 1 is obtained in association with the user US of the heating cooker 1. It is configured to

The first server 321 has an input/output unit 321A for wireless communication with the wireless router 340 and the second server 322 individually. This input/output unit 321A is, for example, an API gateway. This input/output unit 321 receives recipe data from the recipe data providing server 301 .

The first server 321 has a control section 321C. The control unit 321C decodes the inquiry signal (command) SN from the second server 321, generates necessary control information in response to the inquiry signal SN, and transmits it to the second server 322. FIG.
In addition, the operation state data OS transmitted from a large number of heating cookers 1 and the user USID (specific information) that identifies the user US of each heating cooker 1 are analyzed, and the heating cooking of each user US is performed. The device 1 is identified from the information in the user US identification database held in the storage unit 321R.

The first server 321 has a pre-registered database relating to the control of each heating cooker 1 in the storage unit 321R. Therefore, if the data requested to be provided by the heating cooker 1 is not suitable for the heating cooker 1, it is not transmitted.

Similarly, even when there is an inquiry signal SN from the communication terminal 200, the first server 321 sends specific operation support data GS to the communication terminal 200 together with data such as the model identification number. Send via a second server. For this reason, for example, when there is an input from the communication terminal device 200 of a control condition that does not match a specific recipe data CD, the first server 321 either does not accept such an input, or The communication terminal device 200 is notified with the reason for rejection. Therefore, in the case of the voice input mode, if the control condition input (spoken) by the user via the communication terminal device 200 exceeds the allowable range of the heating cooker 1, the communication terminal device 200 It is configured to notify you and prompt you to enter another control condition.

Further, the first server 321 also has a function of controlling the timing of providing the second server 322 with the recipe data CD of the specific cooking menu acquired from the recipe data providing server 301 . More on this later.

In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the central operation unit 15M of the input operation unit 15 is provided with input keys 180 for selecting voice input. The input key 180 may be a mechanical switch, or may be an input key of a touch type input switch like the input keys 153M to 159M.

Next, FIG. 58 will be described.
FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the heating cooker 1, and corresponds to FIG. 16 of the first embodiment.
As is clear from FIG. 58, the control device 40 of the second embodiment does not have a configuration corresponding to the audio signal analysis section 58 shown in FIG. 16 of the first embodiment. That is, the control device 40 does not have a function of receiving an audio signal from the outside and analyzing it.

Further, the control device 40 of the second embodiment does not have a configuration corresponding to the audio signal receiving section 56 shown in FIG. 16 of the first embodiment. In other words, the input operation unit 15 of the second embodiment does not have a function of receiving audio signals from the outside. Since other configurations are the same as those shown in FIG. 16 of the first embodiment, redundant description will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 59 will be described. FIG. 59 is a block configuration diagram for explaining the relationship between the control device 40 and the central operation unit 15M. This FIG. 59 corresponds to FIG. 17 of the first embodiment. The configuration of the right operating section 15R and the left operating section 15L is basically the same as that of the central operating section 15M.

As is clear from FIG. 59, the control device 40 has an input signal analysis section 52 . The input signal analysis section 52 has an input mode determination section 52C.
The input mode determination unit 52C receives the measured time data MJ from the input operation unit 15 (15M, 15L, 15R), and if it is 5 seconds or longer with a predetermined threshold value (for example, 5 seconds) as a boundary, "Voice input mode 1”. If it is less than this threshold, it is determined that the operation is a normal "short press".

The "measured time data MJ" input from the input operation unit 15 to the control device 40 corresponds to a voice input mode corresponding signal.

On the other hand, each of the input operation units 15L, 15M, and 15L including the central operation unit 15M has a time measurement unit 15T. The measured time data MJ measured by the time measuring section 15T is transmitted to the input signal analyzing section 52 of the control device 40 as it is.
In other words, the time measurement unit 15T measures the “touch time” from when the user US touches with the finger to when it is released, and transmits the measured time data MJ to the input signal analysis unit 52 .

The input mode determination unit 52C analyzes the measured time data MJ (voice input mode corresponding signal), and when it determines that the setting condition of "voice input mode 1" is satisfied, outputs the input mode switching signal MC2 to Output to the input control unit 70 . For example, when the measured time data MJ is time data longer than a threshold value (for example, 5 seconds), the input mode switching signal MC2 is output as the setting condition of voice input mode 1 is satisfied.

15D is a storage unit. The storage unit 15D stores various control parameters for the touch detection unit 15A and the time measurement unit 15T as described above, program information for determination processing, and the like.

A central processing unit (CPU) 15E performs various information processing operations as an input operation unit (central operation unit 15M).
15F is an input signal transmitter. The input signal transmission unit 15F transmits the identification signal unique to the input key as described above, the measurement time data MJ of the “touch time”, and the like to the input signal analysis unit 52 of the control device 40 .

In FIG. 59, the touch detection section 15A, the time measurement section 15T, the storage section 15D, and the like are drawn as independent individual blocks. Software may be used to implement each of these functions.

In FIG. 59, the input mode determination section 52C is drawn as a part of the input signal analysis section 52, but it may be configured separately on hardware. Further, for example, the functions of the input mode determination section 52C, the input signal analysis section 52, and the like may be realized by software of a single microcomputer.

In FIG. 59, the example of the central operating section 15M is explained, but the control device 40 also identifies that the input is from the respective operating sections of the right operating section 15R and the left operating section 15L. Therefore, in the input key identifying section 15A in the right operating section 15R, data identifying the input key existing in the right operating section 15R is included in the signal from the input key and transmitted to the control device 40. FIG. This also applies to the left operating section 15L.

Upon receiving the input mode switching signal MC2, the input processing unit 70 enters an input standby state in preparation for any input regarding the recipe data CD from the first server 321. FIG.

In FIG. 59, the touch detection unit 15A, the time measurement unit 15T, and the like are drawn as individual independent blocks. Each of these functions may be realized.

In FIG. 59, the example of the central operating section 15M is explained, but the control device 40 also identifies that the input is from the respective operating sections of the right operating section 15R and the left operating section 15L. Therefore, in the input key identifying section 15A in the right operating section 15R, the signal from the input key includes data identifying the input key existing in the right operating section 15R. This also applies to the left operating section 15L.

Communication terminal device 200 shown in FIG. 60 will be described.
A communication terminal device 200 such as a smartphone includes a transmission unit and reception unit 210, a communication control unit 211, a central processing unit (CPU) 212, a ROM and RAM 213, a speaker 214, a touch-type operation unit 215, and a display. It has a terminal-side display unit 216 having a screen, a heating cooker database (storage unit) 217 , an attitude detection unit 218 , a remote operation information generation unit 219 , and a storage unit 220 . The transmitter/receiver 210 has an NFC input/output unit 221 for short-range wireless communication. Therefore, two routes of wireless communication via the Internet and near field communication (NFC) can be used.

A voice input unit 222 converts the voice of the user US or the like into an input signal.
The touch-type operation unit 215 , the terminal-side display unit 216 and the voice input unit 222 are integrated in hardware to form a display operation unit 225 . Note that a search unit that analyzes the voice signal from the voice input unit 222 and performs term search, information search, etc. is not shown. The search unit may be provided inside the communication terminal device 200, or may be provided in the external cloud server 300 and the search function may be provided outside the communication terminal device 200. FIG.

The orientation detection unit 218 is equipped with various sensors such as a gyro sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a gravity sensor, and can detect the inclination and orientation of the communication terminal device 200 . As a result, a signal obtained by detecting the vertical direction of the communication terminal 200 is output to the central processing unit 212 .

The central processing unit 212 receives a detection signal from the attitude detection unit 218 and controls the display direction of the terminal-side display unit 216 .
The central processing unit 212 inputs the signal received from the communication unit 51 of the heating cooker 1 to the remote operation information generation unit 219 .

The central processing unit 212 has a recipe data acquisition section 230, a recipe data transmission section 231, a terminal side recipe selection section 232, and a food component data acquisition section 233, respectively. Note that the recipe data acquisition unit 230, the recipe data transmission unit 231, the terminal side recipe selection unit 232, and the food component data acquisition unit 233 may all be functionally implemented by one computer program, or may be implemented separately. may be configured by a control circuit of

The heating cooker database 217 stores the "notification data" 223 of the heating cooker 1 in order to generate notification information (including image information) for the central display unit 16M and the voice notification unit 50 of the heating cooker 1. I have.
Further, the heating cooker database 217 also holds “remote operation data” 224 for the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1 .

Further, the heating cooker database 217 stores food component/nutrient component data 226 relating to the recipe data CD. In this embodiment, information on food components (energy, lipid, protein, etc.) and nutritional components (potassium, calcium, etc.) is collectively referred to as "food component information" DD.

The notification data 223, the remote control data 224, and the food ingredient/nutritional ingredient data 226 may be stored in the communication terminal 200 from the beginning. (201, 202), download from the cloud server 300, and obtain the food component information DD. In other words, the heating cooker database 217 does not have to be fixedly stored and constructed, and information may be acquired as necessary and temporarily stored in a volatile memory.

The heating cooker database 217 acquires from the cloud server 300 recipe data CDs of cooking menus (for example, "ratatouille") that can be used in various types of cooking performed in the heating cooker 1, particularly in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Alternatively, it may be acquired from another communication terminal device 200 via the NFC input/output unit 221 .

The remote operation information generation unit 224 processes the signal obtained from the heating cooker 1 via the central processing unit 212 and the input signal from the display operation unit 225, respectively, and performs remote operation for the heating cooker 1. Generate information.

The "remote operation information" here refers to information on input operations corresponding to all cooking modes including the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 of the heating cooker 1, the linked cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, etc. , display information on the central display portion 16M in , and display information on the right display portion 16R and the left display portion 16L. However, information serving as a command to start the heating operation is not included in any of the cooking modes including the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, the heating cooker 1 does not start the heating operation by this remote control information.

The "remote operation information" may not include the display information on the central display section 16M and the display information on the right display section 16R and the left display section 16L. Further, command information for functions that can be set with the function setting key 151KP cannot be transmitted from the communication terminal 200, and cannot be generated by the communication terminal 200. FIG. In other words, the function setting mode of the heating cooker 1 cannot be activated from the communication terminal device 200 .

The central processing unit 212 executes the processing of the entire communication terminal 200 according to the control program stored in the ROM/RAM. Data generated in the process of executing processing is stored in the ROM/RAM.

The storage unit 220 is a semiconductor non-volatile memory, and can store the information of the heating cooker 1 read from the transmission unit and the reception unit 210 . For example, it is used to temporarily store the recipe data CD for a specific cooking menu downloaded (read) from the cloud server 300 .

Information on the cooker 1 is acquired from the first server 321 directly connected to the cooker 1, but may be acquired via the second server 322 connected to the first server 321 via the network NW. The first server 321 and the second server 322 are part of the cloud server 300 (see FIG. 57).

When the user US touches a specific portion of the terminal-side display section 216 of the communication terminal device 200, the remote control information generating section 219 generates remote control information based on this touch signal.
The remote control information is transmitted from the transmitter/receiver 210 to the cooker 1 .

If the heating cooker 1 has already been supplied with electric power and started, the controller 40 of the heating cooker 1 treats the received remote control information as the input operation information of the cooking mode. For example, when a remote control signal related to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is received, the standby initial screen 16MH of the central display unit 16M is changed to a selection screen (first cooking menu (for example, hamburger)) in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. The screen transitions to the specific screen 16M1). However, the heating cooker 1 does not unconditionally operate according to the remote control information of the communication terminal device 200 . This will be explained in FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG.

On the other hand, on the side of the communication terminal 200 that has transmitted the remote control information, the display on the terminal side display section 216 changes based on the remote control information. In other words, the contents of the display screen of the terminal side display section 216 in the display operation section 225 of the communication terminal device 200 and the contents of the display of the central display section 16M of the heating cooker 1 change in a similar operation procedure, but the change The status is not transmitted to the heating cooker 1 in real time one by one.

Even if remote control information is generated in communication terminal 200, it is recognized as a regular remote control signal in heating cooker 1 after the confirmation signal of the cooking mode is transmitted. In other words, the remote control information from the communication terminal 200 is collectively transmitted when a predetermined confirmation key is pressed on the communication terminal 200 in order to confirm the cooking mode.

Therefore, the recipe data CD of the cooking menu (for example, hamburger) in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes data specifying the heating means from the cooking process 1 to the final cooking process, and default setting control conditions (for example, the heating power level, information such as heating power value, heating time, etc., but not limited to this) is transmitted all at once. That is, the first specific screen 16M1 also includes detailed control condition data that the user US can arbitrarily set. Incidentally, as described above, in the first embodiment, the recipe data is the simplified recipe data CD. The simple recipe data CD does not include information unique to heating means (including information indicating attributes of heating means, information on heating ports, etc.), information on cooking processes, information indicating the order of heating means to be driven, etc. Commands, data, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "commands" or "command data") that determine control conditions such as heating capacity and heating time.
In other words, the "simplified recipe data" CD is mainly composed of the control condition setting data (command data).

The food component data acquisition unit 233 shown in FIG. 60 has data on various food components (eg, energy content, protein, etc.) and nutritional components (eg, vitamins A, C, iron, minerals, etc.). . Various data are collectively referred to as "food component data" in the second embodiment.

The "food ingredient data" of the food ingredient data acquisition unit 233 does not have to be stored from the time the communication terminal device 200 is manufactured. For example, in Japan, the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology publishes data to the general public (on the Internet, etc.), which includes the "Standard Tables of Food Composition in Japan 2020 Edition (8th Edition)." Therefore, the communication terminal device 200 may acquire data of a specific food from this data, and the data may be stored in the food component data acquisition unit 233 for each food.

When the food component data acquisition unit 233 acquires the recipe data CD of a cooking menu (for example, hamburger) from the cloud server 300, data such as nutritional components of the food cannot be obtained from the cloud server 300. In this case, the communication terminal device 200 can supplement data such as nutritional components and provide them to the heating cooker 1 . This will be explained in detail later.

Next, FIG. 61 will be described. FIG. 61 is an operation explanatory diagram (list) for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode.
In the table of FIG. 61, operation procedures, related input keys, display screens, and characteristic items related to operations are described in three vertical columns.

First, when the operation button (key) 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed, the main power is supplied to the control device 40. If the control device 40 self-diagnoses and no abnormality is detected, the central display section 16M is entered. The operation unit 15 is activated. The thermal power display section 17 (left thermal power display section 17L, central heating status display section 17M, right thermal power display section 17R) is also activated.

A standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display portion 16M.
A two-dimensional code 60B is displayed on the standby initial screen 16MH. When the two-dimensional code 60B is optically read by the communication terminal device 200, it is possible to connect to the recipe information providing server 301 which holds information on various cooking recipes, that is, various recipe data CDs. Therefore, the communication terminal device 200 can acquire the desired cooking recipe data CD.

In this Embodiment 2, the communication terminal device 20 can directly wirelessly communicate with the heating cooker 1 . Moreover, the heating cooker 1 and the communication terminal device 200 are configured so that they can be automatically connected when they are within a communicable range of each other.

A communication method between the communication terminal device 200 and the heating cooker 1 uses Bluetooth (registered trademark), which is one of short-distance wireless communication standards. A wireless router 340 is installed between the communication terminal device 200 and the cloud server 300 . A wireless LAN communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark) is used between the wireless router 340 and the communication terminal device 200 .

First, since mutual authentication is performed between the communication terminal device 200 and the heating cooker 1, when the heating cooker 1 is started, a signal for automatic connection ("scan signal") is sent from the heating cooker 1. ) is transmitted, mutual communication for automatic connection is performed between the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal device 200 . Note that the scan signal may be transmitted from the communication terminal device 200 side.

When the connection between the heating cooker 1 and the communication terminal device 200 is established, the state in which direct wireless communication is possible between the heating cooker 1 and the communication terminal device 200 continues. When the communication terminal device 200 moves with the movement of the user US and becomes distant from the heating cooker 1, communication may be temporarily disabled. The connection status is automatically restored.

During the period from when the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed until the input key 153M (to select the cooperative cooking mode KM3) is pressed, the acquisition of the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 is basically prohibited.

Further, during the period from when the main power switch 20 is turned on until the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed, the recipe data CD cannot be obtained from the communication terminal 200 at all.

In FIG. 62, which will be described later, the restriction on reception of the recipe data CD is not canceled from the time when the input key 180M is pressed, but when the input key 180M and then the input key 153M (or 154M or 155M) are pressed. An example of releasing the reception restriction from the point in time is illustrated.

Next, FIG. 62 will be described.
FIG. 62 shows an example in which the configuration of the display screen in FIG. 61 is slightly changed.
FIG. 61 shows an example in which characters such as "Receipt of recipe from outside" is displayed on the standby initial screen 16MH when the recipe data CD is received from the outside.

On the other hand, FIG. 62 shows an example of switching to the dedicated receiving operation display screen 16MM while the recipe data CD is being received from the outside. The reception operation display screen 16MM will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, FIG. 63 will be described.
FIG. 63 is a plan view showing the standby initial screen 16MH, showing the state immediately after the main power switch 20 is turned on.

A case will be described where, for example, the cooking menu database (cooker database 217) held by communication terminal device 200 does not include the cooking "ratatouille" desired by user US. ``Ratatouille'' is a dish that originated in southern France, and is made by slicing several kinds of vegetables such as zucchini, onions, and green peppers, stir-frying them with tomatoes and herbs in olive oil.

Acquisition of the recipe data CD of "ratatouille" by the communication terminal device 200 will be described.
By using the voice input unit 222 or the touch-type operation unit 215, the terminal-side recipe selection unit 232 specifies "Ratatouille", accesses the cloud server 300, and downloads the recipe data CD of "Ratatouille" to the recipe data acquisition unit. 230.

The acquired recipe data CD of “ratatouille” is temporarily stored in the storage unit 220 . The display unit 216 on the terminal side displays that the recipe data CD of "Ratatouille" has been successfully downloaded, and prompts the user US to perform an operation to determine whether or not to transmit the data.

Therefore, when the user US operates the display operation unit 225 (or inputs voice using the voice input unit 222) to instruct the recipe data transmission unit 231 to transmit, the central processing unit 212 outputs the recipe of “ratatouille”. The data CD is sent to the heating cooker 1. In addition, together with the transmission of the recipe data CD, the "notification data" 223 of the heating cooker 1 and the "remote operation data" 224 for the controller 40 of the heating cooker 1 are also transmitted.

As shown in FIG. 61, after the input key 153M is pressed, the controller 40 permits the cooker 1 to receive the recipe data CD of each cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. However, as shown in FIG. 61, the display is not immediately switched to the first specific screen 16M1. Therefore, the receiving operation of the recipe data CD continues while the state of the standby initial screen 16MH is changed to the receiving operation display screen 16MM.

The modified example of FIG. 62 shows another example of displaying that the recipe data CD of "ratatouille" is received from the communication terminal device 200 . As shown in FIG. 62, the standby initial screen 16MH is switched to a receiving operation display screen 16MM indicating that the recipe is being received from the outside. The reception operation display screen 16MM will be described later with reference to FIG.

The restriction unit 55 of the cooker 1 can execute the operation of receiving the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 from the time when the input key 153M is pressed.
If there is the received recipe data CD, it is temporarily stored in a predetermined storage area (or a dedicated buffer memory) of the recipe data storage unit 42 as a recipe. The notification data 223 and the remote control data 224 are also permitted to be received, and are linked with the recipe data CD of "Ratatouille" (processed so as to be identifiable in a one-to-one relationship) and stored in the storage unit 42. Temporarily saved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64, when the input key 153M is pressed, the information (identification information 167) of each cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the display section 16M. At the stage of FIG. 64, it is not the standby initial screen 16MH but the first specific screen 16M1.

As shown in FIG. 64, the light emitting portions 21M corresponding to the input keys 154 to 157 emit light as indicated by star marks. In other words, the cooking menu and control conditions can be changed by the user US using these input keys 154-157.

In FIG. 64, when the cooker 1 finishes cooking, CN automatically transmits "cooking execution data" to cloud server 300 (first server 321) via network NW (205) immediately after that. ”.

Here, the “cooking execution data” is useful information that is used for analyzing the results of heat cooking, long-term history, changes, and the like on the cloud server 300 side.

In FIG. 64, the cooking execution data CN is depicted as being transmitted only to the cloud server 300, but it may be set in advance on the heating cooker 1 side so as to be transmitted to the communication terminal device 200. .

As described above, the communication terminal device 200 is connected to the cloud server 300 via the network NW (201). The recipe data CD can be acquired via this network 201 . In addition, if necessary, information on the standard ingredients of the food (ingredients) targeted by the recipe data CD and information on nutritional ingredients are also acquired from the cloud server 300 via this network NW.

Next, FIG. 65 will be described.
FIG. 65 shows an example of a specific display screen for displaying that the recipe data for “ratatouille” is being received from the communication terminal device 200 . As shown in FIGS. 65A and 65B, the standby initial screen 16MH is switched to a receiving operation display screen 16MM indicating that the recipe is being received from the outside.

FIG. 65A is a schematic diagram showing an enlarged view of the reception operation display screen 16MM.
In FIGS. 65A and 65B, 16F is a plurality of progress marks appearing in the receiving operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the receiving operation.

In FIG. 65(B), reference numeral 174 denotes a reception operation display section, which displays in characters that the recipe data CD is being received from the outside.

There are two types of progress marks 16F: a black square mark and a white square mark.
As shown in FIG. 65(A), immediately after the operation of receiving the cooking control data is started, there is one black square mark. Five are lined up. As the number of black square marks increases, the same number of white square marks disappear.

The progress mark 16F may display the degree of progress by changing the size and color of one figure, or may be expressed by animation.

Furthermore, instead of the receiving operation display screen 16MM, a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) are provided like the left thermal power display section 17L of Embodiment 1, and the degree of progress of the receiving operation is displayed in multiple stages by the light emission. Anything is fine. For example, at the beginning of the receiving operation, the number of LEDs lit is set to one, and the number of lit LEDs is increased as the receiving operation progresses. Alternatively, the progress is expressed by blinking the LED or switching the lighting color. In this way, the user US may be notified of the completion of the receiving operation in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the operation of the limiter 55 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 65B, while the recipe data CD is being received via the communication unit 51, the input operation unit 15 cannot stop the receiving operation on the heating cooker 1 side.
For example, even if the input keys 152M and 153M are pressed, the operation of the data acquisition unit 53 cannot be interrupted.

Next, FIG. 66 will be described.
The recipe data CD stored in the recipe data storage unit 42 of the cooking device 1 is displayed in the first specific screen 16M1 as shown in FIG.

Reference numeral 173 denotes an external recipe identifier as described in the first embodiment. This makes it easy to understand that the linked cooking menu currently displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 is obtained from the outside.

A specific (one) linked cooking menu (in this case, "ratatouille") displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 as shown in FIG. 66 can start the heating operation by touching the input key 151M.

Further, by operating the input key 156M or 157M, it is possible to select either heating by the right heating section (right heating port 4R) or heating by the left heating section.

Furthermore, by operating the input key 152M, the cooking by the specific linked cooking menu (in this case, "ratatouille") obtained from the outside can be canceled. When the cancellation operation is once performed in this manner, the screen returns to the standby initial screen 16MH, and in that state, it is necessary to touch the input key 153M again.

In this way, once the recipe data CD corresponding to one cooking menu acquired previously is canceled, then the recipe data CD corresponding to another cooking menu can be acquired again. can also be obtained).

Furthermore, for a specific linked cooking menu (in this case, recipe data for "ratatouille") obtained from the outside, if the cooking process of the linked cooking menu is not completed (the user US is forced to (including when it is canceled), it cannot be changed to another linked cooking menu (for example, "hamburger"). To change it, it is necessary to operate the input key 152M to return to the standby initial screen 16MH.

In FIG. 66, the light-emitting portions 21M of the input keys 156M and 157M are lit, but either the heating portion specifying portion 171L on the left side or the heating portion specifying portion 171R on the right side is selected with the input keys 156M and 157M. After that, the user US can manually set the control conditions such as thermal power using the input keys 156M and 157M.

179D is the voice input mode display information shown in FIG. 57 of the first embodiment.
This voice input mode display information 179D is not displayed when the input key 154M is "long pressed" in the state of FIG. In other words, it is not displayed from the moment it switches to the voice input mode. This point is different from the first embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the speech input mode display information 179D is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 after step SG6 when the acquisition of the recipe data CD is successful.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73, the mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode 1 is displayed by the light emitting element 27B (see FIG. 16) only before switching to the voice input mode. However, after switching to the voice input mode, it is not displayed by light emission (note that the mark 154V is shown in FIG. 75 for reference).

In this second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the heating cooker 1 itself does not have an audio signal receiving unit (speaker, audio signal receiving circuit, etc.), so the communication terminal 200 ( It is necessary to do it via a smartphone, audio input/output device, etc.).

Next, FIG. 67 will be described.
FIG. 67(A) shows that in the case of performing cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 based on the recipe data acquired from the outside, the output level of microwave heating can be adjusted when proceeding to the stage of the cooking process 2. there is

As shown in the next FIG. 67(B), the second area 23 displays the output level of the microwave heating in five stages from "strong" to "weak". Such a microwave output level can be selected by the user US by operating input keys 156M and 157M.
Therefore, in the final step (cooking step 2), the user US can adjust the heating intensity of the microwave according to the finished state of the food to be cooked.

In FIG. 67(A), in the second area 23, thermal power information 170V indicating the microwave output level is displayed. The heating power at this point is the default heating power set in the recipe data CD, and is indicated as "slightly weak". Furthermore, the ability of the user US to adjust this thermal power level is also shown as operation support information 170 in the third area 24 integrated with the second area 23 .

As shown in FIG. 67(A), the voice input mode display information 179D shown in FIG. 54 of Embodiment 1 is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1. However, this display information 179D is not displayed immediately after the input key 154M is "long-pressed" in the state of FIG. This point is different from the first embodiment. The timing at which the display information 179D is displayed starts when the acquisition of the recipe data CD is successful. That is, it is from the stage when the display is switched to the first specific screen 16M1.

Furthermore, the mark 154V indicating the state of switching to voice input mode 1 is not displayed at the stage of FIG. 67(A).
In this FIG. 67(A), voice input can be performed. However, unlike the first embodiment, since the heating cooker 1 itself does not have an audio signal receiving unit (speaker, audio signal receiving circuit, etc.), it is necessary to use the communication terminal 200 to input audio. be.

The mark 154V indicating the state of switching to the voice input mode 1 is automatically displayed even when the input key 154M is not "long-pressed". That is, it is displayed at the timing when the heating power information 170 V indicating the microwave output level is displayed. Therefore, at this time, the control device 40 is switched to the voice input mode 1 in which voice input is possible via the communication terminal device 200, but at the same time it is in the combined mode in which touch input by the input keys 156M and 157M is also accepted. . These points are greatly different from the first embodiment.

Next, FIG. 68 will be described.
FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking process of the linked cooking menu and the operation of the input operation section in chronological order.
In the example of FIG. 68, the cooperative cooking menu is composed of three cooking processes 1, 2 and 3.

The recipe data CD defines various control processes in a predetermined computer program format, and may also define control conditions such as thermal power. In the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 of FIG. 68, the cooking process 1 is started after input from the input key 151M, and the heating operation is stopped when there is input from the input key 153R (153L).

In the computer program included in the recipe data, a heating pause period P3 and a heating pause period P5, which will be described later, are defined, but the lengths of the heating pause periods P3 and P5 are not defined. However, in order to prevent the heat cooking from being interrupted for an excessively long time, for example, the elapsed time is counted based on the end point of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2. When, for example, 30 minutes have passed, A warning may be issued and processing such as forcibly stopping the execution of the cooking menu may be included.

In the example of the recipe data CD shown in FIG. A cooking process 3 is provided for moving the pan upwards and performing induction heating for finishing by compensating for insufficient heating.

In addition, in this heating cooker 1, a measure is added to prevent the setting of the cooking mode, the control conditions, etc., from being carried out inadvertently in response to a command signal from the outside.

In the "second cooperative cooking menu" in the example of FIG. 68, the second heating means HM2 is operated first, and after the heating operation is completed, the first heating means HM1 is operated. Simultaneously with HM2, the radiant heat heating means 12 may be operated as the third heating means.

As shown in FIG. 68, the "second cooperative cooking menu" shown here consists of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 153M is operated to execute the cooperative cooking menu until the heat cooking operation is started by the input key 151M.

When the input key 153M is operated and the "permission condition" as described above is satisfied, the control device 40 displays the first specific screen 16M1. Note that FIG. 68 does not show the first specific screen 16M1.

When the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, one of the cooperative cooking menus can be selected by operating the input keys 154M and 155M. After that, if the input key 151M is operated, the mode shifts to the linked cooking mode, and the heat cooking process of P2 is performed.

When the identification information 167 of the cooperative cooking menu desired by the user US is displayed at a predetermined position of the first specific screen 16M1 (default display) when the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the input key 154M, No manipulation of 155M is required.

P2 is a heat cooking period (cooking step 1) by the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source).
This cooking process 1 is started when the control device 40 confirms that the door 7 is opened once during the preparation period P1 and then closed. A door open/close signal from the open/close detector 10 described in the first embodiment is used.

The cooking process 1 basically ends automatically when the heating time predetermined by the operation program of the linked cooking menu elapses or when the temperature of the food to be cooked rises to a set value (e.g., 90°C). . For example, in a certain cooperative cooking menu, heating is started with a microwave output of 500W. Further, if the user US opens the door 7 at an arbitrary timing, the irradiation of microwaves is stopped instantaneously, and the heating operation is stopped.

At the stage when the cooking process 1 is started, the control device 40 has already determined the permission conditions, so the heating section of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating means) in use is known. In other words, the usage state of both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L is grasped.
Therefore, as a default setting, the control device 40 determines to use the "right heating section" 4R in the cooking process 3 of the cooperative cooking mode, and puts the right heating port 4R in an exclusive state.

P3 is a heating rest period during which the cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) is once stopped and the cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2 is restarted.

This pause period P3 is a period required for checking the degree of heating of the food to be cooked in the cooking process 1, adding seasonings, or adding another food to be cooked in the cooking process 2. For example, in the cooking process 1, only the frozen food is heated as the food to be cooked, and in the cooking process 2, seasoning is added, or another food to be heated (non-frozen food, etc.) whose temperature rises faster than the frozen food is added. can be Therefore, the range of cooking is widened.
The heating pause step P3 ends when the input key 152M is pressed, and the process proceeds to the cooking step 2 of P4.

P4 is a heat cooking period (cooking step 2) by the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means). In this cooking process, the user US can individually set control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating at least one of the four input keys 156M to 159M.
Then, when the input key 151M is pressed to command the stop of cooking, the cooking process 2 ends, and the process advances to the heating pause period of P5.

During this heating pause period P5, the user US opens the door 7, takes out the food to be cooked from the inside of the heating chamber 6, and places it on the top plate 3. The object to be cooked is put in an object to be heated N such as a metal pot and placed on the top plate 3 .
Then, when the input key 153R of the right heating port 4R is pressed to command the start of cooking, the heating pause step P5 ends and the cooking period P6 (induction heating "cooking step 3") is started.

This heating pause period P5 is a period necessary for checking the degree of heating of the food to be cooked in the cooking process 2, adding seasonings, or adding another food to be cooked to perform the cooking process 3. . For example, in the cooking process 2, only the frozen food is heated as the food to be cooked, and in the cooking process 3, the food to be heated is immersed in seasoning or cooking liquid, or cooked by preheating separately, and the same food is heated. You can add it to things. Therefore, the range of cooking is widened.

P6 switches from the cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source) to the cooking process 3 by the first heating means HM1 (in this case, the induction heating means, for example, the right heating port 4R).
In this cooking process 3, if the right heating port 4R is used for cooking as described above, the user US can set control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 154R and 155R. Can be set individually.

In addition, if the cooking process 3 is performed by the left heating port 4L, the user US can individually set control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 154L and 155L. can be set to

Then, when the input key 153R is pressed to command the stop of cooking, the cooking process 3 ends and the operation of the linked cooking mode ends. In the case of timer cooking, the induction heating cooking is automatically terminated when the time elapses, and the cooking step 3 is terminated.

As is clear from FIG. 68, it is not at the stage of selecting the linked cooking menu, that is, at the time when the identification information 167 indicating the name of the cooking of the linked cooking menu is displayed on the central display unit 16M, but the input key 151M is used for cooking. From the time when the start is decided, the right operation part 15R of the right heating port 4R cannot be used. Note that if the left heating port 4L is set by default, the left heating port 4L will be in an exclusive state.

As is clear from the above description, the control device 40 performs the following function restriction processing.
(1) An input signal from the right operation unit 15R is invalidated. As a result, during the cooking period (cooking process 1) to the cooking period (cooking process 3), the right heating port 4R cannot be used except in the cooperative cooking mode.
(2) The left operation unit 15L can be used even during the heat cooking period (cooking step 1) (the input signal from the left operation unit 15L is not invalidated).

Thus, when the cooking period (cooking process 1) is entered, the control device 40 is in a state where only the right heating port 4R of the cooking process 3 is occupied from the cooking process 1 stage.

Therefore, the right heating port 4R is "occupied" by the selection of the cooperative cooking menu. Also, from the perspective of the entirety of the first heating means HM1, the use of only a portion (right side) of the three heating portions is "restricted".

Even when the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) ends, the restricted state of the right heating port 4R is not released.
At the stage of the cooking process 1, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, and the user US can easily understand that the cooperative cooking mode is entered. Execution of other cooking menus is not restricted to means HM2. This is the same for the heating pause period P3 to the cooking step 2 as well.

Note that even if the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state before starting the heat cooking period (cooking step 1), the temperature in the heating chamber 6 is used as the reference. If it is higher than the value, there is a concern that the control device 40, the non-contact (infrared) sensor 13, and the thermistor sensor 14 may erroneously recognize the abnormally high temperature as the completion of cooking even before cooking is started in the heating chamber 6. There is
Therefore, before the start of the cooking period (cooking step 1) and before the start of the cooking step 2, if the temperature of the heating chamber 6 is too high, the first specific screen 15M1 will display "Due to high temperature immediately, the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) cannot be used" is displayed.

The periods indicated by thick arrows in FIG. 68 are the limited reception period for one recipe data CD and the "additional limited period" for additional recipe data CDs. The reception restriction period and the "additional restriction period" are hereinafter collectively referred to as the "restriction period".

As shown in FIG. 68, the "starting time" of the "restricted period" is the point of time when the cooperative cooking menu (for example, "ratatouille") is selected with a specific input key 154M or 155M.

The "start time" of the "restricted period" may be the time when the display of the first specific screen 16M1 is started. In other words, as indicated by the large dashed arrow in FIG. 68, the "start time" may be changed to the time when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected with the input key 153M. In that case, the "restricted period" starts from the earlier point P1A in the first stage (preparation period) P1.

When the input key 151M is touched once and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the limiting operation by the limiting unit 55 is performed as follows.

That is, the restriction unit 55 built in the control device 40 operates as follows.
As shown in FIG. 68, in the "restricted period", changing a specific cooperative cooking menu A acquired from the outside to another cooperative cooking menu B (for example, "hamburger") is prohibited as a result. there is In order to change it, it is necessary to operate the input key 152M to temporarily release the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and return to the scene of the initial standby screen 16MH.

In other words, when entering the "restricted period" indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 68, by operating the input key 152M, the cooking according to the specific cooperative cooking menu A obtained from the outside can be canceled at any time. When the cancellation operation is once performed in this manner, the screen returns to the standby initial screen 16MH, and in that state, it is necessary to touch the input key 153M again.

Further, when the input key 151M is touch-operated for the specific linked cooking menu A acquired from the outside, that is, after the heating start command is given, the controller 40 transfers the recipe data CD of another linked cooking menu C. cannot be obtained.

That is, when entering the "restricted period" indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 68, by operating the input key 152M, the recipe data CD of another linked cooking menu A can be acquired after that, and cooking using the data can be started. However, the recipe data CD cannot be acquired from the outside until all the cooking steps of this cooking menu A are completed.

As is clear from the above description, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 2 has the following configuration. i.e.
a first heating means HM1 comprising a first heating section (right heating section) 4R and a second heating section (left heating section) 4L;
a second heating means HM2 capable of heating an object to be cooked in a heating chamber 6 located away from the first heating means HM1 with microwaves;
a control device 40 for controlling the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1;
a display unit 16M for displaying control information of the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1;
The control device 40 prepares the cooperative cooking menu KM3 for cooking one food item using the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1 by the number of multiple types of food items (multiple items). have
The control device 40 is configured to perform the following operations when receiving an instruction to display the linked cooking menu by the input key 153M.
(1) Regarding the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1, the relationship between "not being used before" and "permission conditions" such as "the temperature of the heating chamber 6 being low" judge. Then, it is determined whether or not the recipe data CD of the linked cooking menu (for example, "ratatouille") can be executed.

(2) When it is determined that the cooperative cooking menu can be executed, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display portion 16M.

(3) On the first specific screen 16M1, at least one of the linked cooking menus is displayed so as to be selectable. To do so, enable the input function of the corresponding input keys 154M, 155M.

(4) When one linked cooking menu is selected, the control conditions (thermal power, heating time, etc.) to be applied to the cooking menu are displayed (the first specific screen 16M1). In this state, it is displayed (or notified by the voice notification unit 50) that the voice input mode is supported. Specifically, voice input mode display information 179D indicating that voice input is accepted is displayed. Then, it waits for a command for starting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 from the input key 151M.

(5) When a command for starting the cooperative cooking mode is received, microwaves from the second heating means HM2 are supplied to the heating chamber 6, and the cooking process 1 is started.

(6) When the cooking step 1 is finished automatically or by a command from the user US, the heating pause period P3 is entered. Then, it waits for a command for resuming the linked cooking mode (for cooking process 2) from the input key 151M.

(7) When an instruction to start the cooperative cooking mode is received from the input key 151M, microwaves from the second heating means HM2 are supplied to the heating chamber 6, and the cooking process 2 is started.

Then, after the heating rest period P5, the heating cooking period P6 (cooking step 3) is entered. In this cooking process 3, by operating the input keys 154R and 155R, it is possible to set control conditions for induction heating using the right heating port 4R.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the predetermined permission conditions are satisfied, the first specific screen 16M1 for the cooperative cooking mode is displayed. The transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 by the heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L and the second heating means HM2 can be easily advanced.
In addition, if the permission conditions are not satisfied, the first specific screen 16M1 itself is not displayed, so there is no fear of misuse or misunderstanding by the user US. In other words, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker without impairing the operability of the user US.

Furthermore, there is a heating pause period P3 between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, and the length of this heating pause period P3 is determined by the timing at which the user US instructs restart of cooking with the input key 151M.
That is, in this Embodiment 2, it is necessary to confirm the degree of heating of the food to be cooked in the cooking process 1, to add seasoning, or to perform the cooking process 2 by adding another food to be cooked. period can be secured. For this reason, it is easy to use, and the cooking repertoire of the user US can be expanded.

Furthermore, since there is the restriction unit 55, after the touch operation of the input key 151M for one specific cooperative cooking menu A, the recipe data CD of another cooperative cooking menu C is externally controlled via the communication unit 51. The device 40 never acquires it. Therefore, another cooking menu (including the control menu for the combined cooking mode and the control menu for the single cooking mode) is not inadvertently received during cooperative cooking. Therefore, there is no concern about confusion of the user US due to reception or interference with the operation of the heating cooker 1 side.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the recipe data CD of one linked cooking menu (eg ratatouille) is selected, and when the recipe data CD is acquired from the outside, it is applied to the cooking menu. Control conditions (thermal power, heating time, etc.) are displayed on the first specific screen 16M1. Furthermore, in this state, voice input mode display information 179D is displayed to notify the user US that the voice input mode is supported.
Therefore, after confirming that the linked cooking menu is desired, the user US can input the control conditions to be applied to the cooking menu by voice. It is also possible to reduce the number of operations.

Note that even after the input key 151M is touch-operated for one specific cooperative cooking menu A, input key 152M is subsequently operated during the cooking process of the cooperative cooking menu A, and cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is performed. is canceled (cancelled), it is possible for the controller 40 to acquire the recipe data CD of the new linked cooking menu C via the communication unit 51 .

Next, FIGS. 69 to 80 will be described.
69 to 79 show the display contents of the terminal-side display screen (also used as the input operation screen) 216 of the communication terminal device 200, which will be described in order below. The “terminal side display screen” 216 is hereinafter referred to as the “display screen” 216 .

69A and 69B are enlarged views of the display screen 216 of the communication terminal device 200. FIG.
This display screen 216 is formed by covering the surface of a liquid crystal display screen or an organic EL display screen with a glass plate.
Various icons (input keys) 488, 489, 491L, 491M, 491R, 492 to 496, etc. described later are displayed on the display screen 216, although they do not appear as physical structures on the upper surface (surface) of the glass plate. can be visually recognized by the display of Although a specific portion of the glass plate itself does not emit light or generate an image, in the following explanation, the user US who visually recognizes that characters, figures, and other information are displayed in this way. Take a stand and use the expression "displayed on the display screen".

An "icon" can be used for desired input. That is, each icon portion has a capacitive sensing key. By touching the icon, a command signal to the central processing unit 212 is generated in the touch-type operation unit 215 (see FIG. 60).

To indicate the existence and function of an icon, certain functions are represented by text or graphics (at least when input is available). For example, as in the example of FIG. 69A, text information such as "left IH operation unit" is displayed at the position of the icon 491L.

Reference numeral 481 denotes a menu display portion on the initial screen shown in FIG. 69(A). This menu display portion 481 changes to the menu selection display portion 482 of the left heating portion in FIG. 69(B). Further, in FIG. 70(A), the display changes to a heat source selection display portion 483 labeled "heat source selection".

Further, the menu display section 481 changes to a range grill control menu selection display section 484 labeled "RG control menu selection" in FIG. 71(B).
Further, the menu display section 481 is changed to a cooperative cooking menu display section 485 labeled "select cooperative cooking menu" in FIG. 76(A).

The menu display section 481 changes to a preparation information display section 486 labeled "next preparation guide" in FIG. 76(B). 77A and 77B, the menu display portion 481 is changed to a cooperative cooking menu name display portion 487 showing "fried chicken" which is one of the cooperative cooking menus.

Returning to FIG. 69A, 490 is a caution information display portion as an initial screen during standby. Before starting the operation, the heating chamber 6 may already be hot due to the heat from the previous cooking, and FIG.
It also indicates that the power is already on (the main power switch 20 is closed) based on the data acquired when the cooking device 1 is connected for communication.

In FIG. 69, 491M is a selection section (icon) of the central operation section 15M. By operating the central operation unit 15M, as described in the first embodiment, cooking can be performed by the heating units other than the left and right heating ports 4L and 4R.

In FIG. 69, 491L is a selection section (icon) of the left operation section 15L. 491R is a selection section (icon) of the right operation section 15R.
492 is an advice display selection section (icon). When this is touched, the voice notification unit 50 notifies the reference information of the operation corresponding to the touched scene.

In FIG. 69, FG indicates the fingertip of the user US.
Triangular marks (icons) 501 and 502 in FIGS. 69A, 69B and other figures are screen switching marks.

There is also a screen switching mark 503 in FIG. 69(B). By touching these marks, the display screen 216 can be switched in a certain order each time the mark is touched. By the way, when the screen switching mark 502 is touched in FIG. 69(B), the display screen 216 moves to the right, and the next display screen 480 appears from the left side.

Note that the screen switching marks 501 to 503 may be omitted by providing a scroll function for switching screens by moving the fingertip FG while touching the display screen 216 and moving the display screen accordingly. .

In FIG. 69A, when the left operation section selection section (icon) 491L is touched, the screen is switched to the display screen 216 shown in FIG. 69B without touching the screen switching marks 501 to 504. FIG.

In FIG. 69B, 493 is a control menu display portion (icon) for the IH single cooking mode.
There are a total of seven control menus for the IH single cooking mode KM1. Four of them are displayed in the right half of the display screen 216 in FIG. 69(B). These control menu display portions (icons) 493 are "boiling water", "boiling", "cooking rice" and "boiling water + keep warm".

Also, the remaining three control menus are displayed on the left half of the display screen 216 . There are three control menu display portions (icon) 488 for “warming”, a control menu display portion (icon) 494 for “fried food”, and a control menu display portion (icon) 489 for “preheating”.

In FIG. 69B, 495 is a menu screen display section (icon) for selecting to return to the initial menu display screen.
Reference numeral 496 denotes a confirmation display portion (icon) displayed when one control menu (for example, "boiling water") in FIG. 69B is selected. When this button is pressed, for example, if it is the above-mentioned "boiling water", the screen automatically switches to the control condition setting screen for boiling water.

Next, FIG. 70(A) will be described.
497A and 497B are induction heating source selectors (icons) for selecting the left IH coil 9L and the right IH coil 9R. 497C is a heating source selection section (icon) for selecting a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2).

In FIG. 70(A), 498 is a range grill heat source selection portion (icon), and 499 is a selection portion (icon) of the cooperative cooking mode.
In FIG. 70(A), when the range grill heating source selection portion (icon) 498 is touched, the screen changes to the display screen 216 of FIG. 70(B).

In FIG. 70A, 497A is an induction heating source selection section (icon) for selecting the left IH coil 9L. 497B is a selector (icon) for the right IH coil 9R as well.

497C is a selection section (icon) for selecting the microwave heating source 189 .
When the screen switching mark (icon) 503 is touched in FIG. 70(B), the display screen 216 in FIG. 70(B) changes to that shown in FIG. 70(B).

Next, FIGS. 71A and 71B will be described.
500 is an RG control menu selection section (icon) indicating a range grill (RG) control menu. There are a total of 10 menu items for controlling the range grill (RG), including "warm", "manual range", and "thaw meat".

FIG. 71(A) shows five control menus 500, and FIG. 71(B) shows the remaining five control menus 500. FIG.

The large arrows shown in FIGS. 71A and 71B respectively indicate the rearward direction and the forward direction when the display screen 216 is horizontal. The display screen 216 can be operated horizontally, vertically, or obliquely.

Next, FIGS. 72A and 72B will be described.
FIG. 72(A) shows a state in which the "warm" control menu 500 is selected from the range grill (RG) control menu in the state of FIG. 71(A).

When the fingertip FG touches the RG control menu selection portion (icon) 500, the selection portion 500 senses the touch and changes the display color, for example, reverses to outline characters.
When the input decision key display portion (icon) 496 is touched in the state of FIG. 72(A), the display screen changes to the display screen 216 of FIG. 72(B).

FIG. 72B is the default screen of the range grill (RG) control menu.
504 is a name display portion (icon) of the RG control menu.
The control menu display form and design of FIG. 72(B) are similar to those shown in FIG. 21 of the first embodiment. Such a display is possible because there is the heating cooker database 217 and the remote operation information generating section 219 (see FIG. 60).

In FIG. 72B, 505 is a temperature display section (icon) of the RG control menu. In the example of FIG. 72(B), the default value is 80° C., but since there are 75° C. and 85° C. as the next candidates that can be selected, they are also displayed at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 72(B), in the name display portion (icon) 504 of the RG control menu, the next display candidates "oven" and "boiled under leafy vegetables" are displayed in slightly smaller sizes adjacent thereto. be done.

If the user US wishes to change the set temperature of the range to 75° C. in the state shown in FIG.
Similarly, when changing "warm" in the control menu to "oven" or "boiled under leafy vegetables", the candidate switching mark (icon) 519 near "oven" or "boiled under leafy vegetables", Just touch 520.

As described with reference to FIG. 60, since this communication terminal 200 has a voice input unit 222, setting of control conditions (such as the heating target temperature of "warm" which is an automatic cooking menu) as shown in FIG. can be done by voice. In this FIG. 72, it is sufficient to utter "Temperature 85 degrees".

In FIG. 72B, 506 is a reference image display section. The reference image may be anything other than a photograph, and may be an illustration showing the image of "warm up" in the control menu.

Next, FIGS. 73A and 73B will be described.
When the orientation of the communication terminal device 200 is changed in the vertical direction, the display screen 216 is vertically elongated as shown in FIGS. 73(A) and 73(B). Note that the display screen 216 may be set to be fixed to portrait display as shown in FIGS. 73(A) and 73(B).

Switching between FIGS. 73A and 73B can be performed only by touching the screen switching mark (icon) 503 .
Next, FIGS. 74A and 74B will be described.
In order to select the "warm" control menu 500 shown in FIG. 74(A), when the fingertip FG touches the control menu selection portion 500, the display color changes as shown in FIG. 74(A). For example, reverse to white characters. When the input decision key display portion (icon) 496 is touched in the state of FIG. 74(A), the display screen changes to the display screen 216 of FIG. 74(B). Such screen switching may also be commanded by voice using the voice input unit 222 .

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 74(B), if you want to change the (heating upper limit) setting temperature of the "heating" range (microwave heating) to 75 ° C., the 75 ° C. display area (RG control A fingertip FG can be placed on the temperature display portion 505) of the menu. Then, the display screen 216 changes to the state shown in FIG. 75(A).

In FIG. 74B, 507A is an auxiliary information display section, which is displayed near the reference image display section 506. In FIG. In FIG. 74(B), the user US is advised to select the set temperature.

Next, FIG. 75(A) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 75A, the set temperature is changed to 75.degree. Since it is still before the control conditions are finalized, the other set temperature "85°C" is still displayed.

In the state of FIG. 75A, the transmission (confirmation) key display portion (icon) 521 of the remote control signal is displayed for the first time.
In FIG. 75(A), when the transmission key display section 521 is selected, the setting information (recipe data) of the control menu "warm" of the "range-only cooking mode KM1" displayed in FIG. It is collectively transmitted to the heating cooker 1 as remote control information.

The state of FIG. 75(A) is a stage where all the conditions for executing “warm” in the RG control menu have been selected, so the heating temperature “75° C.” displayed on the temperature display section 505 is the heating condition. It is sent to the cooker 1.

In FIG. 75A, 507B is an auxiliary information display section, which is displayed near the reference image display section 506. In FIG. FIG. 75(A) shows that the input work is completed by pressing the send key display portion 521. FIG.

At the stage of FIG. 75(B) after the transmission of the remote control signal (including the recipe data CD) is completed, the stop key display section (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is displayed for the first time. By pressing this button, the command for the heating operation can be stopped at the stage of FIG. 75(B). That is, if the transmission operation is being performed to the heating cooker 1, the transmission is stopped in the middle. Further, when the data transmission has already been completed, it reaches the heating cooker 1 as a cancellation command. If the stop key display section 522 is pressed once, the process returns to the initial stage, so all the remote operation conditions are input again.

The communication terminal device 200 is provided with a stop key display section (icon) 522 capable of immediately transmitting command information for commanding stop of heating. Thereby, the function for ensuring the safety of the heating cooker 1 is provided.

69 to 75(A), various input operations have been sequentially described. It is not always possible to continue (maintain).
For example, even if the communication terminal 200 is not connected to the heating cooker 1, it is possible to perform the display and input as shown in FIGS. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 75(A), it is sufficient to connect to the heating cooker 1 immediately before pressing the transmission key display section 521 to transmit. For this reason, even if the communication terminal device 200 performs the input work shown in FIGS. is not a hindrance to

Next, FIG. 76A will be described.
FIG. 76(A) is the display screen 216 displayed when the selection portion 499 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG. 70(A) is touched. Note that the central operation section selection section 491M in FIG. 69A may be touched. However, when the central operation section selection section 491M is touched, the selection screen for the range grill cooking mode (combined cooking mode KM2) is shared, so the number of touch operations to select the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is slightly increased.

FIG. 76(A) is an example of selecting "fried chicken" in one cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
When the user touches the linked cooking menu display section (selection section) 500C because he wants to cook "fried chicken", the display color changes as shown in FIG.

When the input key display portion (icon) 496 is touched in the state of FIG. 76(A), the display screen 216 (not shown) for cooking "fried chicken" is displayed. A display screen 216 in FIG. 76A is a display screen showing a stage in which "fried chicken" is selected.

Note that FIG. 76(A) only shows the cooperative cooking menu and omits the subsequent selection of heating units and control conditions. By selecting (touching) the section (icon) 500C, the display screen 216 for setting the selected cooking menu (for example, "fried chicken") is displayed.

Between FIG. 76 and the next FIG. 77, there is actually a setting display screen 216 for "Karaage". The display screen 216 may display icons (not shown) for selecting the left and right heating units (IH coils 9L and 9R) as shown in the first embodiment (FIG. 25). Alternatively, the heating ports 4L and 4R may be selected on the side of the heating cooker 1 that receives the recipe data CD without specifying the left and right heating portions. Also, as shown in FIG. 75, a transmission key display section (icon) 521 is displayed on the setting display screen 216 . Then, the recipe data CD of "fried chicken" can be transmitted collectively.

FIG. 76(B) shows that when “fried chicken” is cooked in the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the degree of progress of the cooking process (heating control unit 43) is detected in the middle of cooking process 1, and heat cooking is performed. This is an example of notification corresponding to "reference information 1" FA1 automatically notified by the device 1.

In this second embodiment, in the "reference information 1" FA1 notified by the heating cooker 1, as shown in FIG. 76(B), opening the door 7 of the heating chamber 6, then 6 to take out the heated foodstuff is notified.

The remote operation information generation unit 224 of the communication terminal device 200 processes the signal obtained from the heating cooker 1 via the central processing unit 212 and the input signal from the display operation unit 225 as described above, The remote control information for the heating cooker 1 is generated. The "remote operation information" includes the display information of the central display section 16M in the cooperative cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, etc., and the display information regarding the right heating power display section 16R and the left heating power display section 16L.

Therefore, even on the display screen 216 of the communication terminal device 200, as shown in FIG. 509 and a preparation work reference image 510 showing that the food to be cooked is taken out together with the saucer are displayed.
Note that 511 is alert information. Reference numeral 512 denotes auxiliary information describing the work of the user US.

Next, FIG. 77(A) will be described.
The display screen 216 of FIG. 77(A) displays the stage of the cooking process 1 of "Karaage".
513 is a process information display part. This FIG. 77(A) shows that the microwave (range) heating is still continuing. 514 is a display section for the next cooking process information. In the example of this figure, the display section 514 indicates that induction heating is to be performed in the left heating port 4L next.

A reference numeral 515 denotes a display section for a recommended menu. This display unit 515 may include a recommended cooking menu (another cooking) retrieved from inventory information obtained in advance from refrigerator 403 (see FIG. 57).

The example of FIG. 77(A) suggests that after the heating chamber 6, which is currently being used for fried chicken, is no longer used, there will be another recommended cooking menu that can be cooked in that heating chamber. Heating cooker 1 has a function of acquiring inventory information of refrigerator 403 through wireless communication with refrigerator 403 .

Specifically, the recommended menu is not automatically displayed at the stage of FIG. 77(A). When the user US touches the detail display instruction section (icon) 523 displayed for the first time at this stage, the details are displayed as shown in FIG. 77(B).

Note that the selection section corresponding to the detailed display instruction section (icon) 523 as shown in FIG. After a certain period of time, the screen of FIG. 77(B) automatically returns to the display screen 216 of FIG. 77(A).

Also at the stage of FIG. 77(A), the stop key display section (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is displayed.

In FIG. 77(B), 487 is the name display portion of the linked cooking menu, and in this case, the name of the food to be cooked, "Karaage" is displayed. 516 is the display portion of the recommended menu. Specific contents of the recommended menu are displayed on the recommended menu display unit 515 . It is recommended to thaw and warm the food to be cooked.

In FIG. 77(B), 517 is supplementary information of the recommended menu, which indicates that cooking is possible with the control menu of "heating" using microwave heating.
518 is a cooking reference image of the recommended menu. Illustrations (image diagrams) are acceptable instead of photographs.
Also at the stage of FIG. 77(B), the stop key display section (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is displayed.

Next, FIG. 78(A) will be described.
The display screen 216 of FIG. 78(A) is in a state in which the cooking process 1 of "fried chicken" is completed and the heating pause period, that is, the transition period TR, is entered before shifting to the cooking process 2. FIG.

The transition period TR does not end unless the user US who is actually cooking in front of the cooker 1 presses the input key 151M of the cooker 1 .
That is, the temporal length of the transition period TR depends on the user US.

Therefore, the communication terminal device 200 does not have a function to remotely instruct (by wireless communication) the transition period TR to restart the cooking process from a remote location, regardless of the operation. This is for improving the safety of the heating cooker 1 . As shown in FIGS. 78(A) and 78(B), the input key (icon) for selecting to end the transition period TR and start the next cooking process 2 is not displayed at all.

513 is a process information display part. FIG. 78(A) shows that microwave heating has ended. 514 is a display section for the next cooking process information. In the example of FIG. 78(A), induction heating is next performed at the left heating port 4L.

A reference numeral 515 denotes a display section for a recommended menu. In this display unit 515, if there is a recommended cooking menu (another cooking) retrieved from the inventory information obtained in advance from the refrigerator 403, the recommended cooking menu is displayed as shown in FIG. 78(B). Indicates that there is a menu.

When the detailed display instruction portion (icon) 523 displayed on the display screen 216 of FIG. 78(A) is touched, as shown in FIG. Display the details of possible cooking menu candidates.

A selection section corresponding to the detailed display instruction section (icon) 523 as shown in FIG. However, if the display screen of the central display unit 16M is not of the touch input type, it is necessary to display that an appropriate input key is pressed.

When the input confirmation key display portion (icon) 496 in FIG. 78(B) is pressed, the information of the recommended cooking menu (another cooking) using the heating chamber 6 is sent to the heating cooker 1. . In other words, the user US who is cooking in front of the heating cooker 1 is informed of the intention of "agreeing with the recommended menu".

When the information of the recommended cooking menu (another cooking) is transmitted to the heating cooker 1, the owner of the communication terminal device 200 is not in the kitchen 601 (see FIG. 57), and the recommended cooking menu (Another cooking) may be notified. In other words, another user US may be in front of the cooker 1 at that moment. In any case, the user US can know that the heating chamber 6 can be used effectively and the cooking can be performed concurrently.

Next, FIGS. 79A and 79B will be described.
A display screen 216 in FIG. 79(A) shows a modified example of FIG. 78(B).
As shown in FIG. 79A, the recommended menu display section 515 displays information on the recommended frozen food (ingredients) and information on the ingredients of the food. In this case, the data of the food component data obtained by the food component data acquisition unit 233 are used as described with reference to FIG.

That is, at the stage of FIG. 79(A), the data of food components and food nutritional components held in the heating cooker database 217 can be displayed.

It should be noted that even if there is no data such as food ingredients in the heating cooker database 217, data of food ingredients and food nutritional ingredients (ingredients) can be obtained from the cloud server 300 (food ingredient information server 326 shown in FIG. data DD) can be obtained. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 78(A), there is a transition period TR during which the cooking operation is paused, so data may be acquired using this period.

FIG. 79B shows a state in which the display contents are switched when the detailed display instruction section (icon) 523 is operated in the state of FIG. 79A. As shown in FIG. 79B, the recommended menu display section 515 displays information on the recommended frozen food (ingredient) and information on the standard ingredients and nutritional ingredients of the food.

Next, FIG. 80 will be described.
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an operation example when the communication terminal device 200 acquires the recipe data CD from the cloud server 300 (recipe information providing server 301).

When the recipe data CD is received and processed by the communication terminal device 200 (step SL1), in the next step SL2, the food identification information of the recipe data CD, the food component data and the nutritional component data stored in the heating cooker database 217 are processed. perform matching.

For example, it is determined whether or not the heating cooker database 217 has food component data and nutritional component data for "ratatouille" in the cooking menu described above.
If there is no corresponding data, the determination result of step SL3 is "No", so the process proceeds to the next step SL4.

At step SL4, cloud server 300 (second server 322) is requested via network NW to transmit food ingredient data and nutritional ingredient data for "ratatouille" in a specific cooking menu.

For example, when the inside of the cloud server 300 is configured to include the first server 321 and the second server 322 directly connected to the communication terminal device 200 via the network NW, as described with reference to FIG. , this component data provision request X is transmitted to the second server 322, and is transmitted from the second server 322 to the first server 321 as a component data provision request X (inquiry signal SN shown in FIG. 57).

In this way, when the first server 321 receives the component data provision request X, as described above, the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology has released to the public (via the Internet, etc.) the “Japanese Food Standard Composition Tables 2020 Edition (8th Edition)”. ” (or the food component information server 326), food component data and nutritional component data are acquired. Then, the acquired data (component data DD) is transmitted to the communication terminal device 200 via the second server 322 . In this way, at step SL4, food ingredient data and nutritional ingredient data (ingredient data DD) are obtained from the outside.

The food data acquisition unit 233 confirms the contents of the received food component data and nutritional component data (step SL5), and if there is no problem, stores them in the heating cooker database 217 (step SL6). If the food component data and nutritional component data cannot be acquired, the process proceeds to step SL8, and predetermined error processing is performed. The contents of this error are displayed on the display screen 216 .

When the food ingredient data and the nutritional ingredient data (ingredient data DD) are stored in the heating cooker database 217, the determination result of step SL3 is "Yes", so the process proceeds to step SL7. Further, when the food ingredient data and the nutritional ingredient data (ingredient data DD) are successfully obtained from the outside, the process proceeds to step SL7.

At step SL7, a display is displayed on the display screen 216 to wait for the user US to decide whether to transmit the food component data and the nutritional component data, and a transmission standby state to the heating cooker 1 is entered. When the user US performs a predetermined transmission operation, the already acquired recipe data CD2 (for example, for cooking "ratatouille"), the food component data and the nutritional component are transmitted to the heating cooker 1. Data (component data DD) is transmitted.

In the above description, the user US mainly touches the touch operation unit 215 to acquire and transmit food ingredient data and nutritional ingredient data (ingredient data DD). You can also use voice input.

As described with reference to FIG. 60, since the display operation unit 225 has the voice input unit 222, the user US utters, for example, "get data ratatouille" to the voice input unit 222, and externally Applicable data can be acquired.

On the other hand, in this communication terminal device 200, apart from the operation of acquiring a specific recipe data CD (for example, "ratatouille") from the cloud server 300, various recipe data CDs stored in the heating cooker database 217 are retrieved. For example, the user US has a function of searching food ingredients and food nutrients as keywords.

For this reason, for example, the speech input unit 222 is uttered once or several times, such as "search for cooking menu, calorie, low", and various recipe data CDs stored in the heating cooker database 217 are generated. Within the range of , those with less energy amount (calorie conversion value) can be preferentially selected. For example, cooking menus can be arranged and displayed on the display screen 216 in descending order of calorie value.

In the above description, the communication terminal device 200 such as a smart phone is a method of performing wireless communication 400 with Bluetooth (registered trademark) with the heating cooker 1 . As another method, since the NFC input/output unit 221 (see FIG. 60) for short-range wireless communication is provided, the communication terminal device 200 can be connected to the NFC input/output unit (not shown) on the heating cooker 1 side. may be input by directly approaching or touching.

Summary of Embodiment 2.
As is clear from the above description, the second embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 related to the first disclosure as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 related to the first disclosure is
a first heating means HM1 for heating the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 3;
an input operation unit 15 that receives commands from a user US;
a communication unit 51 that receives the recipe data CD from the outside;
a notification unit 90 having a display unit 16 for displaying cooking information and an audio notification unit 50;
and a control device 40,
The input operation unit 15 has touch-type specific input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R for selecting three types of cooking modes (cooperation, combination, and single) or cooking menus. After activating the display unit 16, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the display unit 16,
The input operation unit 15 transmits measurement time data MJ (signal corresponding to voice input mode) acquired when the specific input key is touched to the control device 40,
The control device 40 receives measured time data MJ (voice input mode corresponding signal) indicating the "long press" measured by the time measurement unit 15T from the input operation unit 15 during the display period of the standby initial screen 16MH. In this case, enabling acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 and accepting a command to set the control conditions of the recipe data CD;
It is a configuration characterized by

With such a configuration, the input operation unit 15 can control the timing of acquiring various recipe data CDs from the outside. In addition, since it is possible to switch to the voice input mode by using the touch-type input keys on the input operation unit, it is possible to input the troublesome work of the input process before starting the heating operation by voice. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability of the user US and reduce the workload.

Furthermore, in the heat cooker 1 of the second embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67, the display section (eg, the first specific On the screen 16M1), voice input mode display information 179D (see FIG. 66) is automatically displayed to notify the user US that voice input using communication terminal 200 is being accepted.

Therefore, the user US can easily use voice input in the input process before checking the recipe data CD and starting cooking. In the second embodiment, the communication terminal device 200 is used for voice input, but a generally used terminal device specializing in voice input such as a smart speaker may be used. .

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 2, the heat cooking system regarding the 3rd disclosure was disclosed as follows.
That is, the cooking system according to the third disclosure is
a heating cooker 1 that heats the object to be heated N;
a cloud server 300 (first server 321, second server 322, etc.) connected to the heating cooker 1 via a network NW through wireless communication;
and
The cloud server 300 has a function of transmitting recipe data CD to the cooking device 1,
The heating cooker 1 has a function of switching between a touch input mode and a voice input mode according to the touch state of the touch input key,
The heating cooker 1 is in a standby state for acquiring the recipe data CD in the state switched to the voice input mode,
When the cloud server 300 receives a request for providing the recipe data CD, the cloud server 300 transmits the recipe data CD to the cooking device 1,
The heating cooker 1 inputs control conditions related to the acquired recipe data CD in the state of the voice input mode.
It is a configuration characterized by

According to the heat cooking system of the third disclosure, heat cooking can be performed using the recipe data CD acquired from the outside using the network.
In addition, since the mode is automatically changed to the voice input mode when acquiring recipe data, it becomes possible to input by voice when inputting the control conditions related to the acquired recipe data after that. It can contribute to efficiency improvement of input operation and reduction of input load.

Furthermore, the heat cooking system of this third disclosure provides:
A communication terminal device 200 that can communicate with the heating cooker 1 and has a terminal-side operation unit (display operation unit) 225 that receives input from the user US, and a terminal-side display unit 216 that displays information;
a cloud server 300 connected to the communication terminal device 200 via a wireless network NW;
and
The cloud server 300 has a function of transmitting the recipe data CD for the cooking device 1 in response to a request from the communication terminal device 200,
The communication terminal device 200 has a function of transmitting command information input to the terminal-side operation unit 225 to the cloud server 300, and displays information of the recipe data CD received from the cloud server on the terminal-side display unit 216. and
The communication terminal device 200 has a function of narrowing down the food components or nutritional components of the cooking menu that is the target of the recipe data CD to be transmitted to the heating cooker 1 from the database (heating cooker database 217) held. death,
The communication terminal device 200 has a function of transmitting to the cooking device 1 the recipe data CD that can be executed and information indicating the amounts of food ingredients or nutritional ingredients for cooking that is the object of the recipe data CD. have,
It is a configuration characterized by

With such a configuration, when a specific cooking menu (for example, “ratatouille”) is selected, information on the ingredients and nutritional components of the food related to the cooking menu can be easily learned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the selection operation of the cooking menu by the user US. For example, the user US can select an appropriate cooking menu based on information on the amount of food ingredients and nutritional ingredients according to the health management of the family, dietary restrictions, etc., thereby contributing to the improvement of eating habits. can.

Furthermore, within the range of various recipe data CDs stored in the heating cooker database 217, priority is given to, for example, those with a low energy amount (calorie conversion value) or specific nutritional components (e.g., high iron content). can be selectively selected.
Therefore, the range of useful information that can be provided when the user US selects a cooking menu is expanded, and the operability for the user US can be improved.

With this system, for example, the user US can easily check information on food ingredients and nutritional ingredients in advance in response to family health management, dietary restrictions, etc., and can select an appropriate cooking menu. From this, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of eating habits.

Also in this second embodiment, similarly to the heating cooker 1 related to the first disclosure, after the main power switch 20 is turned ON, during the initial standby period TP, the heating cooker 1
(1) Providing the user US with standby common information.
(2) After the audio input mode is selected, the recipe data (including the recipe data of the control menus of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM1) relating to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be received from the CD.
By controlling the acquisition timing of the recipe data CD from the outside, it is possible to prevent the recipe data CD of another cooking menu from being inadvertently received during the selection of the cooking mode or the setting of the control conditions.

Furthermore, since the input keys 154M (153L, 153R) that select the voice input mode are also used to acquire the recipe data CD, the number of operation keys (operation units) of the input operation unit 15 can be reduced. It is also possible to avoid an increase, and prevent the user US from deteriorating the operability.

In this Embodiment 2, as in the heat cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the restriction unit 55 stores new recipe data CD until the cooking process of the acquired recipe data CD is completed. It was a configuration characterized by restricting acquisition.

For this reason, it is possible to prevent inadvertent reception of another cooking menu (including the control menu of the combined cooking mode and the control menu of the single cooking mode) in the middle of the cooperative cooking, and the stable reception of the recipe data CD. Cooking menu can be executed.

Furthermore, due to careless reception of the recipe data CD of another cooking menu in the middle of the cooking process, the operation of the control device 40 may be hindered, or the user US may be misunderstood or confused. can be prevented. Therefore, usability for the user US is improved.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the operation for acquiring the recipe data is started while the standby initial screen 16MH is being displayed, the reception operation display screen 16MM is displayed as described with reference to FIG. automatically switches to the display of

Moreover, since a plurality of progress marks 16F are displayed in the receiving operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the receiving operation, the user US can easily understand that the recipe data CD is being acquired. , useless misunderstandings and erroneous operations can be prevented.

In addition to or instead of displaying the progress mark 16F, the audio notification unit 51 may give voice notification. Also, the progress marks are not limited to those whose shape and number change with the lapse of time as shown in FIG.

Embodiment 3.
81 to 83 show a heating cooker according to Embodiment 3. FIG. FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the central display section immediately after the heating cooker 1 is started. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the central display section after the heating cooker 1 is started. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the central display section after the heating cooker 1 is started. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configurations of the first and second embodiments described in FIGS. 1 to 80 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

In this Embodiment 3, the configuration of the heating cooker 1 shown in Embodiment 2 is changed, and the contents displayed on the central display section 16M and the selection procedure of the heating cooking mode are partially changed.

FIG. 81 will be described.
When the main power switch 20 is "OFF", the central display section 16M is not activated, so no information is displayed.
When the main power switch 20 is turned "ON", the control device 40 performs self-diagnosis as described above, and then displays the display screen A (standby initial screen 16MH) shown in FIG. .

In the display screen (initial screen during standby) 16MH in FIG. 81, 60A is a display text notifying that the power is on. 60B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for guiding to a dedicated recipe posting site (cloud server 300) via a wide area network NW such as the Internet. 60C is a text (two-dimensional information description) explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code.

By activating the communication terminal 200 and optically reading the two-dimensional code 60B, it is possible to connect to an external recipe data providing server 301 (not shown) holding information on various cooking recipes. . As described in the first embodiment, the recipe data providing server 301 is provided with a recipe DB (database) 302 (not shown) that holds recipe data CDs for various types of cooking. .

After the display screen 1A is displayed, the display screen B is automatically displayed. After the display screen B is displayed as shown in FIG. 82, the display screens B1 to B3 are displayed at fixed time intervals (for example, 3 seconds or 5 seconds) at fixed time intervals (for example, 3 seconds or 5 seconds). It may be in the form of displaying. Then, the display screen B is displayed again.

On the other hand, in the voice notification unit 50, when the display screen B shown in FIG. 81 is displayed or when the display screens B1 to B3 are displayed as shown in FIG. The input key to be operated may be guided to the user US by announcing each information by voice.

For example, at the time of the display screen B1, it is preferable to provide guidance such as "If you want to use both the heating chamber and the IH for cooperative cooking, select the number 1 key." The "number 1 key" in this case is the input key 153M. "Number 2 key" refers to the input keys 154M and 155M.

It is preferable to display the number "1" on the operation surface of the input key 153M by printing or engraving on the upper surface of the central operation unit 15M. Alternatively, the operation surface itself of the input key 153M may be illuminated so that the user US can easily identify the number. A similar configuration can be adopted for the other number 2 and 3 keys.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, display portions 525, 526 and 527 of cooking mode names are displayed in the central display portion 16M.
The display section 525 is a display corresponding to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. The display section 526 is a display corresponding to the combined cooking mode KM2. The display section 527 is a display corresponding to the single cooking mode KM1 of the first heating means HM1.

As shown in FIG. 81, on the display screen B, the display sections 525 to 527 are displayed in a list state, and input keys to be operated first are displayed so as to correspond to the display sections 525 to 527 on a one-to-one basis. Guidance sentences (character information) 530, 531, and 532 specifying the are displayed.

Therefore, the user US can display information common to the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3, for example, caution information (during standby Common information 60N) can be confirmed.

Furthermore, since the guidance texts 530, 531, and 532 can be seen on the guidance screen B (16MA), the user US can be prevented from hesitating about the operation before starting the heat cooking. The device 1 can be realized.

As can be seen from the above description, in the third embodiment, explanations 533, 534, 535 indicating the content of each heat cooking mode are displayed simultaneously with the display of the display portions 525-527.

Further, at the timing when the display screen B is displayed on the guide screen 16MA, the input key to be operated is notified by the voice notification unit 50 respectively.

In FIG. 81, for example, when the input key 153M is touch-operated, the display screen C1 is displayed. This display screen C1 is the second specific screen 16M2.
Further, when another input key 153L or 153R is touch-operated, the display screen C2 is displayed. This display screen C2 is the third specific screen 16M3.

As is clear from FIG. 81, the control device 40 is in the touch input mode from the time the main power switch 20 is turned ON.
When the input key 153M, which is one of the voice input switching keys, is touched, the central operation unit 15M determines whether the touch state is "long press" or "short press". The result (command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40 .

Similarly, when any one of the input keys 153L and 153R, which are one of the voice input switching keys, is touched, whether the touch state is "long press" or "short press" is determined by left operation. The determination is made by the portion 15L or the right operation portion 15R, and the determination result (command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40. FIG.

Therefore, if any one of the input keys 153M, 153L, and 153R is in the "long press" state during the touch operation, as shown in FIG. Voice input is also possible.

Next, FIG. 82 will be described.
As shown in the display screen B, when the input key 153M is displayed as a specific input key such as "to key 1" on the standby initial screen 16MH, the input key 153M is input. Feature is enabled. That is, during the initial standby period TP, the input keys shown on the display screens B1 to B3 are displayed with their input functions enabled.

Therefore, as shown in the display screen B1, when the "number 1 key", that is, the input key 153M is displayed as a specific input key on the standby initial screen 16MH, the input key 153M is displayed. Input functionality is already enabled.

After the above process, when the input key 153M is first pressed, the central display section 16M switches from the display screen B to the first specific screen 16M1 as shown in FIG. However, as described in Embodiment 1, if "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are not satisfied, a display or voice notification is given to the effect that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected, and the display screen Return to A.

In the stage where the standby initial screen (display screen A in FIG. 60) 16MH is displayed, when using the "voice input mode 2" from the voice notification unit 51, the input key 180 (see FIG. 11) is pressed. You may be guided to press .

The control device 40 is
(1) When any one of the input keys 153M, 153L, and 153R, which are one of the voice input switching keys, is touch-operated (2) When the standby initial screen 16MH (display screen A) is displayed (3) ) A certain amount of time elapses without any of the input keys 153M, 153L, and 153R being operated since any one of the times when the content of the display screen B was notified by voice by the voice notification unit 50. When the time limit (first time limit TX, for example, 30 minutes) is exceeded, the main power switch 20 is automatically opened to cut off the main power.

Next, FIG. 83 will be described.
During the initial standby period TP after activation, the cooking device 1 cannot freely acquire the recipe data CD from the communication terminal device 200 .

On the other hand, when any one of the input keys 153M, 153L, and 153R, which are one of the voice input switching keys, is pressed, the acquisition possible period TB begins. recipe data CD can be acquired. At this time, it is not necessary that the input key 180 is pressed first.

When the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed, the input key 180 is pressed at the stage of the display screen B shown in FIG. You can guide them to push.

With the configuration as described above, the user US can obtain the information of the input key to be operated not only by visual information but also by voice, so that further improvement of operability can be expected.

Also in the third embodiment, the control device 40 transmits the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 to the heating control unit 43 and the communication unit 51 in order to execute the heat cooking of the specific cooking object in the cooperative cooking mode. During the "initial waiting period" TP (before the "cooking step 1") before starting the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the data acquiring unit 53 acquires the data through the communication unit 51. and a restriction unit 55 for restricting acquisition of the recipe data CD.

That is, during the initial standby period TP shown in FIG. 83, the restriction unit 55 restricts acquisition of the recipe data CD from the outside.

Furthermore, the restriction unit 55 does not restrict acquisition of the recipe data CD after the input key 153M is operated, that is, during the acquisition possible period TB shown in FIG. However, the term “restriction” here does not include the meaning of judging whether or not the permission conditions are satisfied. become.

Furthermore, the restriction unit 55 has a “function to restrict” acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of the cooking menu to which the once acquired recipe data CD is applied is completed. have.

For this reason, it is possible to prevent inadvertent reception of another cooking menu (including the control menu of the combined cooking mode and the control menu of the single cooking mode) in the middle of the cooperative cooking, and the stable reception of the recipe data CD. Cooking menu can be executed.
Furthermore, due to careless reception of the recipe data CD of another cooking menu in the middle of the cooking process, the operation of the control device 40 may be hindered, or the user US may be misunderstood or confused. can be prevented.

It should be noted that the above "function to be restricted" may be relaxed a little.
For example, when the recipe data CD is acquired in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the reception of the recipe data CD is restricted only to the cooperative cooking mode of the same cooking mode. You may choose not to limit it.

Summary of Embodiment 3.
As described above, in the third embodiment, the heating cooker 1 according to the fourth disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 related to the first disclosure is
a heating means for heating an object to be heated;
an input operation unit 15 that receives user commands;
a voice signal receiving unit 56 that receives a command uttered by the user;
a communication unit 51 that receives recipe data from the outside;
a notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
and a control device 40,
The input operation unit 15 has a plurality of touch-type input keys for selecting one of a plurality of cooking modes,
The input operation unit 15 transmits a detection signal of the touch operation of the input key to the control device 40,
After activating the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays the standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
The control device 40 transmits information (character information specifying the input key to be operated first) 530, 531, 532 specifying the touch input keys (for example, 153M, 153L) corresponding to the cooking mode. displayed in a list state on the guidance screen 16MA (see FIG. 81),
When one of the heat cooking modes is selected by a specific input key (for example, 153M, 153L), the control device 40 selects the voice input mode from the detection signal corresponding to the touch state of the input key. discriminating an input and enabling acquisition of recipe data CD via the communication unit;
The control device 40 receives a control condition setting command by voice for the acquired recipe data CD;
It is a configuration characterized by

With such a configuration, the input operation unit 15 can control the timing of acquiring various recipe data CDs from the outside. In addition, since it is possible to switch to voice input mode by using the touch-type input keys (for example, 153M, 153L) in the input operation section, it is possible to input the troublesome work of the input process before starting the heating operation by voice. . As a result, it is possible to improve the operability of the user US and reduce the workload.

Furthermore, one form of the heating cooker 1 disclosed in this Embodiment 3 is
a first heating means HM1 for heating an object to be heated placed on the top plate 3;
a second heating means HM2 for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6;
an input operation unit 15;
a notification unit 90 having a central display unit 16M;
and a control device 40,
The control device 40 has a cooperative cooking mode KM3 in which one cooking is performed by driving the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 with a time difference,
After activating the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays the standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
In the standby initial screen 16MH, reference information 1 common to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 (common information 60N during standby) and a plurality of heat cooking modes KM1 to KM3) are displayed. Or display at least one of the reference information 2 (descriptions 525 to 527, 533 to 535) indicating the operation of the input operation unit 15 for selecting the cooking mode,
The input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R for selecting cooking modes or cooking menus of three types (cooperation, combination, and single),
The input operation unit 15 determines whether or not it is necessary to switch the voice input mode (voice input mode 1) from the touch state of the input key, and issues a voice input mode support signal MC1.
After activating the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays the standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
When the voice input mode correspondence signal MC1 is received from the input operation unit 15 during the display period of the standby initial screen 16MH, the control device 40 requests acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51. and accepting a control condition setting command by voice of the user US;
It is a configuration characterized by

With such a configuration, the input operation unit 15 can control the timing of acquiring various recipe data CDs from the outside. In addition, since it is possible to switch to voice input mode by using the touch-type input keys (for example, 153M, 153L) in the input operation section, it is possible to input the troublesome work of the input process before starting the heating operation by voice. . As a result, it is possible to improve the operability of the user US and reduce the workload.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, the configuration is such that the guide screen 16MA is temporarily and automatically displayed. Therefore, the user US can easily select one of the cooking modes KM1 to KM3) and operate the input operation unit 15 for selecting the cooking mode.

Also in the third embodiment, as with the cooking device 1 relating to the first disclosure, the cooking device 1 provides specific notification (common information 60N during standby) on the standby initial screen 16MH during the initial standby period TP. is displayed), and the recipe data CD can be acquired by the data acquisition unit 53 when the selection unit (input key 153M, etc.) of the voice input mode 1 is selected and operated.

Therefore, after turning on the main power switch 20, during the initial standby period TP,
(1) Providing the user US with the standby common information 60N.
(2) After the audio input mode is selected, the recipe data (including the recipe data of the control menus of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM1) relating to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be received from the CD.
By controlling the acquisition timing of the recipe data CD from the outside, it is possible to prevent the recipe data CD of another cooking menu from being inadvertently received during the selection of the cooking mode or the setting of the control conditions.

Furthermore, since the input keys (154M, 153L, etc.) that are the selection part of the voice input mode 1 are also used to acquire the recipe data CD, the number of operation keys (operation parts) of the input operation part 15 is can be avoided, and it is possible to prevent deterioration of operability by the user US.

Also in the third embodiment, it is possible to enjoy the various merits described in the first embodiment with respect to the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

Embodiment 4.
FIG. 84 shows the heating cooker 1 according to Embodiment 4, and describes the operation steps of the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1 from the activation of the heating cooker 1 to just before the start of cooking. It is what I did. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the operation of the heating cooker 1 before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 86 is a plan view showing the operation of the central operation section and the central display section. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing the operation of the communication terminal. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configurations of the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 83 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

In this Embodiment 4, the structure of the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1 shown in Embodiment 1 is changed.
In addition, unlike the first to third embodiments, the cooking for acquiring the recipe data CD is limited to two modes, namely, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.

Since the heating cooker 1 of the fourth embodiment has the audio signal receiving unit 56 and the audio signal analyzing unit 58 as shown in the first embodiment, the heating cooker 1 itself can receive voice input. It has a function that can receive and decode it and convert it into command data (command signal), but the heating cooker 1 does not have such a function, and an external information processing device (information processing terminal instrument) may be used. For example, an audio input/output device 1000 (not shown) called a smart speaker may be used.

In the fourth embodiment, when the recipe acquisition key 453, which will be described later, is operated while the standby initial screen 16MH (described in FIG. 86) is displayed, the "voice input mode 1" is started immediately after this. .

Next, FIG. 84 will be described.
In FIG. 84, step SU1 is the same as the display of the standby initial screen 16MH described with reference to FIG. 48, and redundant description will be omitted. The display contents of the standby initial screen 16MH are slightly different from those in the first to third embodiments, and will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 84, after a step (step SU1) in which the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display unit 16M, in step SU1A, communication with an external device (the communication terminal device 200 or the cloud server 300) is performed. When the automatic connection operation is performed and the communication connection is successfully established, the recipe data CD acquisition standby mode is entered (step SU1A).

The next step SU1B is one of the menus of the "function setting mode" that can be changed by the input key 151KP, and some functions can be omitted by the user US's prior setting. . Therefore, in this FIG. 84, it is indicated by a dashed frame.
The reason why such a function setting mode is provided is that a user US who is accustomed (skilled) to the operation can quickly perform an operation input.

In the default state in which the function setting is not changed with the input keys 151KP, the input functions of the input keys 153M and 154M are enabled and the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed to prompt the user for input.

On the other hand, if the input key 151KP is pressed in advance to cancel the default setting and switch to the "omission mode", after setting the "function setting mode", part of the operation of step SU1B is omitted. . In other words, it is possible to proceed to the next step SU1C without waiting for the update of the display information of the standby initial screen 16MH described in FIG. The display itself of the standby initial screen 16MH is not omitted.

After step SU1A, the user US can proceed to the step of obtaining the recipe data CD (step SU1C) by touching one of the input keys 153M and 154M.

As another method, the user US can proceed to the recipe data CD acquisition step (step SU1C) by operating the recipe acquisition key 453 after step SU1A.

When the communication terminal device 200 is operated to transmit the recipe data CD held in the communication terminal device 200 to the heating cooker 1, transmission of the recipe data CD is started. Then, the data acquisition unit 53 of the control device 40 checks whether it is a predetermined communication format (step SU1C). Then, it confirms that it is in the reception completion state (step SU2).

At the stage of step SU2, when it is confirmed that the acquisition of the recipe data CD has started, the "input inhibition period" TC starts from the stage of step SU2.
When the "input prohibited period" TC starts, the input functions of various input keys in the input operation unit 15 are disabled by the control device 40 .

For example, the input functions of various input keys are disabled as follows.
(1) Since the input function of the input key 153M is invalidated by the control device 40, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected. Exceptionally, however, the operation button (input key) 20A of the main power switch 20 is kept valid, so that the power can be cut off at any time. Exceptionally, the input key 152M maintains its input function. Therefore, if the input key 152M is pressed at this stage, acquisition of the recipe data CD is canceled, the recipe data CD is erased, and the step Return to stage SU1A.
Note that the input function of the recipe acquisition key 453 is also invalidated. Blinking and continuous light emission of the corresponding light emitting portion 21M also end.

By disabling these input functions, during the input prohibition period TC, the central operation unit 15 is in a state in which setting input of control conditions cannot be performed by either touch input or voice input.

During the "input prohibition period" TC, the control device 40 compares each component of the heating cooker 1 with the latest state and determines whether or not the conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied.

When it is determined that the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 are simultaneously satisfied (SU6), the identification information 167 included in the recipe data CD acquired from the external device (the communication terminal device 200 or the cloud server 300) is sent to the central It is displayed on the display unit 16M. In this case, identification information (for example, "name: hamburger") is displayed in the first specific screen 16M1 (step SU7).

In FIG. 84, description of the step (SU7A) for displaying the food component display screen 16M1A and the food component display screen 16M1B as described in FIG. 30 is omitted.

A "recipe data changeable period" TD starts when the identification information (for example, "name: hamburger") 167 is displayed in the first specific screen 16M1. This recipe data changeable period TD ends when the cooking start input key 151M is pressed.

When the "recipe data changeable period" TD begins, the input functions of various input keys disabled during the "input prohibited period" TC are canceled by the controller 40.

Therefore, in the "recipe data changeable period" TD, the control conditions (thermal power value, thermal power level, Various conditions such as target temperature, heating time, etc.) can be adjusted by voice input by the user US.Setting data for control conditions can also be input by touch input.However, some control conditions cannot be changed. , depending on the cooking menu, and when the input of the control conditions is finished, the process advances to a preparation period (waiting state) for starting cooking (step SU8).

The heating cooker 1 of the fourth embodiment includes the audio signal receiving unit 56 and the audio signal analyzing unit 58 as in the first embodiment. You can input by voice without relying on

On the other hand, the case where the control device 40 compares the state of the heating cooker 1 with the latest state at the stage of step SU3 and determines that the permission conditions 1 and 2 are not satisfied (step SU4) will be described.

The contents of the standby initial screen 16HM in the central display section 16M are partially changed, and the fact that the recipe data CD acquired from the external device cannot be executed by the current heating cooker 1 is displayed in characters. In addition, the voice notification unit 50 also gives voice notification of the same purpose (step SU5A).

Further, in step SU5A, the communication unit 51 sends a "disapproval notification" to the effect that "recipe data CD cannot be used at present" to communication terminal 200 or cloud server 300 that has transmitted the recipe data CD. Send from Then, the transmission side (communication terminal device 200) of the recipe data CD notifies the latest status of the heating cooker 1 so that it can be understood.

From the time of step SU1A shown in FIG. 84 to immediately before step SU2, the restriction unit 55 does not restrict external acquisition of the recipe data CD. The restriction unit 55 permits acquisition of the recipe data CD from the outside under "certain conditions".

The above-mentioned "fixed condition" means that, for example, when the recipe data CD is acquired from the outside once, the recipe data CD cannot be acquired thereafter (until the cooking process based on the previously acquired recipe data CD is completed). be.

During the input prohibition period TC after step SU2, the restriction unit 55 prohibits the user US from changing the control conditions such as heating power and heating temperature by voice input with respect to the once acquired recipe data CD.

During the input prohibition period TC, even if the control condition setting data is successfully transmitted from the communication terminal device 200 or the cloud server 300, the data (hereinafter referred to as "unauthorized data") has already been obtained. It is not reflected in the heat cooking of the recipe data CD. The unauthorized data is automatically erased when the cooking process of the recipe data CD is finished and the main power switch 20 is turned off.

Even if "unauthorized data" is obtained during the input prohibition period TC, this unauthorized data will be cannot be used.

When the input prohibition period TC ends and the next "recipe data changeable period" TD begins, the control conditions such as heating power can be changed by touch operation of the input operation unit 15 or voice input. However, even in this case, new recipe data CD cannot be acquired from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of one linked cooking menu that is scheduled to be cooked at this stage is completed. If it is desired to acquire another recipe data CD and execute another cooking menu, it is necessary to once cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM3 with the input key 152M.

With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent inadvertent reception of another cooking menu (including the control menu of the combined cooking mode and the control menu of the single cooking mode) during the cooperative cooking, and the cooking of the received recipe data 2 is prevented. The menu can be executed stably.
Furthermore, due to careless reception of the recipe data CD of another cooking menu in the middle of the cooking process, the operation of the control device 40 may be hindered, or the user US may be misunderstood or confused. can be prevented.

Next, FIG. 85 will be described.
A basic operation program from turning on the main power source to starting preparation for cooking is stored in the storage device 41 inside the control device 40 .
Since the heating cooker 1 of FIG. 85 is of the built-in type, the power plug (not shown) is always connected to the commercial (AC) power supply from the time the kitchen furniture 600 is installed.
Therefore, the user US presses the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 to turn on the power (step SW1 in FIG. 85).

Then, as described in the first embodiment, a predetermined low power supply voltage is supplied to control device 40 via the DC power conversion unit (not shown) of power supply circuit 57, and control device 40 is activated.
The control program of the control device 40 itself starts diagnosing whether there is an abnormality in itself (SW2).

Relevant circuits of the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 check their own abnormalities. The control device 40 centrally collects the data of these check results and determines whether or not there is an abnormality.

In step SW2, "transmit start-up information to the outside" is transmitted from the communication unit 51 to the "integrated information management device" or "integrated power control device" (HEMS controller) in the living space such as the kitchen 601 (not shown). ) or the like (not shown), the operating state data OS for notifying the start of operation of the heating cooker 1 is transmitted. Alternatively, the operating state data OS may be transmitted to the cloud server 300 by connecting to the network NW via an access point such as a wireless router 340 (not shown).

In step SW2, "obtain information (power consumption regulation command, etc.) from the outside" means that the control device (not shown), the communication terminal device 200, the cloud server 300, or the like is received via the communication unit 51. Acquisition of command signals (also called "command data") and information from

In step SW2, the communication unit 51 accesses the home control device and acquires information such as cooking menus and recipe data useful for health management within the range previously set by the user US. For example, information previously transmitted by the user US of the cooking device 1 to the cloud server 300 via the Internet line using the communication terminal 200 or the like can be obtained immediately after the control device 40 is activated. When some information is acquired, the information may be displayed on the common screen (initial screen during standby) 16MH.

The control device 40 activates the display section 16 when no abnormality of the heating cooker 1 is found. Then, a message to the effect that "there is no abnormality, so cooking can be started" is displayed (SW3). The display screen at this initial time point is the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH described in FIG. 45 and the like of the first embodiment.
Therefore, standby common information 60N such as information indicating that the power is on is displayed. Simultaneously with these displays, the voice notification unit 50 notifies similar contents by voice.

After completing the abnormality determination as described above, the control device 40 activates the display unit 16 and the voice notification unit 50 . At this point, an initial waiting period TP is started.

Then, the display unit 16 and the voice notification unit 50 perform notification for prompting selection of the heating means and voice guidance (SW4).
In the next step SW4P, it is determined whether or not the special input key 453 (see FIG. 86) of the central operation section 15M has been operated. This input key 453 is hereinafter referred to as a "recipe acquisition key". When the recipe acquisition key 453 is touch-operated, the process proceeds to step SW5. This recipe acquisition key 453 may be "long pressed" or "short pressed" because it does not affect the input to the control device 40, so either is acceptable.

Similar to step SU1B described in FIG. 84, this step SW4P is a step provided by default setting, and the input key 151KP is pressed in advance to cancel this default setting and switch to the "omit mode". In this case, after setting the "function setting mode", part of the operation of step SW4P is omitted. In other words, the display of the standby initial screen 16MH having the display contents shown in FIG. 86 is omitted. Then, it is possible to proceed to the next step SW5.

In the next step SW5, it is determined whether or not the recipe acquisition key 453 (see FIG. 86) of the central operation section 15M has been operated. When the recipe acquisition key 453 is touch-operated, the process proceeds to step SW6.

When step SW5 is determined as "No", the process proceeds to step SW11.
At step SW7, it is determined whether or not the input key 153L or 153R has been operated as third selection means for selecting the "single cooking mode" KM1 using the first heating means (induction heating means) HM1.

In order to select the "single cooking mode" of the first heating means HM1, the user US operates either the input key 153L of the left operating section 15L or the input key 153R of the right operating section 15R. There is a need.

Therefore, in this step SW11, if either one of the input keys 153L or 153R is operated, the determination is "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step SW12. When neither of the input keys 153L or 153R has been operated, the process returns to step SW5.

Step SW14 between step SW5 and step SW11 manages the upper limit of operation time.
Since the elapsed time from the time of SW4 is measured, it is checked whether the elapsed time does not exceed the time limit TX (for example, 30 minutes). Process 1 (see step SM6 in FIG. 39 of Embodiment 1) is performed.

At this step SW11, the voice input mode is started from the time when it is determined as "Yes". Then, the process proceeds to step SW12.
In step SW12, the display of the standby initial screen 16MH is stopped, and instead the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed (step SW13). The third specific screen 16M3 may be the same as or different from that shown in FIG. 46 of the first embodiment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SW5 that the recipe acquisition key 453 has been operated, the process proceeds to step SW6.
Step SW6 is a process for starting acceptance of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2. A check of the contents (data format, etc.) of the received recipe data CD is executed here.

At step SW7, it is determined whether or not proper recipe data CD for the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has been obtained. As described in the first embodiment, the "permission condition" is determined for the recipe data CD, and if the condition is satisfied and acquired, step SW7 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step SW8.
In step SW8, the display of the standby initial screen 16MH is stopped, and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed instead.

On the other hand, if step SW7 is "No", the process proceeds to the next step SW9.
At step SW9, it is determined whether or not the recipe data CD for the combined cooking mode KM2 has been acquired. In this step SW9, it is determined whether or not the specific permission condition 3 is satisfied even in the composite cooking mode KM2. For example, if the heat from the high-temperature cooking used immediately before remains and the temperature in the heating chamber 6 is high (for example, 90° C. or higher), the control menu automatically controls the microwave cooking based on the temperature detected by the temperature sensor. ("Warm up" described in FIG. 13) cannot be executed, so the determination is "No".

If the determination in step SW9 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SW10. In step SW10, the display of the standby initial screen 16MH is stopped, and the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed instead.
If the determination in step SW9 is "No", the process returns to the previous step SW7.

In addition, at the stage of step SW8 or SW10, the communication unit 51 transmits the recipe data CD from the outside to the "domestic control device" (not shown) and the cloud server 300. A specific signal is sent to indicate that the operation can be performed in response to the The specific signal is transmitted to the cloud server 300 as one type of the operating state data OS.

After steps SW8, SW10, and SW13, although not shown, when a command to start the heating operation is received through a process of inputting control conditions for cooking with heat, the process proceeds to the cooking process of each cooking mode. .

Next, FIG. 86 will be described. This FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the central operation section 16M and the central display section 16M.
FIG. 86 shows the stage of step SW5 of FIG. An initial standby screen 16MH is displayed on the central display portion 16M.

In FIG. 86, 453 is the recipe acquisition key. The light emitting unit 21M corresponding to the recipe acquisition key 453 starts blinking (or continuously emitting light) after the connection with the communication terminal device 200 is successful, and the operation of "acquisition permission" of the recipe data CD is performed. User US is urged to do

On the other hand, the acquisition operation support information 60P for prompting the operation of the recipe acquisition key 453 is displayed on the standby initial screen 16MH. Also, if the automatic connection with the communication terminal 200 is successful, there is a possibility of cooking by receiving the recipe data CD, so the display information 60P1 of "recipe cooking mode" is displayed. At this time, the operation of acquiring the recipe data CD has not yet started, so the type of recipe data CD cannot be displayed.

After the acquisition of the recipe data CD is started, the reception operation display screen 16MM is displayed on the standby initial screen 16MH. Although not shown, the reception operation display screen 16MM preferably displays a progress mark 16F as information indicating the degree of progress of reception as described in FIG. 65 of the second embodiment.

Next, FIG. 87 will be described. This FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing one additional function of the operation of acquiring the recipe data CD from the cloud server 300 in the communication terminal device 200 . The following description assumes that the basic internal configuration of communication terminal device 200 is the same as that shown in FIG. 60 of the second embodiment.

The flowchart shown in FIG. 87 shows the steps executed by the control program of the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200. FIG.
When the recipe data CD is acquired from the cloud server 300 (step SL11), the operations after step SL12 are started.

It is determined whether or not a predetermined optional function has been set in advance by the touch operation unit 215 (step SL12). If this option has not been set, the process ends.

If option settings have been made, the process proceeds to step SL13. At step SL<b>13 , the data of the total amount of food components and the total amount of nutritional components in “target period 1 ” previously set by user US using touch operation unit 215 are extracted from the data of heating cooker database 217 .

For example, if the user US has set a “target period 1” of one day or one week in the past, this communication terminal device 200 acquires from the cloud server 300 and transmits to the heating cooker 1 during the target period Recipe data CD is searched.

The communication terminal device 200 acquires the recipe data CD from the cloud server 300 and transmits it to the heating cooker 1, and the recipe data CD is stored in the heating cooker database 217 each time. "Food ingredient/nutrient ingredient data" 226 of each recipe data CD is also stored.

Therefore, the central processing unit 212 reads out the "food ingredient/nutrient ingredient data" 226 corresponding to the recipe data CD sent to the heating cooker 1, and aggregates the accumulated values only during the "target period 1". .

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of data aggregation exceeds a preset value set by the user US (step SL14). For example, in the food component/nutrition component data 226, when the cumulative amount of “energy (calorie conversion value)” and “fat” exceeds the set value, the loudspeaker 214 notifies. Alternatively, it is displayed on the terminal-side display unit (display screen) 216 to alert the user US (step SL15).

87 is executed each time the recipe data CD is acquired from the cloud server 300, and is preferably notified to the user US before the recipe data CD is transmitted to the heating cooker 1. . Note that the operation shown in FIG. 87 does not need to be individually input by the user US each time. Do not force any operation.

Summary of Embodiment 4.
As is clear from the above description, the fourth embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 relating to the fifth disclosure as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker related to the first disclosure is
heating means for heating the object to be heated N (first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, etc.);
an input operation unit 15 that receives commands from a user US;
a communication unit 51 that receives the recipe data CD from the outside;
a notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
and a control device 40,
The input operation unit 15 has input keys (151M to 159M, etc.) for selecting cooking contents, and a recipe acquisition key 453 for permitting acquisition of the recipe data CD,
When the recipe acquisition key 453 is operated, the controller 40 is instructed to start the voice input mode,
After activating the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays the standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
When the recipe acquisition key is operated while the standby initial screen 16MH is being displayed, the control device 40 enables acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, and The configuration is characterized in that a control condition setting command for the recipe data CD is accepted in the voice input mode.

With such a configuration, the timing of acquiring various recipe data CDs from the outside can be controlled by the recipe acquisition key 453 of the input operation unit 15 . In addition, by using the recipe acquisition key (input key) 453, it is possible not only to permit recipe acquisition, but also to issue a command to switch to the voice input mode. . As a result, it is possible to improve the operability of the user US and reduce the workload. In addition, since one recipe acquisition key (input key) 453 is used to perform two functions of acquiring the recipe data CD and switching to the voice input mode, the number of input keys is not increased, and the input operation unit Overcrowding of input keys on 15 can be avoided.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 related to the fifth disclosure is
The input operation unit 15 has a recipe acquisition key 453 and touch-type input keys (153M, 154M, 153L, 153R, etc.) for selecting three types (cooperation, compound, single) cooking mode or cooking menu,
The input operation unit 15 generates a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 for switching the voice input mode (voice input mode 1) by operating the recipe acquisition key 453,
When the control device 40 receives the voice input mode correspondence signal MC1, the control device 40 enables the acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, and receives a control condition setting command from the user US by voice. It was an acceptable configuration.

With such a configuration, it is possible to select one of three cooking modes (linked, combined, and single) or a cooking menu by operating the touch input keys. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker 1 that can handle various types of cooking.

Further, the recipe acquisition key (input key) 453 is uniform for two of the three cooking modes (linked, combined, and single), the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2, as described with reference to FIG. (commonly) to command switching to the voice input mode (steps SW5 and SW6), the number of input keys is not increased, and the overcrowded state of the input keys on the input operation unit 15 can be avoided.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the fourth embodiment, when the recipe acquisition key 453 needs to be operated, the standby initial screen 16MH displays the operation support information 60P for the recipe acquisition key 453, and , the initial standby screen 16MH is configured to display the display information 60P1 of the "recipe cooking mode".
As a result, the user US can be accurately guided to the operation for acquiring the recipe data CD, so that the user can avoid erroneous operation, and as a result, the cooker 1 with good operability can be realized.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 4, the heat cooking system regarding the 3rd disclosure was implement|achieved by the following structures.
That is, one form of the heat cooking system related to the third disclosure is
a heating cooker 1 that heats the object to be heated N;
a communication terminal device 200 connected to the heating cooker 1 by wireless communication;
and
The communication terminal device 200 has a function of transmitting recipe data CD to the heating cooker,
The heating cooker 1 has a function of acquiring the recipe data CD from the communication terminal device 200 after the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed,
The heating cooker 1 has a function of switching between a touch input mode and a voice input mode according to the touch state of the touch input key,
The heating cooker 1 receives input of control conditions related to the recipe data CD acquired from the communication terminal device 200 in the state of the voice input mode.
It is a configuration characterized by

According to the heat cooking system of the third disclosure, heat cooking can be performed using the recipe data CD acquired from the outside using the network.
Further, when acquiring the recipe data CD, it is possible to change to the voice input mode by using the touch input key, so that when inputting the control conditions related to the acquired recipe data CD after that, it is possible to input by voice. This can contribute to improving the efficiency of US input operations and reducing the input load.

Furthermore, one form of the heat cooking system of this third disclosure is
The communication terminal device 200 has a function of narrowing down the food components or nutritional components of the cooking menu that is the target of the recipe data CD to be transmitted to the heating cooker 1 from the database (heating cooker database 217) held. death,
The communication terminal device 200 has a function of transmitting to the heating cooker 1 the executable recipe data CD and information indicating the food ingredients or nutritional ingredients of the recipe data CD to be cooked. Doing things,
It is a configuration characterized by

With such a configuration, when a specific cooking menu (for example, “ratatouille”) is selected, information on the ingredients and nutritional components of the food related to the cooking menu can be easily learned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the selection operation of the cooking menu by the user US. For example, the user US can select an appropriate cooking menu from information on food ingredients and nutritional ingredients in accordance with family health management, dietary restrictions, and the like, thereby contributing to improvement of eating habits.

Furthermore, within the range of various recipe data CD2 stored in the heating cooker database 217, priority is given to, for example, those with a low energy amount (calorie conversion value) or specific nutritional components (e.g., high iron content). can be selectively selected.
Therefore, the range of useful information that can be provided when the user US selects a cooking menu is expanded, and the operability for the user US can be improved.

With this system, for example, the user US can easily check information on food ingredients and nutritional ingredients in advance in response to family health management, dietary restrictions, etc., and can select an appropriate cooking menu. From this, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of eating habits.

Further, the communication terminal device 200 transmits data of a database (heating cooker database 217) holding food ingredients or nutritional ingredients of the cooking menu to be transmitted to the heat cooker 1 for the recipe data CD. It has a function of judging whether or not there is a food component or nutritional component exceeding a preset value preset by the user US (see step SL14 in FIG. 86).

Therefore, when the cumulative amount of energy (calorie conversion value), fat, etc. exceeds the set value, the loudspeaker 214 notifies it by voice. Alternatively, it is displayed on the terminal-side display unit (display screen) 216 to alert the user US, thereby contributing to dietary restrictions and health management of the user US.

Embodiment 5.
88 is a configuration diagram of a cooking system according to Embodiment 5. FIG. 89 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 88. FIG. 90 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 showing the central display section and its peripheral section of the heating cooker constituting the cooking system shown in FIG. 88. FIG. 91 is an operation explanatory drawing 1 showing the central display portion of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 88. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing input operation steps and display steps of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 88. FIG. FIG. 93 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the central display section in Modification 1 of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 88 ; FIG. 94 is an operation explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the central display section in Modification 1 shown in FIG. 93 ; FIG. 95 is an operation explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the central display section in Modification 1 shown in FIG. 93 ; 96 is a block diagram showing part of the input operation unit and the control device in Modification 1 shown in FIG. 93. FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing Modified Example 2 of the display operation of the central display portion of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 88. FIG. FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing a display state in still another modified example 3 of the modified example 2 shown in FIG. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configurations of the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

FIG. 88 will be described.
This fifth embodiment is characterized in that a small portable voice input/output device (a kind of information processing terminal device) 1000 is used instead of the communication terminal device 200 shown in the second embodiment. .

The provision of the third server 323 is also different from the first to fourth embodiments.
The third server 323 is connected to the first server 321 via wired or wireless communication (network NW) 205 . The first server 321 has a food ingredient database 321P.

The third server 323 has an inventory information storage unit 324 and a food consumption determination unit 325 . The inventory information storage unit 324 stores "inventory data" SD1 transmitted from the refrigerator 403 via the first server 321 and the network NW (205). Information is updated from time to time. Note that the input/output unit 324A of the third server 323 is omitted from the drawing.

As described in Embodiment 1 (especially FIG. 7), a home gateway 411 in a living space such as a kitchen 601 (not shown) or an information processing device 411 (HEMS controller) or the like called (not shown)), the inventory status is checked at any time, and the inventory data SD1 may be updated.

The food consumption determination unit 325 acquires food information (inventory data SD1) from the inventory information storage unit 324, and estimates the amount of food consumed from changes in inventory.
The food consumption determination unit 325 makes a determination each time cooking is performed. The determination is made by inputting the cooking implementation data CN from the heating cooker 1, and inputting the input data and the variation of the inventory data SD1 acquired from the inventory information storage unit 324, that is, the information (change information), and analyze the types and amounts of ingredients actually consumed by machine learning methods. The machine learning method is not particularly limited, and for example, a known machine learning method such as neural network is applied.

For example, when the food ingredient consumption determination unit 325 acquires the data of cooking "hamburger" in the linked cooking mode KM3 from the heating cooker 1, the cooking execution data CN on the heating cooker 1 side and the stock in the refrigerator 403 A comparison is made with the change in the amount of ingredients by type from the inventory data SD1. The ingredients in the refrigerator 403 before cooking (for example, 300 grams of beef) are confirmed by the inventory management system of the refrigerator 403 (for example, camera video data for inventory confirmation, sensor of the corresponding freezer of the refrigerator 403, etc.) after cooking. If not, it is presumed that the beef was used. In addition, in this judgment, data comparing the general cooking menu and the type of ingredients used is also used.

As shown in FIG. 89, the heating cooker 1 of the fifth embodiment includes the audio signal receiving section 56 as shown in the first embodiment. Since it also has the audio signal analysis unit 58, the heating cooker 1 itself has a function of processing audio input to select recipe data and menus. An input key 180 for selecting voice input mode 2 is also provided.

The voice input/output device 1000, which is one of the features of the fifth embodiment, is slightly different from the smartphone (communication terminal device) 200 of the second embodiment in that it receives commands from the user US by voice and It is a device that notifies information to the US. For example, it is an input terminal device called a smart speaker or an AI speaker. In addition, it does not have a function of acquiring the recipe data CD and providing it to the heating cooker 1 by wireless communication or near field communication (NFC).

When the user US gives a command to the cooking device 1 near the cooking device 1, the voice input/output device 1000 converts the voice (natural language) uttered by the user US near the cooking device 1 into a voice signal. to get as

The voice input/output device 1000 has a microphone (not shown) for collecting voice of the user US and a speaker 1001 for emitting voice. The speaker 1001 is used to inform the user of the results of voice input, guidance for prompting the next input, and the like.
The voice input/output device 1000 is connected to the second server 322 connected by the network (wireless communication network) NW when the user US turns on the power. The second server 322 has a speech translation function and a search function. The power source of the voice input/output device 1000 and the power source of the heating cooker 1 are not interlocked at all, and can be turned on and off independently of each other.

When an audio signal (audio data) VS is transmitted from the audio input/output device 1000, the second server 322 acquires the audio (natural language) uttered by the user US as an audio signal, and receives a command signal (request) from the user US. B) and transmitted to the first server 321 .

Based on the request B from the second server 322 , the first server 321 can finally generate the remote control signal RS for the heat cooker 1 . Also, the recipe data CD acquired from the recipe data providing server 301 can be provided to the heating cooker 1 .

That is, in this Embodiment 5, the form which provides the recipe data CD to the heating cooker 1 from the communication terminal device 200 (refer Embodiment 2 grade|etc.,), such as a smart phone, is not employ|adopted.
FIG. 88 shows that the recipe data CD is transmitted from the first server 321 to the heat cooker 1. In this case, the recipe data CD includes, for example, "warming up" of the heat cooker 1. It includes command signals for setting the time, heat power, etc. for each of the control menu and the cooking menu of "hamburger", in other words, commands (command data).
In addition, these commands may be generated and transmitted several times or more before the heating cooker 1 determines one control menu or cooking menu. In particular, when the content input by the user's voice is one phrase (for example, "warm up"), in order to set the content of a lower-order instruction (for example, heating temperature and heat power) necessary to execute it, The first server 321 generates an instruction (notification command signal) for operation guidance such as "Please set the temperature" to the heating cooker 1, and causes the heating cooker 1 to notify. are also included in the "recipe data CD" in FIG.

Since the first server 321 stores various remote control data for the heating cooker 1 in the storage unit 321R, in response to the request B from the second server 322, the necessary operation support data GS1 is sent to the second server 321. Send to server 322 . Therefore, the second server 322 transmits to the voice input/output unit 1000 the operation support data GS2 that can be converted into voice data in correspondence with the operation support data GS1. The user US, who gives a command by voice, can confirm the result of his/her own input by voice emitted from a speaker (not shown) of the voice input/output device 1000, and can receive appropriate guidance for the next input. In other words, it is possible to input by voice in an interactive form, and it is possible to sequentially give detailed conditions to deeper layers in the control structure.

With the basic configuration described above, even if the user US is near the cooker 1, the user's hands are occupied during preparation for cooking, processing of ingredients, etc., and the input operation of the cooker 1 can be performed. Even when the frequency of directly touching the portion 15 is limited, the heating cooker 1 can be remotely operated by natural vocalization (voice), which is convenient.

The rest of the configuration of the second server 322 is the same as the configuration of the second server 322 described in the second embodiment, so redundant description will be omitted.
In addition, as described in the second embodiment, the second server 322 also issues, as one type of request B, a command to extract the desired recipe data CD from the database of the recipe information providing server 301 .

As described above, one of the features of the fifth embodiment is that the voice input/output device 1000 transmits the target recipe data CD to the heating cooker 1, unlike the communication terminal device 200 of the second embodiment. There is no function to

Further, the voice input/output unit 1000 can issue commands regarding input operations corresponding to all cooking modes including the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 to the second server 322. However, in all the cooking modes including the linked cooking mode KM3, the command to start the heating operation is not included. Therefore, the voice input/output device 1000 cannot issue a command to start the heating operation of the heating cooker 1 via the first server 321 (command transmission). This is for safety reasons.

Command information for various functions that can be set using the function setting keys 151KP of the heating cooker 1 cannot be transmitted from the voice input/output device 1000 and cannot be generated by the first server 321 either. In order to enter the function setting mode, the user US needs to operate the function setting key 151KP of the heating cooker 1 .

The control device 40 shown in FIG. 89 has an execution program for the control menu (“RG continuous cooking”) of the combined cooking mode KM2 described in Embodiment 1 (particularly, microwave grill heating in FIG. 37). .

The "RG continuous cooking" is cooking by combining microwave heating and oven heating. There are two types:
(1) A pattern in which microwave heating is first performed for a certain period of time, and after that time has elapsed, heating is automatically performed by the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b.
(2) Microwave heating is performed until it reaches 80 ° C or a temperature set by the user (however, any one temperature can be set from 80 ° C to 100 ° C or less), and then reserved for use A pattern in which automatic switching to oven heating is performed by the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b for a set time or a period until reaching a temperature set by the user US.

As described above, in the "RG continuous cooking", the cooking progresses even if the user US does not issue a command to start cooking again in the middle, and the user US does not have to be at the cooking device 1 all the time. Therefore, the burden on the user US is reduced. Since it uses two heating sources, it is also one of the compound cooking modes KM2.

In the RG continuous cooking control menu, the user US cannot select the heating power value (watts) during microwave heating, and can select the heating intensity by selecting one of "weak", "strong", and the like.

Such "RG continuous cooking" can be selected by the central operation unit 15M of the input operation unit 15. FIG.
In addition, in this "RG continuous cooking", the central operation unit 15M has an order selection key (not shown) so that the user US can select which of microwave heating and oven heating should be performed first. I have. Alternatively, the order can be set in voice input mode.

As described in the first embodiment, also in the fifth embodiment, the input operation unit 15 is provided with the input keys 151KP (see FIG. 93). When the input key 151KP is pressed, the controller 40 switches to the "function setting mode".

Next, FIG. 90 will be described.
FIG. 90 is a plan view of the central operation unit 15M, which is one of the features of the fifth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 90, the display screen portion of the central display portion 16M has a fourth area (fourth display area) 28 in addition to the first area 22 to third area 24 . The first area 22, the second area 23, and the third area 24 are the same as those described in the first embodiment, and are display areas whose substantial display areas are automatically variable. However, the fourth area 28 has a fixed area and is elongated so as to lie in contact with the rear of the first to third areas 22 to 24 .

The surface of the central display section 16M is covered with a glass plate, and substantially the entire area except for the peripheral portion is a capacitive touch panel that senses the touch of the user's finger. Therefore, the touch panel portion is hereinafter referred to as an "operation panel" 351. FIG. When the central display portion 16M is arranged under the top plate 3, the glass plate (operation panel 351) can be also used by the top plate 3, but may be configured by another panel.

The entire touch panel 351 is divided into a “touch restriction portion” corresponding to the fourth area 28 and a portion (touch recommended portion) functioning as the first area 22 to the fourth area 24 .
An electrode 341 is formed by vapor deposition, printing, or the like on the back side of the touch regulation portion. When the touch panel 351 is composed of a part of the top plate 3, the electrode 341 is formed on the back side of the top plate 3 by means of vapor deposition, printing, or the like. Further, another touch sensing electrode (not shown) is arranged in the first area 22 to the third area 24 as well.

The electrode 341 transmits a contact detection signal to a contact detection unit (not shown). ) is detected from a change in capacitance.

Even when the object to be heated N (not shown) such as a metal pot is projected to the position of the central display portion 16M (abnormal state), the excessive approach of the object to be heated N is detected by the electrode 341. can. Therefore, the control device 40 can detect an abnormal placement such that the object to be heated N is abnormally approaching or covering the central display portion 16M, and issues an alarm. In particular, when cooking with edible oil such as tempura, the tempura pan (object to be heated) is at a high temperature. The portion 16M may become overheated and cause a failure. However, in this fifth embodiment, such a situation can also be detected by the electrodes 341, and an alarm can be issued to the user.

Also, the electrode 341 and the contact detection section (not shown) function as a safety device that prevents the user from touching the "touch regulation portion". In other words, the user's contact with the top plate 3, which becomes hot during induction heating, can be minimized.

The central heating status display portion 17M is divided into two stages in the front-rear direction. A grill light emitting element (LED) 311 behind the character display of "oven", an oven light emitting element (LED) 312 behind the character display of "IH", and a character display of "IH" behind A central IH light emitting element (LED) 313 is arranged.

As is clear from FIG. 90, the various input keys 154M to 159M provided in the central operation unit 16M of the first embodiment are not required in the fifth embodiment, and are therefore deleted.
Instead, a touch panel input device 350, which will be described with reference to FIG. 91 and subsequent figures, and a touch gesture determination device 353 that receives operation information on the touch panel are provided.

151M is an input key for commanding the start of the cooking process, and is a pressing operation part of a push button type mechanical switch (not shown). Similarly, 152M is an input key for instructing the end of the cooking process, and is a push operation part of a push button type mechanical switch (not shown). These input keys 151M and 152M may be composed of touch input keys as in the first embodiment.

Next, FIG. 91 will be described.
The central display section 16M is automatically activated immediately after the main power switch 20 is turned ON.
The display screen of the central display section 16M is the display screen 1 (standby initial screen 16MH) shown in FIG.

The display screen 1A automatically changes to the display screen 1A in about several seconds from the display of the standby initial screen 16MH. This display screen 1A is called a guide screen 1 (16MA1). Guidance screen 1 displays explanatory texts 525 to 527 indicating the portion to be touched first in order to select one of the three cooking modes in first area 22 to third area 24 of central display portion 16M.

In the display screens 2 and 4, 179A is the auxiliary information. This auxiliary information 179A is displayed after switching to the voice input mode.
The auxiliary information 179A is displayed adjacent to the display portions of the identification information 160 and 167 displayed on the second specific screen 16M2 and the third specific screen 16M3.

Further, touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R indicating touch operation units are displayed together with the character "select" so as to correspond to the explanations 525 to 527, respectively.

Furthermore, when the user US touches a position where one piece of touch position information 536R is displayed on the guidance screen 1 (16MA1), the screen changes to the display screen 3. FIG.
The display screen 3 is hereinafter referred to as "guidance screen 2" (16MA2). When one position of the touch position information 536L on the guide screen 2 is touched, the display screen 4 (third specific screen 16M3) is displayed.

In other words, a touch key (sensing unit) is formed in the portion of the touch position information 536R. Similarly, separate touch keys (sensing units) are also formed in the portions of the touch position information 536M and 536L.

When the user US touches the display position of the touch position information 536M on the guidance screen 16MA1, the display screen 2 is displayed. This display screen 2 is the second specific screen 16M2, and is used for input operations, confirmation of input results, etc. when executing the combined cooking mode KM2.

In the display screen 2 of FIG. 91, 34T is set temperature information indicating the target temperature ("80° C." in FIG. 90) for heating the food in the control menu "warm". Microwave heating is automatically stopped when the set temperature is detected.

As is clear from FIG. 91, when any one of the three pieces of touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R is touched, the guidance screen 1 (16MA1), the second specific screen 16M2, or the 3 Specific screen 16M3 and the like are displayed.
Therefore, since the user US can see the guidance screen 1 (16MA) at the first stage, hesitation in the input operation can be eliminated before the start of cooking, and the heating cooker 1 with high operability and convenience. can be realized.

As is clear from the above description, when any one of the touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R where the touch keys are arranged is touched, the linked cooking mode KM3 or The controller 40 determines that the combined cooking mode KM2 or the like has been selected. In other words, the display positions of the touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R function as touch input keys independent of each other in the display state.

Next, FIG. 92 will be described.
Operation steps MT1 to MT19 shown in FIG. 92 indicate input operations, display operations, voice guidance, etc. after the initial standby screen 16MH. These operation steps are specified in the respective control programs of the control device 40, the right operation section 15M, the left operation section 15L, and the central operation section 15M, but are integrated into the control program of the control device 40 only. It may be stipulated.

For the convenience of explanation, the touch position information 536L and the signal processing when the touch operation is performed on the display units of 536M and 536R are mainly performed by the input processing unit 70, the input signal analysis unit 52, and the guidance screen analysis unit 140 in the control device 40. Assuming that the processing is performed as follows.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the main power switch 20 is turned on, the standby initial screen 16MH is first displayed, and the audio notification unit 50 notifies the skeleton of the display information of the standby initial screen 16MH by voice ( step MT1).

A few seconds after step MT1, the guidance screen 1 (16MA1) is automatically displayed on the central display section 16M. Also, in accordance with the display of the guide screen 1, the voice notification unit 50 selects one of the three pieces of touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R in order to select the cooking mode desired by the user US. Such guidance is provided (step MT2). The guide screen 1 referred to here refers to the guide screen 1 (16MA1) described with reference to FIG.

In step MT2, when the touch position information 536L is touched, the input signal analysis unit 52 and the guidance screen analysis unit 140 in the control device 40 detect that the touch operation was performed at the guidance screen 16MA1 stage (step MT3). Then, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display section 16M (the display of the guide screen 1 disappears at the same time) (MT4). The content of this step is also notified by the voice notification unit 50 .

Further, when the input signal analysis unit 52 determines that the touch operation “long press” has been detected in step MT3, this determination signal is input from the input signal analysis unit 52 to the input processing unit 70 . Triggered by this input, the input processing unit 70 controls the input signal analysis unit 52 so as to correspond to the voice input mode 1 (step MT3A). Such processing is also performed in steps MT6A and MT9A, which will be described later.

After that, the user confirms the information (including the cooking menu including one identification information 167) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1, appropriately changes the control conditions and the cooking menu, and Yes) If the input key 151M is pressed, the process shifts to the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (MT5).

When the recipe data CD is to be obtained from the outside, after the display screen 1A (see FIG. 91) is displayed, the contents of the command are input by voice to the portable voice input/output device 1000, and the command is sent via the second server 322 to the second server 322. A request B is issued to the first server 321 , and a command to transmit the recipe data CD to the heat cooker 1 can be issued from the first server 321 .

By the way, in FIG. 91, when the display portion of the touch position information 536L on the central display portion 16M is touched in a “long-press” state (step MT3), the input processing portion 70 of the control device 40 activates the voice input mode program. Then, the state of the audio signal analysis unit 52 is controlled so as to be in a standby state in preparation for input from the outside (first server 321) (step MT3A).

Further, even when the display portions of the touch position information 536M and 536R on the central display portion 16M are touched in the "long press" state (steps MT6 and MT9), the input processing portion 70 executes the speech input mode program. It is activated and changed to a standby state in preparation for input from the outside (first server 321) (steps MT6A, MT9A).
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92, in the input process for all cooking modes, the touch operation on the display screen 1A (guidance screen 1, 16MA1) is detected, and after the voice input mode 1 is activated, the control is performed. Device 40 can receive and process input in speech.

On the other hand, in step MT2, when the display portion of the touch position information 536M, which is the touch key portion displayed in the guide screen 1 (16MA1), is touched (step MT6), a second specific screen is displayed on the central display portion 16M. 16M2 is displayed (the display of guidance screen 1 disappears at the same time) (MT7). The content of this step is also notified by the voice notification unit 50 .

After that, the user US confirms the information displayed on the second specific screen 16M2 (including the specific sentence 160, which is the name of one control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2), and appropriately changes the control conditions and the control menu. If the input key 151M (which is a mechanical switch) is pressed, the process shifts to the cooking process of the composite cooking mode KM2 (MT8).

Further, in step MT2, when the display portion of the touch position information 536R where the touch keys are arranged and displayed in the guide screen 1 (16MA1) is touched (step MT9), the guide screen is displayed on the central display section 16M. 2 (16MA2, see FIG. 90) is displayed (the display of guide screen 1 disappears at the same time) (MT10). The content of this step is also notified by the voice notification unit 50 .

After that, explanations 525, 526, and 527 indicating the three touched portions displayed on the guidance screen 2 (16MA2), and touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R corresponding to these on a one-to-one basis are displayed. When the user confirms that the left heating port 4L is to be used, the user touches the display portion of the touch position information 536L (MT11).

Then, the process proceeds to step MT12, the left display section (individual display section) 16L dedicated to the left heating port 4L is activated, and cooking by the left IH coil 9L can be selected. Therefore, a control menu using the first heating means HM1 (for example, "boiling water", "warming", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, information on default control conditions (thermal power, target temperature, etc.) is also displayed. Further, the content of this step MT12 is also notified by the voice notification unit 50. FIG.

In this step MT12, the step of displaying the third specific screen 30ST as shown in FIG. 91 is not illustrated, but it may be displayed on the central display section 16M.

After that, if the user US confirms the information (including the control menu) displayed on the left display section 16L, appropriately changes the control conditions and the control menu, and presses the input key 153L (which is a mechanical switch), The process shifts to the process of induction heating cooking in the left heating port 4L (MT13).

In this fifth embodiment, the input key 151L also serves as a start key for the single heating cooking mode KM1 using the left heating port 4L. After detection, etc., the induction heating operation is automatically started.

Similarly, when the display portion of the touch position information 536R displayed on the guide screen 2 (16MA2) is touched (MT17), the process proceeds to step MT18, and the right display section (individual display section) 16R dedicated to the right heating port 4R is activated. , and a control menu (for example, "boiling water", "warming", etc.) that can be performed by the right IH coil 9R is displayed.

At the same time, information on default control conditions (thermal power, target temperature, etc.) is also displayed on the right display section 16R. Furthermore, the content of this step MT18 is also notified by the voice notification unit 50. FIG. Although the display of the third specific screen 16M3 as shown in FIG. 91 is not shown in this step MT18, it may be displayed on the central display section 16M.

After that, if the user US confirms the information (including the control menu) displayed on the right display section 16R, changes the control conditions and the control menu as appropriate, and presses the input key 153R (which is a mechanical switch), The process shifts to the process of induction heating cooking in the right heating port 4R (MT19).

Furthermore, among the three pieces of touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R displayed on the guidance screen 2 (16MA2), when using the central heating port 4C, the touch position information 536M is touched (MT14).

Then, the process proceeds to step MT15, and a control menu (for example, "Keep warm", etc.) that can be executed by the central heating port 4C is displayed on the central display section 16M used by the central heating port 4C (see FIG. 91). That is, the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed.

Further, for example, an explanatory text may be displayed, such as displaying that the set temperature for "keep warm" is about 80° C. and that this "keep warm" is a control menu suitable for soup. Furthermore, the content of this step MT15 is also notified by the voice notification unit 50. FIG.

After that, the user US confirms the information (including the control menu and control conditions) displayed on the third specific screen 16M3 displayed on the central display unit 16M, changes the control conditions and the control menu as appropriate, and ( If the input key 151M (which is a mechanical switch) is pressed, the process shifts to the process of induction heating cooking in the central heating port 4C (MT16).

It is after steps MT3, MT6 and MT9 that the recipe data CD can be obtained from the outside (first server 321, communication terminal 200, etc.) described in the first embodiment.
That is, unless the user US touches any one of the three pieces of touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R, the recipe data CD is sent from the outside (first server 321, communication terminal 200, etc.) to the controller 40. don't get

Next, FIG. 93 will be described.
This FIG. 93 is an example in which the display information of the second specific screen 16M2 shown in FIG. 90 and the input method are changed. The user can directly touch the first area 22 to the third area 24 to easily change the control menu and control conditions.

FIG. 93 shows the situation immediately before starting cooking with the "RG manual" control menu in the composite cooking mode KM2. The light-emitting portion 21M corresponding to the input key 151M flashes like a star-shaped figure to prompt the user to operate.

Furthermore, FIG. 93 will be described.
In the central display portion 30, the second specific screen 16M2 displayed in the composite cooking mode KM2 has a size larger than that of the central display portion 16M of the first embodiment.
Also, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (see FIG. 94).

In general, when looking at the standard lineup of TFT liquid crystal modules that are used in this type of display unit, there are 3.5 inches, 3.97 inches, 4.3 inches, 4.6 inches, and 5.0 inches. are provided. If the screen size of the first embodiment is, for example, 3.5 inches or 3.97 inches, the screen size of the fifth embodiment can be one or two steps larger than that. However, as indicated by arrows in the front-rear direction in FIG. 94, the temperature of the top plate 3 tends to increase as it approaches the left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the central heating port 4C. Therefore, the central display portion 16M is arranged on the front FR side from the first embodiment.

In the fifth embodiment, the various input keys 154M to 159 described in the first embodiment can be omitted, so that the central display portion 16M with a large display area can be provided. For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, in the second area 23 and the third area 24 as well, information such as thermal power (heating intensity), target preheating temperature, heating time, etc., which are one of the control conditions, can be increased. can be displayed.

In FIGS. 93 and 94, 343 is a menu display portion which is displayed in the fourth area 28 located right above the electrode 341 as appropriate. The menu display section 343 displays the cooking menu (or the identification information 167) of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the name, type, etc. of the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2.

In FIG. 93, 29A and 29B are display portions for "control conditions" such as target temperature and heating time. 29C and 29D are candidate display portions that can display the next candidate for the "control condition" such as target temperature and heating time.

As shown in FIG. 93, the display section 29B displays information on the heating time as one of the control conditions. The heating time information of two candidates that can be selected are also displayed simultaneously in the two candidate display portions 29D. Note that FIG. 93 omits the description of specific times and the like that are candidates, but in FIG. is described.

Next, FIG. 94 will be described.
FIG. 94 shows the case of carrying out the combined cooking mode KM2.
In FIG. 94, 343 is the menu display section. When the cooperative cooking menu is not executed, the display automatically becomes "menu" as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 94, when the target temperature information 18T displayed in the second area 23 is "180° C.", the target temperature information 18T1 of "185° C." is displayed in one candidate display section 29C. Is displayed. Further, target temperature information 18T2 of "175° C." is displayed in another candidate display portion 29C.

In addition, in the third area 24, if the displayed heating time information 18M is "10 minutes", the two candidate display portions 29D display "10 minutes and 30 seconds" for the heating time (during grill cooking). Information 18M1 and heating time information 18M2 of "9 minutes and 30 seconds" are displayed respectively.

As shown in FIG. 94, the user US touches the first area 22 to the third area 24 with the fingertip FG and moves the fingertip FG forward FR or backward BK to display the displayed composite cooking mode KM2. One control menu (e.g. "oven") can be changed to the next candidate control menu (e.g. "grill" or "heat up").

Next, FIG. 95 will be described.
FIG. 95 shows a state in which the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed. In order to display this first specific screen 16M1, it is necessary to touch the display position of the touch position information 536L, which has been described with reference to the guide screen 16MA1 of FIG.

343A is the display information of the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 displayed on the menu display section 341 in characters. When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not executed, the display automatically becomes "menu" as shown in FIG.

In FIGS. 93 to 95, 21M is a light-emitting portion forming part of the light-emitting display portion 27 (see FIGS. 16 and 58). In Embodiment 1, the light emitting section 21M corresponding to the start selection section (input key 151M) is shared with the heating stop input key 152M. 152M is provided with a dedicated light emitting unit 21M.

The light-emitting section 21M may perform normal continuous lighting before the start of heating, and change to flashing light after the start of the heating operation. Note that the light-emitting portion 21M corresponding to the input key 152M does not light up before the start of the heating operation because no stop input is required. From the start of the heating operation, as described above, the light is emitted in the form of continuous light emission, blinking, or the like, so that the user can easily visually confirm the light.

In FIG. 95, 190 is an icon (support information display) displayed in the form of a balloon so as to straddle the second area 23 and the third area 24 of the central display section 16M. The “icon” referred to here is a figure displayed on the display screen, and by touching the portion, a command signal for displaying support information is issued to the control device 40 . In other words, it is the same as a touch-type input key.

As shown in FIG. 95, when the user US touches the icon 190 with the fingertip FG, the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 at the time of the touch, the cooking method according to the food to be cooked, notes, etc. Characters and figures are displayed in the second area 23 and the third area 24 of the 1 specific screen 16M1. Note that the audio notification unit 50 may provide audio notification of the cooking method, precautions, and the like. Also, as shown in FIG. 95, the cooking method, precautions, etc. may be displayed in the second area 23 and the third area 24 .

In FIG. 95, the user US touches the first area 23 of the first specific screen 16M1 with the fingertip FG and moves it forward FR or backward BK to select one cooking menu. That is, the identification information 167 such as "hamburger" can be changed to other identification information. Thus, in this fifth embodiment, selection of a cooking menu can be executed while touching the first specific screen 16M1.

In FIG. 95, 343A is display information of the cooperative cooking menu indicating that the cooking menu is the cooperative cooking mode KM3, as described above. When the linked cooking menu is not implemented, the display changes to that shown in FIG. 94 (three categories of menu, temperature, and time).

Next, the touch panel input device 350 and the touch gesture determination device 353 will be described with reference to FIG.

The first area 22 to third area 24 forming the operation panel 351 are touch gesture input means for receiving touch gesture operations performed by the user. A touch gesture operation is an information input operation by a specific movement of the user's fingertip FG or the like.

The touch gesture operation includes a tap that is an operation of tapping the surface of the operation panel 351 with a fingertip, a flick that is an operation of flicking the surface of the operation panel 351 with a finger, and an operation of tracing the surface of the operation panel 351 with a finger (operation of sliding the finger). Can include certain swipes. However, in the fifth embodiment, it is determined that only two of the touch gesture operation of moving the user's fingertip FG in the front-rear direction and the touch gesture operation of moving the user's fingertip FG in the left-right direction are effective. More on this later.

Touch gesture operations include dragging, which is an operation of dragging a fingertip FG, pinch-in, which is an operation of narrowing the distance between fingertips while pinching them with a plurality of fingertips on the surface of the operation panel 351, and narrowing the distance between a plurality of fingers on the surface of the operation panel 351. There are also operations such as pinch out, which are operations to spread, but these are also identified by the operation determination unit 354 as invalid touch gesture operations.

Operation panel 351 receives a specific touch gesture operation performed by the user, and outputs input operation information (hereinafter referred to as “touch information”) IP1 corresponding to the touch gesture operation.

A display screen A (not shown) is arranged directly below the operation panel section 351 . The display screen A is arranged so as to overlap the operation panel section 351 .
Furthermore, the display screen A (not shown) displays various information (temperature, heat power, (including control conditions, etc.) is displayed. In addition, an operation image related to the guidance screen 16MA is also displayed.

Thus, the display screen A (not shown) is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display. The display screen A here has functions of the guide screen 16MA, the first specific screen 16M1, the second specific screen 16M2, and the third specific screen 16M1.

As shown in FIG. 96 , touch gesture determination device 353 has operation determination section 354 and notification section 359 .

Operation information input unit 352 receives touch information IP1 output from operation panel unit 351 . The operation information input unit 352 outputs input information IP2 corresponding to the received touch information IP1 to the operation determination unit 354 . The input information IP2 is information corresponding to the touch information IP1, and may be the same information as the touch information IP1.

The operation determination unit 354 receives the touch information IP1 from the operation information input unit 352 and outputs the selection value signal IP3 as output information to the notification unit 359 . The selection value signal IP3 is a signal of a selection value determined by the operation determination unit 354 based on the touch information IP1. In this fifth embodiment, the selection value signal serves as information for determining the control menu and the cooking menu.

The operation determination unit 354 determines the type and content of the user's touch gesture operation from the received touch information IP1.
Operation determination section 354 has gesture mode determination section 355 , gesture input information determination section 356 , and gesture area determination section 357 .

The reference parameter storage unit 358 stores at least the parameters of the slider mode among the gestures of the user. An example of the parameter is a parameter determined based on one or a combination of two or more of the amount of movement of the touch gesture operation in a predetermined time, the speed of the touch gesture operation, and the touch time.

Gesture mode determination unit 355 refers to various parameters in reference parameter storage unit 358 to identify the gesture mode of input information IP2. Gesture input information determination section 356 determines selection value signal IP3 according to the value setting method in the gesture mode specified by gesture mode determination section 355 .

Gesture area determination unit 356 identifies in which area of first area 22 to third area 24 the user has performed the touch gesture operation.

The notification unit 359 receives the selection value signal IP3 from the operation determination unit 354 for each of the first area 22 to the third area 24 by the operation determination unit 354 . Therefore, the notification unit 359 switches the display information of each of the first area 22 to the third area 24, and outputs to the voice notification unit 50 to notify such switching.

Display drive circuit 63 receives selection value signal IP4 from touch gesture determination device 353 . This selection value signal IP4 has the same contents as the selection value signal IP3.

The display unit drive circuit 63 switches the display content of the central display unit 16M according to the determination result of the touch gesture determination device 353. FIG. In other words, as shown in FIG. 96, the display section drive circuit 63 outputs the image signal IP5 of the operation image to be displayed on the central display section 16M to the central display section 16M.

Note that in FIG. 96, the touch panel input device 350 and the touch gesture determination device 353 are illustrated in the form of hardware (H/W) configurations. However, the touch gesture determination device 353 shown in FIG. 96 may be functionally realized, for example, by a program of a processing device such as a microcomputer that controls the central operation section 15M and the right operation section 15R.

For example, the software storage device of the control device (CPU 15E; see FIG. 17) of the central operation unit 15M is provided with a storage unit for storing the touch gesture determination program, and the touch gesture determination program stored in the storage unit is This can be executed by the CPU 15E of the central operation unit 15M. It should be noted that these functions may be centralized (aggregated) in the control device 40 instead of being executed by the central operation unit 15M or the right input operation unit 15R.

In FIG. 96, 362 is a reference information storage unit. The reference information storage unit 362 stores the reference information 164 and the additional information 166 described in the first embodiment.

Since the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 5 is configured as described above, when starting cooking, when the main power switch 20 is first turned ON, the controller 40 is activated. First, perform an initial self-diagnosis before starting the heating operation to confirm that no abnormality has occurred. Also, the central display unit 16M is activated to display the initial information (display the initial screen 16MH during initial standby).

Here, referring to FIG. 94 again, the user's operation for cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 will be described.
FIG. 94 shows the user selecting "oven" as the control menu. Although three fingertips FG of the user are drawn simultaneously in FIG. 94, it does not show that the three fingertips FG are performing a touch gesture operation at the same time. It shows that the touch gesture operation is performed three times sequentially from the first area 23 on the left side to the right side.

When the user performs a touch gesture operation (hereinafter abbreviated as “touch operation”) on the first area 22 , the operation determination unit 354 of the touch gesture determination device 353 detects the first area constituting a part of the operation panel unit 351 . Input information IP2 corresponding to touch information IP1 from 22 is received.

In the state where the control menu "oven" is displayed in the first area 22, the user touches the first area 22 with the fingertip FG in the first area 22 and moves forward FR or backward BK (constant speed range), the gesture mode determination unit 355 recognizes it as a regular (specific) touch gesture operation, and generates touch information.

Then, if the touch information indicates that the front FR has been operated, the operation determination unit 354 changes the display of the first area 22 via the display unit drive circuit 63 . Then, the next candidate “grill” or “warm” can be displayed in the first area 22 .

Similarly, the target temperature can be selected in the second area 23 as well. In FIG. 94, "180° C." is displayed as the default value, but it can be changed to the target temperature information 18T1 of "185° C." displayed in the candidate display section 29C. Further, by performing a touch operation on the rear BK, the target temperature information 18T2 of "175° C." can be displayed in the central portion.

Similarly, in the third area 24 as well, touch information is generated each time a touch gesture operation that is recognized by the gesture mode determination unit 314 is performed, and the display information in the third area 24 can be changed.

In the fifth embodiment, the touch gesture operation recognized by the gesture mode determination unit 355 is set such that the movement direction after touching is either forward FR or backward BK. , The display cannot be switched by touch gesture operations such as "pinch in" and "pinch out" as described above.

A reference parameter storage unit 358, which will be described later, stores parameters limited to the slider mode among user gestures. Therefore, if the slider mode cannot be determined, the display cannot be switched. This is because, for example, the above-described "pinch-in" and "pinch-out" touch gesture operations do not match the parameters based on the combination of the amount of movement in a predetermined time, the speed of the touch gesture operation, or the touch time. .

By the way, in FIG. 91, when the display portion of the touch position information 536L in the guide screen 1 (16MA1) is touched (step MT3), the control device 40 starts the voice input mode program at that time, and the external ( It has been explained that it will be in a standby state in preparation for input from the first server 321).

Further, even when the display portions of the touch position information 536M and 536R on the central display portion 16M are touched in the “long press” state (step MT3), the control device 40 activates the voice input mode program at that time. It was explained that it will be in a standby state in preparation for an input from the outside (the first server 321).

Therefore, a scene in which control conditions are set by voice input will be described.
For example, as shown in FIG. 93, in a state where "RG manual" is displayed in the control menu, the user US faces the voice input/output device (information processing terminal) 1000 and says "10 minutes in the microwave, 5 minutes in the grill."' is converted into text data from the voice input/output device 1000 and transmitted to the second server 322 in the text data (voice input signal VS) format of the utterance information.

The control unit 322C of the second server 322 receives the text data (voice input signal VS) via the input/output unit 322A and determines whether it can be converted into the standard command stored in the storage unit 322R.

The control unit 322C converts text data of speech information (voice input signal VS) into various commands (command data) prepared as standard commands. The “command” here includes a command for extracting recipe data CD for executing one cooking from the recipe database stored in the recipe data providing server 301 .

Since the first server 321 and the second server 322 are connected by a network NW such as the Internet, an inquiry signal (inquiry data) SN is sent from the input/output unit 322A of the second server 322 to the first server 321. sent. This inquiry signal SN is a command requesting extraction of the recipe data CD from the recipe data providing server 301, for example.

The first server 321 has pre-registered individual heat cookers 1, and a request B (see FIG. 88) for the heat cooker 1 transmitted from the second server 322 specifies the user US to be addressed. It is configured so that

The control unit 321C of the first server 321 decodes the inquiry signal (command) SN from the second server 321, generates necessary control information in response to the inquiry signal SN, and transmits it to the second server 322. .
In addition, the operating state data OS transmitted from a large number of heating cookers 1 and user US IDs (identifying information) that identify the users US of the individual heating cookers 1 are analyzed, and the individual user US The cooker 1 is identified from the information in the identification database of the user US held in the storage unit 321R.

Furthermore, the first server 321 also has a function of transmitting recipe data CD of a specific cooking menu acquired from the recipe data providing server 301 to a specific cooking device 1 . That is, in accordance with the request B issued from the voice input/output device (information processing terminal device) 1000 via the second server 322, the first server 321 transmits the specific recipe data CD to the target cooking device 1. can provide setting information with changed control conditions.

Next, FIG. 97 will be described.
FIG. 97 shows a modification of the fifth embodiment explained with reference to FIGS. 90 to 96, and is a plan view also explaining the input operation for explaining the arrangement of the central operation unit 40M and various display units. be.

The reference parameter storage unit 358 in the modified example shown in FIG. 97 stores at least the parameters of the slider mode among the gestures of the user. The slider mode is specified in two directions: the front-rear direction and the direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (right direction RT and a range of ±30 degrees with respect to the right direction). That is, the slider mode is detected within an angle of 60 degrees. An example of the parameter is a parameter determined based on one or a combination of two or more of the amount of movement of the touch gesture operation in a predetermined time, the speed of the touch gesture operation, and the touch time.

If the name of the control menu of the compound cooking mode KM2, "RG manual" shown in FIG. (RG manual) is presumed to be selected, and the input operation unit 15 automatically switches to the voice input mode for the first time so that the control information of the menu (RG manual) can be input by voice. It is a feature.

In the configuration described in FIG. 91, when any one of the display positions of the touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R on the guide screen 1 (16MA1) is touched for a long time, the touch input key is turned on. As a result, the mode is switched to "speech input mode 1". However, the "audio input mode 1" is applied only in one cooking mode and before the start of cooking in one cooking menu.

In the modification of FIG. 97 as well, even if the long press state is detected while the name of the control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2, "RG manual", is being touched and the mode is switched to the voice input mode, this voice input The mode applies only to this "RG manual" and only one control menu of this "RG manual" combined cooking mode KM2. The voice input mode is automatically canceled when the cooking operation is started.

In this fifth embodiment, the reason why the period of the voice input mode is limited only before the start of cooking is that when cooking is started, the object to be heated N and the object to be cooked become hot, and the top Since the plate 3 and the heating chamber 6 also become hot, this is to prevent the user from encountering an unintended situation due to careless input by voice. In other words, once the cooking is started, the operation is controlled by the touch operation or pressing operation of the user US, not by voice control.

That is, the "speech input mode 1" is not uniformly applied to all the cooking modes. In the example of FIG. 91, when the touch position information 536L is touched, only the linked cooking mode KM3 advances to the input step by "voice input mode 1".
In other words, the control device 40 prepares for a situation in which there is an instruction (command) for one cooking menu or control menu from outside (the first server 321) based on the instruction by voice input by the user US.

In Modification 1 shown in FIG. 97, when basic conditions such as a specific cooking mode, control menu, and heating means are fixed, the voice input mode is entered. At the stage of determining specific control conditions for the layer, the voice input mode is entered.
Therefore, there is a high possibility that the command will be narrowed down to an appropriate range that can be accepted by the control device 40 . Therefore, it is expected that the time required to determine the recipe data will be shortened, and as a result, the effect of shortening the time required for cooking will be enhanced.

Further, the voice guide by the voice synthesizer 95 may be used to provide advice to supplement the user's operation. In order to make such a change, it is necessary to expand or change the gesture determination data of the gesture mode determination unit 355 (see FIG. 96) and the parameter information of the reference parameter storage unit 358. FIG.

Next, FIG. 98 will be described.
FIG. 98 shows a diagram of moving the fingertip FG to the right while touching the first area 30L. It is determined to return to the previous display contents. Therefore, the reference information 164 shown in FIG. 97 is erased.

The gesture mode determination unit 355 and the reference parameter storage unit 358 do not detect touch gestures only in the exact right-left direction of the user and in the front-back direction that is perpendicular to the left-right direction. , an angle of 60 degrees) to detect the trajectory of the fingertip FG. Therefore, even if the fingertip is moved slightly obliquely, the gesture mode determination unit 314 can determine that it is a cancel command of the reference information 164 . Instead of erasing the reference information 164 with the touch gesture of the right method, a method of automatically erasing the reference information 164 after a certain period of time from display, a method of erasing the reference information 164 immediately after a touch operation, etc., can be changed as appropriate. You can

Summary of Embodiment 5.
As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the heating cooker 1 according to the sixth disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 related to the sixth disclosure is
heating means for heating the object to be heated N (first heating means to third heating means HM1 to HM3);
an input operation unit 15 that receives user commands;
a communication unit 21 that receives the recipe data CD from the outside;
a notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
and a control device 40,
The display unit 16 and the input operation unit 15 constitute a touch panel input device 350,
The guidance screen 16MA is displayed by the touch panel input device 350,
On the guide screen 16MA, touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R for selecting one of a plurality of cooking modes are displayed at touch key positions,
When the portions of the touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R are touch-operated, the first specific screen 16M1 displaying the identification information 167 of the cooking menu or the second specific screen 16M2 displaying the identification information 160 of the control menu is displayed,
The touch panel input device 350 has a touch gesture determination device 353 that determines the form of the touch operation in the state of the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2,
The configuration is characterized in that switching to the voice input mode is performed according to the determination result of the touch gesture determination device 353 .

With such a configuration, it is possible to switch to the voice input mode by selecting the heating cooking mode or the like using the touch input keys 536L, 536M, and 536R. can be input by voice. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability of the user US and reduce the workload.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the display unit 16, and after the standby initial screen 16MH, the guide screen 16MA1 is displayed (particularly, see FIG. 91).
The guide screen 16MA1 displays reference information 1 (standby common information 60N) common to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2. At least one of the contents of the cooking modes KM1 to KM3 or the reference information 2 (descriptions 525 to 527) for selecting the heat cooking mode is displayed.

With such a configuration, reference information can be presented to the user US at the time of selecting the cooking mode or the like using the touch-type input keys 536L, 536M, and 536R, and the user US can be guided to the correct input operation. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability of the user US and reduce the workload.

Further, in Embodiment 5, after the cooking mode or the control menu is selected by the touch-type input keys 536L, 536M, 536R, acquisition of the recipe data CD from the outside is permitted.

With such a configuration, the input operation unit 15 can control the timing of acquiring various recipe data CDs from the outside.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, as explained with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92, the configuration is such that the guide screen 1 (16MA1) is temporarily and automatically displayed. Therefore, the user US can easily select one of the cooking modes KM1 to KM3 and operate the input operation unit 15 for selecting the cooking mode.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, as described especially with reference to FIG. 95, the first specific screen 16M1 includes the first area 22 displaying the identification information 167 of the cooking menu and the second area displaying the control conditions. 23, the identification information 167 is selected and displayed in the first area 22 by a user's touch operation, and in the second area, support information regarding the input operation of the user US when the touch operation is performed. is displayed, the icon 190 is displayed.

Therefore, when selecting the cooking menu identification information 167 and operating the cooking menu, the user can know the support information simply by slightly moving the fingertip FG. You can guide the operation.

97 and 98, the touch input keys 536L, 536M, 536R are used to select the heating cooking mode, etc., instead of switching to the voice input mode, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is activated. In the process of selecting a cooking menu (e.g. "hamburger") or a control menu for the composite cooking mode KM2 (e.g. "RG manual", "heating"), the voice input mode is switched to and the necessary control conditions are input at that stage. can be done by voice from

Therefore, at the stage of inputting specific control conditions, it is possible to easily switch to the voice input mode and continue inputting, thereby further reducing the load on the user US during the input work.

Although the first heating means HM1 is an induction heating source using the IH coil 9 in Embodiment 5, it may be a gas combustion apparatus equipped with a gas burner for heating the pan.
Also, a fourth heating means HM4 may be further provided. For example, a steam generator (boiler) may be added as the fourth heating means HM4 to supply high-temperature steam to the inside of the heating chamber 6. FIG.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, it was possible to input by voice via the voice input/output device (information processing terminal) 1000, but there is no voice input/output device (information processing terminal) 1000. Even in such a case, the cooker 1 is equipped with the audio signal receiving unit 56 and the audio signal analysis unit 58, as described especially with reference to FIG. can be entered.

A function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 90) can be used to select a function setting mode. By disabling the function, the heating cooker 1 itself may not accept voice input, and may be set to accept only commands via the outside (first server 321 or the like). By setting in this way, when the voice input/output device (information processing terminal) 1000 is used, the heating cooker 1 accepts an utterance (voice) for the voice input/output device (information processing terminal) 1000. can be prevented from responding.

Embodiment 6.
99 is an operation explanatory diagram 1 showing the central display portion of the heating cooker according to Embodiment 6. FIG. 100 is an operation explanatory diagram 2 of the central display unit and the central operation unit of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 99. FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram showing input operation steps and display steps of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 99. FIG. The same reference numerals are given to the same or corresponding portions as those of the configurations of the respective embodiments described in FIGS.

The sixth embodiment further improves the touch panel input device 350 and the touch gesture determination device 353 of the fifth embodiment.
FIG. 99 will be described.
Only two pieces of touch position information 536L and 536R are displayed on the guide screen 1 (16MA1). This point is the difference from the fifth embodiment.

Furthermore, when the user US touches a position where one piece of touch position information 536L is displayed on the guidance screen 1 (16MA1), guidance is provided by voice saying "compound cooking mode accepted". Then, one to two seconds later, as shown in the display screen 2, the second specific screen 16M2 for the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed.

However, if the position where the same touch position information 536L is displayed is touched twice in succession (for example, within one second), guidance is given by voice saying, "Cooperation cooking mode accepted". In that case, the first specific screen 16M1 (not shown in FIG. 99) is displayed.

To cancel the state of the display screen 2 shown in FIG. 99, the fingertip FG is moved leftward while touching the identification information 160 of "warm". When the fingertip FG moves leftward in this manner, the gesture mode determination unit 355 determines to return to the previous display content. Therefore, the process returns to the guidance screen 1A (16MA1) shown in FIG. Note that when the fingertip FG is moved leftward in this manner, the gesture mode determination unit 355 determines that the display content is returned to the previous one, but this is different from the fifth embodiment.

Furthermore, when the user US touches a position where one piece of touch position information 536R is displayed on the guidance screen 1 (16MA1), guidance is provided by voice saying "Induction heating cooking accepted". After 1 to 2 seconds, the guide screen 2 (16MA2) (displayed as "display screen 4" in FIG. 99) is displayed.

When the user US touches the position where the touch position information 536L is displayed on the guidance screen 16MA2 of FIG. 99, guidance is provided by voice saying "left IH accepted". Then, one to two seconds later, as shown on the display screen 4, the third specific screen 16M3 for the single cooking mode KM3 is displayed on the central display portion 16M.

By the way, in the sixth embodiment, when the touch position information 536R of the guide screen 1 (16MA1) is touched, regardless of whether it is in the "long press" state or not, the mode is switched to the voice input mode. This point is one of the features of the sixth embodiment.

Since the configuration shown in FIG. 99 is the same as that of the fifth embodiment except for the above description, redundant description will be omitted.

As is clear from FIG. 99, when one of the two pieces of touch position information 536L and 536R is touched, the guidance screen 1 (16MA1), the second specific screen 16M2, or the third specific screen 16M2 is displayed according to the touched position. A screen 16M3 or the like is displayed.
Therefore, since the user US can see the guidance screen 1 (16MA) at the first stage, hesitation in the input operation can be eliminated before the start of cooking, and the heating cooker 1 with high operability and convenience. can be realized.

Next, FIG. 100 will be described.
In the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, when selecting the heat cooking mode of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the control menu (combined cooking mode KM2), while touching the first area 22 with the fingertip FG, Moving it to the right moves to the input screen of the next hierarchy (control menu and cooking menu).

That is, the feature is that the display prompting the input of the control condition and the voice input mode display information 179D indicating that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode are displayed at the same time.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, when the fingertip FG moves rightward while touching the first area 30L with the fingertip FG in the state of the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2, the touch gesture The determination device 353 (see FIG. 96) inputs the touch state determination result to the input processing unit 70 . Accordingly, the input processing unit 70 determines that there is an instruction to switch to the voice input mode.

In FIG. 100, the display area where the second area 23 and the third area 24 are combined displays operation support information 170 requesting the user US to set the control conditions (preheating temperature and heating time in this case). ing.

In the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, while the identification information 167 is displayed at the predetermined position B in the first area 22 as shown in FIG. Also (long press state. In this case, for 5 seconds or more), switching to voice input mode is not possible. This is the same for the composite cooking mode KM2. This point is also fundamentally different from the configuration of the fifth embodiment.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, even when the fingertip FG is touched twice in succession directly above the identification information 167 while the identification information 167 is displayed at the predetermined position B in the first area 22, , the display of the identification information 167 does not change. In other words, when the cooking menu or the control menu (of the combined cooking mode KM2) is displayed in the first area 22, the short press state in the first area 22 is not detected by the touch gesture determination device 353.

Next, FIG. 101 will be described.
Operation steps MT21 to MT44 shown in FIG. 101 indicate input operations, display operations, voice guidance, etc. after the standby initial screen 16MH. These operation steps are specified in the respective control programs of the control device 40, the right operation section 15M, the left operation section 15L, and the central operation section 15M, but are integrated into the control program of the control device 40 only. It may be stipulated.

For convenience of explanation, the touch position information 536L explained in FIG. will be described as follows.

As shown in FIG. 101, when the main power switch 20 is turned on, the standby initial screen 16MH is first displayed, and the audio notification unit 50 notifies the skeleton of the display information of the standby initial screen 16MH by voice ( Step MT21).

A few seconds after step MT21, the guidance screen 1 (16MA1) is automatically displayed on the central display section 16M. Also, in accordance with the display of the guidance screen 1, the voice notification unit 50 selects one of the two pieces of touch position information 536L and 536R in order to select the cooking mode desired by the user US. Guidance is provided (step MT22). The guide screen 1 referred to here refers to the guide screen 1 (16MA1) described with reference to FIG.

When the touch position information 536L is touched (step MT23), the input signal analysis unit 52 and the guidance screen analysis unit 140 in the control device 40 detect that the touch operation has been performed on the guidance screen 16MA1 stage. Then, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display portion 16M (the display of the guidance screen 1 disappears at the same time). The content of this step is also notified by the voice notification unit 50 . (Step MT24).

In the next step MT25, when the fingertip FG is slid from the first area 22 to the adjacent second area (to the right) within a certain time while touching, this touch operation is performed. The touch gesture determination device 353 makes a determination, and the determination result is input to the input processing unit 70. Then, with the input from the touch gesture determination device 353 as a trigger, the input processing unit 70 responds to voice input mode 1 by: Control the input signal analysis unit 52 (step MT26).Such processing is also performed in step MT31, which will be described later.In step MT25A, recipe data is received from the external communication terminal device 200, cloud server 300, etc. 4 shows the process of acquiring a CD.

After that, the user confirms the information (including the cooking menu including one identification information 167) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1, appropriately changes the control conditions and the cooking menu, and Yes) If the input key 151M is pressed, the process shifts to the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (MT27).

At step MT26, the input processing unit 70 activates the voice input mode program, and changes the state of the voice signal analysis unit 52 according to the input from the outside (first server 321, communication terminal device 200, etc.) (control related to recipe data CD). It can be controlled to be in a standby state in preparation for correction input of conditions, etc.).

On the other hand, when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected by the touch operation of the touch position information 536L in step MT23, the process proceeds to step MT29. That is, the guidance screen 1 (16MA1) is changed to the second specific screen 16M2, and the voice notification unit 50 also notifies the contents of this step.

Thereafter, as in step MT25, the user US confirms the information displayed on the second specific screen 16M2 (including the specific sentence 160, which is the name of one control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2), and determines the control conditions and control. In order to input a menu, if a fingertip FG is touched and slid within a certain period of time (step MT30), it is possible to switch to the voice input mode (step MT31). Therefore, these control conditions and control menus can be changed as appropriate by inputting them by voice. In addition, step MT30A shows a process of acquiring the recipe data CD from the external communication terminal device 200, the cloud server 300, or the like.

After that, if the input key 151M, which is a mechanical switch, is pressed, the process shifts to the cooking process of the composite cooking mode KM2 (MT32).

In step MT22, when the display portion of the touch position information 536R where the touch keys are arranged and displayed in the guide screen 1 (16MA1) is touched (step MT33), the guide screen 2 ( 16MA2 (see FIG. 99) is displayed (the display of guide screen 1 disappears at the same time) (step MT35). The content of this step is also notified by the voice notification unit 50 .

By the way, at the stage of step MT33, when it is detected that the display portion of the touch position information 536R is touched, regardless of whether it is a "long press" or a "short press", the control device 40 Switching to the input mode is performed (step MT34).

Therefore, when the guide screen 2 (16MA2) shown in FIG. 99 is displayed (step MT35), the mode has already been switched to the voice input mode. , 527 and select one of them by voice. For example, a phrase (words) specifying the heating port such as "right heating" is input by voice (steps MT36, MT39, MT42). In addition, step MT36A shows a process of acquiring the recipe data CD from the external communication terminal device 200, the cloud server 300, or the like.

When the guidance screen 2 (16MA2) shown in FIG. 99 is displayed (step MT35), if either one of the touch position information 536R or 536L is touched, this operation causes the right heating port 4R or the left heating port to 4L is selected.
Therefore, a third specific screen 16M3 like the display screen 4 in FIG. 99 is displayed on the display units (the right display unit 16L and the left display unit 16L) corresponding to these left and right heating ports on a one-to-one basis. (step MT37, MT43).

On the other hand, when the guide screen 2 (16MA2) shown in FIG. 99 is displayed (step MT35), if the touch position information 536M is touched, this operation selects the central heating port 4C.
Therefore, the third specific screen 16M3 like the display screen 4 in FIG. 99 is displayed on the display section (central display section 16M) corresponding to the central heating port 4C (step MT40).

Thereafter, for example, the user US confirms the information (including the control menu) displayed on the left display unit 16L, and appropriately changes the control conditions and the control menu by voice input (which is a mechanical switch). When the input key 153L is pressed, the process shifts to the induction heating cooking process in the left heating port 4L (step MT38). Similarly, for the central heating port 4C and the right heating port 4R, it is possible to shift to the cooking process as in steps MT41 and MT44.

Summary of Embodiment 6.
As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the heating cooker 1 according to the sixth disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 related to the sixth disclosure is
heating means for heating the object to be heated N (first heating means to third heating means HM1 to HM3);
an input operation unit 15 that receives user commands;
a communication unit 21 that receives the recipe data CD from the outside;
a notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
and a control device 40,
The display unit 16 and the input operation unit 15 constitute a touch panel input device 350,
The guidance screen 16MA is displayed by the touch panel input device 350,
On the guide screen 16MA, touch position information 536L, 536M, and 536R for selecting one of a plurality of cooking modes are displayed at touch key positions,
By touching the portions of the touch position information 536L, 536M, 536R, switching to the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2 for selecting one cooking mode,
The touch panel input device 350 determines the type of touch operation on the display section of the cooking menu (identification information 167) or the control menu (identification information 160) in the state of the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2. has a touch gesture determination device 353 that
The configuration is characterized in that switching to the voice input mode is performed according to the determination result of the touch gesture determination device 353 .

Due to such a configuration, as described with reference to FIG. 100, after the selection operation of the heat cooking mode or the like using the touch-type input keys 536L, 536M, and 536R, the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed. By touching (sliding to the right) the display portion of the cooking menu (identification information 167) or the control menu (identification information 160) displayed in the state, it is possible to switch to the voice input mode. You can input the troublesome work of the input process by voice. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability of the user US and reduce the workload.

Furthermore, in Embodiment 6, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the display unit 16, and the guide screen 16MA1 is displayed next to the standby initial screen 16MH (see FIG. 99 in particular).
The guide screen 16MA1 displays reference information 1 (standby common information 60N) common to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2. At least one of the reference information 2 (descriptions 525 and 527) for selecting the contents of the cooking modes KM1 to KM3 is displayed.

With such a configuration, reference information can be presented to the user US at the time of selecting the cooking mode or the like using the touch-type input keys 536L, 536M, and 536R, and the user US can be guided to the correct input operation. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability of the user US and reduce the workload.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, after switching to the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2, the configuration permits acquisition of the recipe data CD from the outside (steps MT25A and MT30A in FIG. 101). .

With such a configuration, the input operation unit 15 can control the timing of acquiring various recipe data CDs from the outside.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 99, the configuration is such that the guide screen 1 (16MA1) is temporarily and automatically displayed. Therefore, the user US can easily select one of the cooking modes KM1 and KM2 and operate the input operation unit 15 for selecting the cooking mode.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, as described particularly with reference to FIG. 100, the display area where the second area 23 and the third area 24 are combined has control conditions (for example, preheating temperature and heating time in FIG. 100). It is configured to display the operation support information 170 requesting the user US to set the .

Therefore, when proceeding with the input process, information that needs to be input can be known from the operation support information 170 .
100, after the identification information 167 or 160 is displayed, auxiliary information 179 of voice input mode 1 is displayed in a wide display area combining the second area 23 and the third area 24. Is displayed.

The auxiliary information 179 is the voice input mode display information 179A, which indicates in characters that voice input is accepted because the mode is the voice input mode.
Therefore, at the stage of inputting specific control conditions, it is possible to know that the user US is in the voice input mode. can be avoided.

In the sixth embodiment, the first heating means HM1 is an induction heating source using the IH coil 9, but it may be a gas combustion device equipped with a gas burner for heating the pan.
Also, a fourth heating means HM4 may be further provided. For example, a steam generator (boiler) may be added as the fourth heating means HM4 to supply high-temperature steam (superheated steam) to the inside of the heating chamber 6 . This is particularly convenient when thawing frozen food in the heating chamber 6 .

Furthermore, in this sixth embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 are switched in accordance with a touch operation on one display screen (central display section 16M). Selection can be made and switching to voice input mode is also possible, so there is no need to increase the physical number or area of keys for input operations. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the size and spacing of the touch operation surface, and to avoid impairing the operability.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, voice input via the voice input/output device (information processing terminal) 1000 is possible, but this voice input/output device ( Even if there is no information processing terminal 1000, the heating cooker 1 is equipped with the audio signal receiving unit 56 and the audio signal analyzing unit 58, so that the user US can input directly toward the heating cooker 1 by voice. can do

Also, as described in the fifth embodiment, the function setting mode can be selected by the function setting key 151KP. The function of the signal analysis unit 58 may be disabled, so that the cooker 1 itself does not accept voice input, and may be set to accept only commands via the outside (first server 321, etc.). By setting in this way, when the voice input/output device (information processing terminal) 1000 is used, the heating cooker 1 accepts an utterance (voice) for the voice input/output device (information processing terminal) 1000. can be prevented from responding.

Embodiment 7.
102 is a configuration diagram of a cooking system according to Embodiment 7. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 102. FIG. FIG. 104 shows main operation steps of the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1 and operation steps of the external information processing network (first server 321, voice input/output device 1000, etc.). Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configurations of the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 101 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The seventh embodiment is significantly different from the first to sixth embodiments in that a steam generator (boiler) 550 is added as the fourth heating means HM4.
Also, the configuration of the first server 321 is significantly different.
In this Embodiment 7, instead of the communication terminal device 200 shown in Embodiment 2, a small portable audio input/output device 1000 as described in Embodiments 5 and 6 is used. It is one of the characteristics.

First, FIG. 102 will be described.
The first server 321 connected to the cooking device 1 via the network NW (205) has an inventory information storage unit 1324 and a food consumption determination unit 1325.
The inventory information storage unit 1324 stores the "inventory data" SD1 transmitted from the refrigerator 403 via the network NW (205), and stores inventory information in response to a command from the control unit 321C of the first server 321. is updated from time to time.

The first server 321, like the first server 321 described in the fifth embodiment, stores various remote control data for the heat cooker 1 in the storage unit 321R.
In response to a request B from the second server 322 (for example, provision of support information for inputting control conditions by voice), necessary operation support data GS1 is sent to the second server 322 at any time.

Therefore, the second server 322 transmits to the voice input/output unit 1000 the operation support data GS2 that can be converted into voice data in correspondence with the operation support data GS1. The user US, who gives a command by voice, can confirm the result of his/her own input by voice emitted from the voice input/output device 1000, and can receive appropriate guidance for the next input. In other words, it is possible to input by voice in an interactive form, and it is possible to sequentially give detailed conditions to deeper layers in the control structure.

The inventory information storage unit 1324 receives signals from the information processing device 411 (not shown) called a home gateway or the like in the living space such as the kitchen 601, as described in Embodiment 1 (especially FIG. 7). In response, the inventory status may be checked at any time and the inventory data SD1 may be updated.

The food consumption determination unit 1325 acquires food information (inventory data SD1) from the inventory information storage unit 1324, and estimates the amount of food consumed from changes in inventory.
Since the ingredients consumption determination unit 1325 and the inventory information storage unit 1324 have the same basic functions as the ingredients consumption determination unit 325 and the inventory information storage unit 324 shown in Embodiment 5, redundant description is omitted. do.

A recipe data providing unit 1301 has basically the same function as the recipe data providing server 301 described in the fifth embodiment. It receives a command from the control unit 321C of the first server 321 and provides recipe data CD that can be executed by the heat cooker 1.
The voice input/output device 1000, which is one of the features of the seventh embodiment, is basically the same as the voice input/output device 1000 described in the fifth embodiment.

Next, FIG. 103 will be described.
A steam generator (boiler), which is the fourth heating means HM4, is installed outside the heating chamber 6 and has a function of blowing superheated steam into the heating chamber 6. FIG. The timing of supplying the superheated steam, the amount of supply per unit time, the supply time, etc. are controlled by the heating control section 43 of the control device 40 .

The heating cooker 1 includes a voice signal receiving section 56 that receives a voice command from the user US via a microphone (not shown) that collects the voice of the user US. That is, the heating cooker 1 itself has a function of selecting the recipe data CD by voice input and setting the control conditions thereof.

The control device 40 of the heating cooker 1 is different from that of the fifth embodiment. That is, since there is no configuration corresponding to the guide screen analysis unit 140, the guide screen 16MA1 is not displayed.
In this seventh embodiment, the control device 40 is the same as in the second embodiment. That is, the input operation section 15 includes a central operation section 15M and left and right operation sections 15L and 15R. In the central operation unit 15M, touch input keys 151M to 159M are arranged laterally in a straight line outside the central display unit 16 and near the front thereof.

Other configurations of the heating cooker 1 are the same as those described in the first embodiment, so redundant description will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 104 will be described.
In FIG. 104, steps SE1 to SE14 are main operation steps of the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1 and operation steps of the external information processing network (first server 321) and the voice input/output device 1000 side, respectively. Shown in chronological order.

As in step SE1, the information issued from the heating cooker 1 is one type of the operating state data OS described with reference to FIG. 57 of the second embodiment.

The first server 321 is operated by the company (manufacturer) that manufactured the heating cooker 1, and has a good understanding of the special control and processing specific to the heating cooker 1. It is possible to accurately grasp the operating state of (including both during heating operation and during non-heating operation).

In FIG. 104, when the start switch (input key) 151M (not shown) is pressed to start cooking in various heat cooking modes such as the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (step SE1), this operating state data OS is the first server 321.
When new operating state data OS arrive, the data recorded in time series in the storage unit 321R are updated. That is, the data of the main operations until the end of cooking are accumulated in time series (step SE2).

The operating state data OS includes data indicating ON/OFF of the main power switch 20, data indicating the selection history of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, data of control conditions such as heating temperature and heating time, and further, the top plate 3 and the latest temperature measurement data of the heating chamber 6.

Next, immediately after step SE2, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display section 16M (step SE3).
At the next step SE4, the cooking mode is selected. For example, when the input key 153M is touch-operated to select the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed. Then, when another input key 154M is touch-operated, a cooking menu (eg, fried chicken) different from the default cooking menu (eg, hamburger) can be selected.

At step SE4, when the input key 153M or 154M, which is one of the voice input switching keys, is touched, whether the touch state is "long press" or "short press" is determined by the central operation unit 15M (Fig. (not shown), and the determination result (command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40 .

Similarly, when any one of the input keys 153L and 153R, which are one of the voice input switching keys, is touched, whether the touch state is "long press" or "short press" is determined by left operation. A determination is made by the portion 15L or the right operation portion 15R, and the determination result (voice input mode corresponding signal MC1, which is a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40. FIG.

Therefore, if the touch operation of input key 154M is in the "long press" state, control device 40 changes to "speech input mode 1" (see Embodiment 1) from that time (step SE5). .
A voice input mode reception start notification SF is transmitted from the communication unit 51 of the control device 40 to the first server 321 .
When the control unit 321C of the first server 321 receives the voice input mode acceptance start notification SF, it enters the voice input mode support period (step SE6).

The "speech input mode corresponding period" in step SE6 is one of the features of the seventh embodiment.
“Voice input mode compatible period” is a period during which a home appliance registered in advance with the first server 321 (heating cooker 1 in this case) operates to accept an input operation in the voice input mode.
It can be seen that the first server 321 receives a voice input signal from the pre-registered voice input/output device 1000 during the "voice input mode support period". Therefore, the first server 321 may perform standby processing in preparation for voice input in a predetermined data format.

The next step SE6 and the next step SE7 are one of the features of this seventh embodiment. The first server 321 notifies the voice input/output device 1000 that the "voice input mode support period" has come (step SE7). As a result, the voice input/output device 1000 can indirectly recognize that the heating cooker 1 receives the input signal by voice via the first server 321 . In other words, the voice input/output device 1000 can enter voice input reception standby (preparation mode) without actually checking the state of the cooking device 1 .

On the other hand, it is also possible to acquire the recipe data CD from the first server 321 after step SE4. An automatic connection operation with the first server 321 is performed, and if the communication connection is successful, the process proceeds to a recipe data CD acquisition mode (step SE4A). It should be noted that, in this step SE4A, data of the latest state of the heating cooker 1 is transmitted to the first server 321. FIG.

At the stage of step SE5, the control device 40 has been changed to the "audio input mode 1". Therefore, as shown in FIG. The voice input/output unit 1000 receives this speech information (step SE8).

The speech information uttered by the user US to the voice input/output device 1000 is converted into text data in the voice input/output device 1000, and transmitted to the second server 322 in the text data (voice input signal VS1) format of the speech information. be done.

The control unit 322C of the second server 322 receives the text data (voice input signal VS1) via the input/output unit 322A and determines whether it can be converted into the standard command stored in the storage unit 322R.

The control unit 322C converts text data of speech information (voice input signal VS1) into various commands prepared as standard commands.

A request B is transmitted from the input/output unit 322 A of the second server 322 to the first server 321 . This request B is, for example, a command to change some parameters of the control conditions of the recipe data CD (for example, microwave output 500 W to 600 W). Then, the first server 321 requests the operation support data GS1 for the user US.

The first server 321 receives the data converted into the standard command by the second server 322 as the request B, and determines the content of the request from the cooking device 1 side. Then, one command information A is generated for the heating cooker 1 (step SE9).

The command information A is, for example, a notification command for the audio notification unit 50 of the heating cooker 1 . As shown in FIG. 104, for the control menu "warm up", the command information A is, for example, a voice notification such as "The warm up menu is accepted. Please set the time." Then, the user US is recommended to send the time setting information for the "warm up" menu. Then, as in step SE8, it waits for more detailed (lower layer) condition settings from the user US.

Note that the input process is not necessarily completed with one voice input from the user US, so steps SE8 and SE9 may be repeated many times.

Through the process described above, the first server 321 generates a command (command data) for setting the time for the "heat up" menu, and transmits it to the heating cooker 1 via the network NW (205) (step SE10). Note that the entire recipe data CD reflecting the control conditions set by the user US may be transmitted.

Heat cooker 1 receives the information of the "warm" menu, which is the received recommended cooking menu MB (step SE11).
In this "heat up" menu, the cooking step 1 is to be performed in the heating chamber 6.

Therefore, it is necessary to open the door 7, put the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 6, and close the door 7 again. The opening/closing of these doors 7 is performed by the opening/closing detector 10 (steps SE12 and SE13).
In the "warm" control menu, simply closing the door 7 does not automatically start the heating operation, and a standby state is entered to wait for a heating start command. Note that the voice notification 50 provides guidance such as, for example, "Automatic oven reception accepted. Start heating with the start key" to request the user to perform an input operation to start heating (step SE14).

In Embodiment 7, since the heating cooker 1 itself also has a function of directly processing voice input, the voice input/output device 1000 does not have to be used.
For example, after step SE5, the user US may speak to the voice signal receiving section 56. FIG.

In summary, the heat cooker 1 of Embodiment 7 had the following configuration.
That is, a first heating means HM1 for induction-heating the object N to be heated on the top plate 3, a heating chamber 6, and a microwave heating source (second heating means) for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 6. HM2, an oven heating source (third heating means) HM3 that heats the heating chamber 6 with radiant heat, and a steam generator (fourth heating means) HM4 that supplies high-temperature steam to the inside of the heating chamber 6. , an input operation unit 15 , a notification unit 90 having a display unit 16 and an audio notification unit 50 , a communication unit 51 for wirelessly exchanging information with the outside, and a control device 40 .

,
The control device 40 is
After the standby initial screen 16M1 is displayed on the display unit 16,
(1) IH single mode in which the first heating means is operated alone (2) Range single cooking mode in which the second heating means is operated alone (3) Oven in which the third heating means is operated alone a single cooking mode (4) a steam single cooking mode in which the fourth heating means is operated alone; (5) one or both of the second heating means and the third or fourth heating means are simultaneously heated; Alternatively, a combined cooking mode KM2 in which the operation timing is automatically changed to heat and cook in the heating chamber 6,
(5) the second heating means, both or one of the third or fourth heating means, and the first heating means through a transition period TR whose length is determined by an instruction from a user; , linked cooking mode KM3 that operates sequentially,
has an operating program capable of executing
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 performed using the heating chamber 6 before the transition period TR, a cooking process 2 performed above the top plate 15 after the transition period TR, including
The control device 40 has a function of receiving recipe data CD for executing heat cooking from the first server 321 and transmitting operating state data OS to the first server 321 wirelessly (via the network NW),
The control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD, and receives instruction information (commands) from the first server 321 to set control conditions for a cooking menu to which the recipe data CD is applied. rice field.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 is configured to automatically change to the voice input mode according to the touch state of a specific input key (for example, 154M) of the input operation unit 15 .

Summary of Embodiment 7.
As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the heating cooker 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 related to the first disclosure is
a first heating means HM1 for heating an object to be heated placed on the top plate 3;
a second heating means HM2 for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6;
an input operation unit 15 having touch-type input keys;
a notification unit 90 having a central display unit 16M;
and a control device 40,
After activating the display unit 16, the control device 40 selectably displays identification information of a plurality of heat cooking modes KM1 to KM3 or control menus on the display unit 16,
When the cooking mode or the control menu is selected by the touch-type input key (154M, etc.), the input operation unit 15 switches the input mode of the control device 40 to the voice input mode,
During the period in which the cooking mode or the control menu is displayed on the display unit 16M, the control device 40 accepts a control condition setting command from the user US regarding the cooking mode or the control menu,
It is a configuration characterized by

With such a configuration, it is possible to switch to the voice input mode by selecting the cooking mode or the like using the touch-type input keys (154M, etc.). You can enter by voice. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability of the user US and reduce the workload.

Furthermore, in Embodiment 7, after the cooking mode or the control menu is selected by the touch-type input keys (154M, etc.), acquisition of the recipe data CD from the outside is permitted.

With such a configuration, the input operation unit 15 can control the timing of acquiring various recipe data CDs from the outside.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the heat cooking system according to the seventh disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one form of the heat cooking system related to the seventh disclosure is
a heating cooker 1 that heats the object to be heated N;
a first server 321 connected to the cooking device 1 via a network NW (205);
A voice input/output device 1000 connected to the first server 321 via a network NW (205),
The first server 321 has a function of transmitting command data for setting control conditions of a cooking menu to the heating cooker 1,
The first server 321 has a function of acquiring data indicating the content of voice input received by the voice input/output device 1000 from the user,
The heating cooker 1 has a function of acquiring the recipe data CD from the first server 321 after the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed,
The heating cooker 1 has a function of automatically switching from the touch input mode to the voice input mode according to the touch state of the touch input key (154M etc.),
The heating cooker 1 is configured to receive the command data of the control conditions related to the recipe data CD acquired from the first server 321 in the state of the voice input mode.

According to the heat cooking system of the seventh disclosure, heat cooking can be performed using the recipe data CD acquired from the outside using the network.
In addition, when the recipe data CD is acquired, the mode is automatically changed to the voice input mode, so that when inputting the control conditions related to the acquired recipe data CD after that, the user can input by voice. This can contribute to improving the efficiency of US input operations and reducing the input load.

Furthermore, one form of the heating cooker 1 disclosed in Embodiment 7 is
heating means for heating the object to be heated N (first heating means HM1 to fourth heating means HM4);
an input operation unit 15 that receives user commands;
an audio signal receiving unit 56 that receives an input command by audio;
a communication unit 51 that receives the recipe data CD from the outside;
a notification unit 90 having a display screen 16;
and a control device 40,
The input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R for selecting cooking contents,
The input operation unit 15 instructs the control device 40 to start the voice input mode according to the touch state of the input key,
After activating the display unit, the control device 40 displays the standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit,
When the control device 40 receives an input command to select the voice input mode from the input operation unit 15 while the standby initial screen 16MH is being displayed, the recipe Enable acquisition of data CD, and accept a control condition setting command for the recipe data CD,
Further, the control device 40 is configured to transmit, via the communication unit 51, a voice input mode acceptance start notification SF (see FIG. 104) indicating that the voice input mode has been selected. rice field.

Therefore, in the first server 321 that receives the voice input mode reception start notification SF, the "voice input mode support period" can be set. Then, the first server 321 can prepare for receiving the audio input signal from the audio input/output device 1000 (standby processing).

Furthermore, it can be seen that the heating cooker 1 receives the input signal by voice when the voice input/output device 1000 acquires the information of the voice input mode acceptance start notification SF. As a result, the voice input/output device 1000 can enter voice input reception standby (preparation mode) without actually confirming the state of the heating cooker 1, thereby shortening the time required for the input process in cooking. can be expected.

Embodiment 8.
105 is a configuration diagram of a cooking system according to Embodiment 8. FIG. FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, main operation steps of the control device for the heating cooker shown in FIG. 105 and operation steps on the external information processing network side. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configurations of the embodiments described in FIGS. 1 to 104 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The eighth embodiment is significantly different from the seventh embodiment in that the heating cooker 1 is configured to directly transmit a start signal or the like to the voice input/output device 1000 .
The “cloud server” 300 in this eighth embodiment includes at least two of the first server 321 and the second server 322 .

FIG. 105 will be described.
The heating cooker 1 has an infrared (signal) transmission section 35 (not shown) similar to the infrared transmission section 31 shown in Embodiment 1 (FIG. 6).

The voice input/output device 1000 has the same functions as those described in the seventh embodiment, but has an infrared (signal) receiver (not shown). Then, the infrared receiving unit receives an activation signal or a voice input mode start notification SF (hereinafter collectively referred to as "signal C") from the infrared transmitting unit 35 (not shown) of the heating cooker 1 at any time. receive.
In addition, the transmission means of the signal C from the heating cooker 1 to the audio input/output device 1000 is not limited to the infrared communication described above. good.

Next, FIG. 106 will be described.
In FIG. 106, steps SE1 to SE14 are main operation steps of the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1 and operation steps of the external information processing network (first server 321) and the voice input/output device 1000 side, respectively. Shown in chronological order.

As is clear from FIG. 106, steps SE2A, SE6A and SE7A are different from those shown in FIG. 104 of Embodiment 7, and the other steps are the same. , redundant explanations are omitted.

In FIG. 106, when the main power switch 20 (not shown) of the heating cooker 1 is turned ON, the heating cooker 1 is activated (step SE1). By this activation, the controller 40 transmits an infrared signal from the signal transmitter (infrared transmitter) 35 (not shown).

An infrared receiving section (not shown) of the voice input/output device 1000 is activated upon receiving the infrared signal from the heating cooker 1, and enters a standby mode (step SE2A).
Although FIG. 106 does not show the operating state data OS as described in Embodiment 7 (FIG. 104), similar operating state data OS is transmitted to the first server 321 .
Then, when new operating state data OS arrives, the first server 321 updates the data recorded in time series in the storage unit 321R.

In the heating cooker 1, when the cooking mode is selected, when any one of the input keys 153L and 153R (both not shown), which are one of the voice input switching keys, is touched, the When it is determined that the touch state is "long press", the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1 is changed to the voice "voice input mode 1" (see Embodiment 1) from that time.

A voice input mode start notification SF (signal C) is transmitted from the communication section 51 of the control device 40 to the infrared receiving section (not shown) of the voice input/output device 1000 (step SE5).
The voice input/output unit 1000 receives the signal C and starts operation in the voice input mode (step SE6).

The voice input/output unit 1000 transmits a signal indicating the voice input mode start notification SF (signal C) to the first server 321 by wireless communication. Therefore, the first server 321 enters a standby mode in preparation for receiving voice input (step SE7A).

These steps SE6A and SE7A are one of the features of this eighth embodiment.
At step SE7A, it is found that the first server 321 receives an audio input signal from the audio input/output device 1000 registered in advance. Therefore, the first server 321 can start standby processing in preparation for voice input in a predetermined data format.

Through step SE6A, the voice input/output device 1000 can directly recognize that the heating cooker 1 starts voice input. In other words, even if the user US does not actually check the state of the heating cooker 1, it is possible to enter the voice input reception standby (preparation mode).

After that, as described in the seventh embodiment, when the user US directly utters a command content by voice, the voice input/output unit 1000 receives this utterance information (step SE8), and the voice input/output unit 1000 converts it into text data. It is converted and transmitted to the second server 322 in the form of text data (voice input signal VS1) of speech information. The subsequent steps are the same as those described in Embodiment 7 (FIG. 104).

In this eighth embodiment, since the heating cooker 1 itself also has a function of directly processing voice input, the voice input/output device 1000 does not have to be used.
For example, after step SE5, the user US may speak to the voice signal receiving section 56. FIG. In this case, the audio input/output device 1000 is turned off.

In summary, the heat cooker 1 of Embodiment 7 had the following configuration.
That is, a first heating means HM1 for induction-heating the object N to be heated on the top plate 3, a heating chamber 6, and a microwave heating source (second heating means) for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 6. HM2, an oven heating source (third heating means) HM3 that heats the heating chamber 6 with radiant heat, and a steam generator (fourth heating means) HM4 that supplies high-temperature steam to the inside of the heating chamber 6. , an input operation unit 15 , a notification unit 90 having a display unit 16 and an audio notification unit 50 , a communication unit 51 for wirelessly exchanging information with the outside, and a control device 40 .

,
The control device 40 has a function of receiving the recipe data CD for executing cooking with heat from the first server 321 and transmitting a signal C to the audio input/output device 1000 in the form of an infrared signal,
The control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD, and receives instruction information (commands) from the first server 321 to set control conditions for a cooking menu to which the recipe data CD is applied. rice field.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 is configured to automatically change to the voice input mode according to the touch state of a specific input key (for example, 154M) of the input operation unit 15 .

Summary of Embodiment 8.
As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the heating cooker 1 according to the eighth disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 related to the eighth disclosure is
a first heating means HM1 for heating an object to be heated placed on the top plate 3;
a second heating means HM2 for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6;
an input operation unit 15 having touch-type input keys;
a notification unit 90 having a central display unit 16M;
a signal transmitter 35 (infrared signal transmitter) (not shown);
and a control device 40,
After activating the display unit 16, the control device 40 selectably displays identification information of a plurality of heat cooking modes KM1 to KM3 or control menus on the display unit 16,
When the cooking mode or the control menu is selected by the touch-type input key (154M, etc.), the input operation unit 15 switches the input mode of the control device 40 to the voice input mode,
The control device 40 transmits a voice input mode start notification SF (signal C) to the outside from the transmission unit 35 (infrared signal transmission unit) (not shown),
During the period in which the cooking mode or the control menu is displayed on the display unit 16M, the control device 40 accepts a control condition setting command from the user US regarding the cooking mode or the control menu,
It is a configuration characterized by

With such a configuration, it is possible to switch to the voice input mode by selecting the cooking mode or the like using the touch-type input keys (154M, etc.). You can enter by voice. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability of the user US and reduce the workload.

Further, in Embodiment 8, after the cooking mode or the control menu is selected by the touch-type input keys (154M, etc.), acquisition of the recipe data CD from the outside is permitted.

With such a configuration, the input operation unit 15 can control the timing of acquiring various recipe data CDs from the outside.

Furthermore, in this eighth embodiment, the heat cooking system according to the ninth disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is, one form of the heat cooking system related to the ninth disclosure is
A heating cooker 1 having a signal transmission unit 35 (not shown) and a communication unit 51 and heating an object N to be heated;
a first server 321 connected to the cooking device 1 via a network NW (205);
A voice input/output device 1000 connected to the first server 321 via a network NW (205),
The first server 321 has a function of transmitting command data for setting control conditions of a cooking menu to the heating cooker 1,
The first server 321 has a function of acquiring data indicating the content of voice input received by the voice input/output device 1000 from the user,
The heating cooker 1 has a function of acquiring the recipe data CD from the first server 321 after the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed,
The heating cooker 1 has a function of automatically switching from the touch input mode to the voice input mode according to the touch state of the touch input key (154M etc.),
The heating cooker 1 transmits a signal C indicating the state of the voice input mode from the signal transmission unit 35 (not shown) to the voice input/output device 1000 without going through the network NW,
The heating cooker 1 is configured to receive the command data of the control conditions related to the recipe data CD acquired from the first server 321 in the state of the voice input mode.

According to the heat cooking system of the ninth disclosure, heat cooking can be performed using the recipe data CD acquired from the outside using the network.
In addition, since the mode is automatically changed to the voice input mode when acquiring recipe data, it becomes possible to input by voice when inputting the control conditions related to the acquired recipe data after that. It can contribute to efficiency improvement of input operation and reduction of input load.

Further, the audio input/output unit 1000 receives the signal C indicating the state of the audio input mode, and can shift to preparation for receiving the audio input signal (standby processing: standby state) at an early stage. Therefore, it can be expected that the time required for the input process in cooking can be shortened.
It should be noted that the voice input mode start notification SF (signal C) may be transmitted from the communication section 51 of the control device 40 to the infrared receiving section (not shown) of the voice input/output device 1000 by slightly improving the eighth embodiment. Instead, it may be transmitted to the first server 321 and the existence of the signal C may finally reach the audio input/output device 1000 . With this configuration, the voice input/output device 1000 can enter a standby mode in preparation for receiving a voice input from the user US upon receiving a notification from the first server 321 .

Embodiment 9.
FIG. 107 is a configuration diagram of a heat cooking system according to Embodiment 9, and shows the process of communication (information exchange) between a communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 such as a smartphone and the heat cooker 1. It is an explanatory diagram. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing a terminal-side display screen of the communication terminal used in the cooking system of FIG. 107. FIG. FIG. 109 is an operation explanatory view showing the recipe data receiving process of the central operation unit and the central display unit of the cooking device used in the cooking system of FIG. 107. FIG. FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the operation steps of the heating cooker and the external information processing network in chronological order. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configurations of the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 106 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

In this ninth embodiment, when the recipe data CD is provided from the communication terminal device 200 to the heating cooker 1, the processing when the recipe data CD not permitted on the heating cooker 1 side is transmitted is improved. , is significantly different from the first to eighth embodiments.

FIG. 107 will be described. Note that FIG. 107 omits illustration of the network environment such as the cloud server 300 and the first server 321 described in Embodiments 1 to 8, and describes the relationship between the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal device 200. are doing.

In FIG. 107, steps SE21 to SE37 show main operation steps of the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1 and operation steps of the communication terminal device 200, which is a part of the external information processing network, in chronological order. ing.

The heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 107 performs heat cooking using the third heating means HM3 in the heating chamber 6, and after the completion of the cooking, the main power source of the heating cooker 1 is restored within a short period of time. This is an example when a switch 20 (not shown) is turned on. That is, the temperature of the heating chamber 7 is still high (for example, 100° C. or higher) due to the previous cooking.

When the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the heating cooker 1 is started (step SE21). By this activation, the control device 40 checks whether there is an abnormality in itself, and if there is no abnormality, activates the display section 16 and displays the standby initial screen 16MH on the central display section 16M (step SE22).

Although FIG. 107 does not show the operating state data OS as described in Embodiment 7 (FIG. 104), similar operating state data OS is transmitted to the first server 321 (not shown). .

As shown in FIG. 107, after the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed (step SU1), in step SE23, an automatic connection operation with the communication terminal 200 is performed. The process proceeds to the acquisition standby mode (preparation for acquisition) of the data CD (step SE23).

At the next step SE24, the cooking mode is selected. For example, when the input key 153M is touch-operated to select the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed. Then, when another input key 154M is touch-operated, a cooking menu (eg, fried chicken) different from the default cooking menu (eg, hamburger) can be selected.

At step SE4, when the input key 153M or 154M, which is one of the voice input switching keys, is touched, whether the touch state is "long press" or "short press" is determined by the central operation unit 15M (Fig. (not shown), and the determination result (command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40 .

Therefore, when input key 154M is touch-operated without touch-operating input key 153, if the touch operation is in the "long press" state, control device 40 switches to "voice input mode 1" ( (see Embodiment 1) (step SE25).
A voice input mode reception start notification SF is transmitted from the communication unit 51 of the control device 40 to the communication terminal device 200 . Therefore, the communication terminal device 200 becomes ready to transmit the recipe data CD (step SE26).

After that, as described in the second embodiment, the user US directly inputs the command contents by voice to the voice input unit 222 (see FIG. 60) of the communication terminal device 200, or as shown in FIG. , the touch operation unit 215 (see FIG. 60) is operated to input specifying the recipe data CD.

As shown in FIG. 107, the user US selects "warm" (see FIG. 19) of the combined cooking mode KM2 and transmits it (step SE27).
The "warm" control menu is a menu for heating the food placed in the heating chamber 6 by microwaves. It heats and cooks by contact and while monitoring in real time. Therefore, as described in the first embodiment, if the internal temperature of the walls of the heating chamber 6 is high from the beginning, the control device 40 does not execute this control menu.

Control device 40 determines whether or not the "permission condition" is satisfied in step SE28 (step SE28).
As described in Embodiment 1 (especially step SM60 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not "permission condition 3" is satisfied, particularly in the case of the combined cooking mode KM2. The "permission condition 3" here means that the temperature as a result of checking the latest temperature of the heating chamber 6 by the temperature sensor group 30 exceeds a threshold (reference value), for example, the temperature detection range (80° C. or less). determine whether or not

If the "permission condition 3" is determined in step SE28 and the "permission condition" is not satisfied, a "non-permission process" is performed at this stage (step SE29).
The "disapproval processing" referred to here means displaying a message such as "The recipe has been received, but the heating chamber is too hot to cook." processing.

Furthermore, in this ninth embodiment, the content of the above-mentioned "non-permission processing" is transmitted to communication terminal device 200 (step SE29).

Then, communication terminal device 200 displays the content of the above-mentioned "non-permission processing" on terminal-side display unit 216 (step SE30). This state is described in detail in FIG. 108 below.

The user US touches the touch operation unit 215 of the display operation unit 225 or uses the voice input unit 222 to cancel "warm up" in the control menu or change the control conditions. Input is made (step SE31).

Next, when the user US performs a touch operation on the touch operation unit 215 or uses the voice input unit 222 to issue a voice command to transmit “warm” in the control menu (step SE32), the cooking device 1 , a new command is received from communication terminal 200 (step SE33).

That is, at step SE33, this time, the control menu for "warming up (manual)" is received as the recipe data CD. Thereafter, as described in step SE28, the control device 40 determines whether or not the "permission condition" is satisfied.

"Warm up (manual)" satisfies the "permission condition 3" even if the temperature of the heating chamber 6 exceeds 100°C. Therefore, if the data of the heating time is included in the recipe data CD of step SE33, the instruction (command) to execute this recipe data CD can be executed by the heating cooker 1. FIG.

Although not shown in FIG. 107, the cooker 1 sends a reception notification to the effect that the recipe data CD has been "received without problems" immediately after the determination of the "permission condition 3" after step SE33. 200, it can be easily confirmed by the sender.

At the same time, in the heat cooker 1, the second specific screen 16M2 corresponding to the control menu of "warm up (manual)" is displayed on the central display unit 16M, and the second specific screen 16M2 displays the menu of "warm up (manual)". The fact that the recipe data CD has been received is displayed and also notified by the voice notification unit 50 .

In the heating cooker 1, the cooking process of the received "warm (manual)" menu is executed in the heating chamber 6, so the door 7 is opened, the food to be cooked is put into the heating chamber 6, and the door is opened again. It is necessary to perform the action of closing 7. The opening/closing of these doors 7 is performed by the opening/closing detector 10 (steps SE34 and SE35).

The opening/closing of the door 7 is displayed on the second specific screen 16M2 or notified by the voice notification unit 50 to prompt the user US to operate.
In addition, in the "warm" control menu, simply closing the door 7 does not automatically start the heating operation, and a standby state is entered to wait for a heating start command. The voice notification 50 provides guidance such as, for example, "Automatic range reception accepted. Start heating with the start key", requesting the user to perform an input operation to start heating (step SE36).

Thereafter, when the input key (start key) 151M is touch-operated, the heat cooking operation is actually started (step SE37).

Next, the operation of communication terminal device 200 in FIG. 108 will be described.
FIG. 108 shows a scene corresponding particularly to FIG. 75 in the second embodiment.
Parts that are the same as those in the configuration shown in FIG. 75 may be denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description may be omitted.

The state shown in FIG. 108(A) is a scene in which the user US selects the automatic cooking menu of "heat up". This is the state in which the (heating upper limit) set temperature of the microwave oven (microwave heating) is changed to 75°C.

As shown in FIG. 108A, the set temperature is changed to 75.degree.
In FIG. 108(A), when this transmission key display section 521 is selected, the setting information (recipe data) of the control menu "heat up" of the "range-only cooking mode KM1" displayed in FIG. It is collectively transmitted to the heating cooker 1 as remote control information. This is the stage of step SE27 in FIG.

When the transmission of the remote control signal (recipe data CD) is finished, the cooker 1 determines "permission condition 3" in step SE28 of FIG.
As described with reference to FIG. 107, if the temperature of the heating chamber 6 has reached a high temperature (for example, 100° C. or higher) due to previous heating, the "permission condition 3" is not satisfied. As described above, the heating cooker 1 transmits the contents of the “non-permission processing” to the communication terminal device 200 .

FIG. 108(B) shows the stage of receiving such "disapproved processing".
In FIG. 108(B), 541 is a voice input mode display section indicating that the communication terminal device 200 is set to the voice input mode. At the stage of FIG. 108B in which the voice input mode display portion 541 is displayed, the user US can input by voice by speaking directly to the voice input portion 222 .

In FIG. 108B, at 542, the central processing unit 212 of the communication terminal device 200 refers to the information in the cooking device database 217 and extracts according to the content of the "non-permission processing" from the cooking device 1. This is reference information that is a kind of operation support data GS (see FIG. 57). It should be noted that when the cooking device 1 notifies the "non-permission process" (step SE29 in FIG. 107), the cooking device 1 transmits a unique error code (simple number, etc.) , the central processing unit 212 may compare the error code with the error code in the cooker database 217 and display the reference information 542 .

In the example of FIG. 108(B), instead of a control menu called "warming" that detects the temperature of the food to be cooked and automatically stops heating, the heating time is specified individually by the user "manual heating". shows what you can do. In other words, the user is recommended to set "time" as a control condition.

In FIG. 108(B), 543 is an error notification indicating the fact that the notification of “not permitted processing” has been received from the heating cooker 1 . It should be noted that this error notification is indicated both when it occurs due to a condition on the side of the heating cooker 1, as in the above-described "permission condition 3", and when there is a communication failure in the network NW.

In FIG. 108B, 507C is an auxiliary information display portion displayed near the reference image display portion 506 in FIG. 108A.
In the example of FIG. 108(B), the reason for the "non-permission process" from the heating cooker 1 is briefly explained in letters.

In the state shown in FIG. 108(B), when the user US utters a phrase such as "Range 10 minutes", the communication terminal device 200 accepts this voice information and selects "Range manual" as the control menu. can extract the recipe data CD for a heating time of 10 minutes and send it to the heating cooker 1 . Such an example is step SE32 in FIG. When the communication terminal device 200 cannot decrypt the voice information of the user US by itself, the communication terminal device 200 transmits the voice data to the cloud server (second server 322, etc.) as described in the second embodiment, and Data provided from the cloud server 300 may be used.

Next, FIG. 109 will be described.
FIG. 109 is an operation explanatory diagram showing the recipe data receiving process of the central operation unit 15M and the central display unit 16M. This figure corresponds to FIG. 65 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 109 shows the process of receiving the recipe data CD from the communication terminal device 200. FIG. The content of the reception operation display screen 16MM is the same as shown in FIG. 109(A) for all the heat cooking modes including the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

That is, immediately after the reception of the recipe data CD from the outside is started, the standby initial screen 16MH is switched to the receiving operation display screen 16MM indicating that the receiving operation is in progress, as shown in FIG. 109(A).

16F is a plurality of progress marks that appear in the receiving operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the receiving operation. Reference numeral 174 denotes a reception operation display section, which displays in characters that the recipe data CD is being received from the outside.
Reference numeral 174 denotes a reception operation display section, which displays in characters that the recipe data CD is being received from the outside.

There are two types of progress marks 16F: a black triangle and a white triangle.
As shown in FIG. 109(A), there is only one black progress mark 16F immediately after the start of the recipe data CD receiving operation, but the number increases as the receiving operation progresses, and finally a black triangular mark 16F appears. Five progress marks 16F are lined up.

When the recipe data CD is determined to be "non-permission processing" as a result of the judgment of the permission condition, as shown in FIG.
174A is reception support information. In FIG. 109(B), among the permission conditions, the set value of the peak cut power of less than 5000 W was the reason for the disapproval of the recipe data CD. The setting key 151KP is prompted to change the setting.

In FIGS. 107 and 108, an example in which "permission condition 3" is used as the criterion for determining the "non-permission process" of the heating cooker 1 has been described. , and conditions other than this may be added to the criteria for the “permission conditions”.

For example, like the "permission condition 1" and the "permission condition 2" described in the first embodiment, it may be added that the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3 is used. In other words, if the heating chamber 6 has already been used for some kind of cooking, it may be set so as to perform a "non-permission process". Moreover, when using the first heating means for heating the object N to be heated on the top plate 3, whether or not the first heating means HM1 is used may be added to the determination criteria.

Furthermore, as a criterion for determining the “non-permission processing” of the heating cooker 1, the set value of the maximum power consumption may be added as described in the first embodiment. As described in the first embodiment, the function setting key 151KP enables the control device 40 to perform "peak cut setting" (select one of four levels of maximum power consumption: 5700 W, 5000 W, 4800 W and 4000 W). For example, if it is not set to 5000 W or more, the recipe data CD of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 may set the power threshold used in the determination criteria so as to disallow processing.

From the stage of FIG. 108(A) to the stage of FIG. 108(B), the communication terminal device 200 and the heating cooker 1 always continue (maintain) a state in which data can be exchanged by wireless communication. isn't it. Similarly, the wireless communication between the cooker 1 and the cloud server (the first server 321, the second server 322, etc.) 300 is not always continued (maintained). Each time it is necessary, the connection may be made automatically, or the heating cooker 1 may be connected according to the operation of the user US.

Next, FIG. 110 will be described.
FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation steps of the heating cooker 1 and the external cloud server 300 and communication terminal device 200 in chronological order. This figure shows steps after step SE32 shown in FIG. Although the control menu is "range manual", the operation described below is the same for the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.

In FIG. 110, when communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 transmits a command of "microwave manual" (step SE32), the content of this command is transmitted from cloud server 300 to heating cooker 1. FIG.

For example, when the configuration of cloud server 300 is such that first server 321 is connected to cooker 1 via network 205 as described in Embodiment 2, the command is issued when first server 321 Receive (step SE32A).

First server 321 transmits the command to cooker 1 via network 205 (step SE32B).
In the ninth embodiment, the communication unit 51 of the heating cooker 1 is attached to the outer wall surface of the heating cooker 1 in the form of an adapter, and is hereinafter referred to as a "communication adapter".

Upon receiving the command, the communication adapter 51 acquires the state information of the heating cooker 1 . This state information is information indicating the state of the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1 . Therefore, for example, the information is information confirming the state of the first heating means HM1 by the heating control unit 43 .

For example, although the thermal power of induction heating is zero, the communication adapter 51 acquires information such as a standby state immediately before the start of heating and a state of receiving a temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor group 30 ( Step SE32C). In addition, inside the communication adapter 51, such a state confirmation operation is repeated many times at regular time intervals to collect the latest accurate data.
In this way, the communication adapter 51 collects information as to whether or not the cooking device 1 is in a state according to the content of the received command, and transmits the information to the first server 321 (step SE32D).

The first server 321 determines whether the content of the command transmitted at step SE32B and the content of the command received at step SE32D from the communication adapter 51 match (identity) (step SE32E). Then, when determining that there is no discrepancy between the contents of the transmitted command and the contents of the received command, the first server 321 transmits the determination result to the communication terminal device 200 (step SE32F). Note that when the result of the determination is that there is no discrepancy, it is determined that the communication is successful.

When the communication terminal device 200 receives the determination result ("communication is successful") from the first server 321 (step SE32G), the communication terminal device 200 displays to that effect on the terminal side display section 216 (step SE32H). It should be noted that the speaker 214 may be used for notification. In FIG. 110, steps SE34 and SE35 indicate that the opening and closing of the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 have been detected by the open/close detector 10 as described with reference to FIG. , may not be as shown in FIG. For example, step SE34 may precede step SE32C.

Summary of the ninth embodiment.
As is clear from the above description, the ninth embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 relating to the tenth disclosure as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker related to the tenth disclosure is
a heating chamber 6;
a heating means for heating the object to be heated N;
an input operation unit 15 that receives user commands;
a communication unit 51 that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
a notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
and a control device 40,
The input operation unit 15 has a plurality of input keys (151M, 152M, 153L, 153M, 153R, 154M) and the like,
The input operation unit 15 instructs the control device 40 to start the voice input mode by operating specific input keys 153L, 153M, 153R, and 154M among the input keys,
After the main power switch 20 is turned on, the controller 40 receives a recipe data CD acquisition command from the specific input key. determines whether or not the permission conditions are satisfied, and if the permission conditions are not satisfied, the communication unit 51 transmits a notification of disapproval processing.

With such a configuration, the timing of acquiring various recipe data CDs from the outside can be controlled by the specific input keys of the input operation unit 15 . In addition, since it is possible to switch to the voice input mode by using the touch-type specific input key on the input operation unit, it is possible to input the troublesome work of the input process before starting the heating operation by voice. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability of the user US and reduce the workload.

Furthermore, when the cooking device 1 receives the recipe data CD from the outside, it selects the recipe data CD that can be executed by the cooking device 1 according to the predetermined permission conditions, Since the notification is sent to the communication terminal device 200, which is the transmission source of the data CD, misunderstanding that the recipe data CD is normally accepted by the communication terminal device 200, which is the transmission source, can be prevented. . Therefore, convenience and operability for the user US can be improved.

Furthermore, in this ninth embodiment, the heating cooker according to the tenth disclosure is realized in the following form.
i.e.
heating means for heating the object to be heated N (first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, etc.);
a heating chamber 6 in which the food to be cooked is accommodated;
an input operation unit 15 that receives user commands;
a communication unit 51 that receives the recipe data CD from the outside;
a notification unit 90 having a display unit 16;
and a control device 40,
The input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys (151M to 159M, etc.) for selecting cooking contents,
The input operation unit 15 instructs the control device 40 to start the voice input mode according to the touch state of the input key,
After activating the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays the standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
When the control device 40 receives a voice input mode start command from a specific input key (153L, 153M, 154M, etc.) of the input operation unit 15 during the period in which the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed , enabling acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51,
When receiving the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, the control device 40 determines whether or not the heating chamber 6 or the heating means satisfies a predetermined "permission condition". The cooking device 1 is characterized in that, when the "permission condition" is not satisfied, a "non-permission process" is performed, and information indicating the non-permission process is transmitted from the communication unit 51.例文帳に追加

With such a configuration, the input operation unit 15 can control the timing of acquiring various recipe data CDs from the outside. In addition, since it is possible to switch to the voice input mode by using the touch-type input keys on the input operation unit 15, it is possible to input the troublesome work of the input process before starting the heating operation by voice. As a result, it is possible to improve the operability of the user US and reduce the workload.

Furthermore, in one form of the heat cooker 1 related to the tenth disclosure, when the heat cooker 1 receives the recipe data CD from the outside, it can be executed in the heat cooker 1 according to the predetermined permission conditions Since the recipe data CD is selected and the notification is sent to the communication terminal device 200, which is the transmission source of the recipe data CD determined to be unsuitable by the selection, the communication terminal device 200, which is the transmission source, does not receive the recipe data It is also possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the CD has been accepted normally. Therefore, convenience and operability for the user US can be improved.

Furthermore, as described with reference to FIG. 109, in one form of the cooking device 1 according to the tenth disclosure, when the recipe data CD is determined to be "non-permission processing" as a result of the determination of the permission condition, FIG. 109 ( As shown in B), the receiving operation display section 174 changes to the disapproval display 174F indicating that the receiving operation has failed. can know.

In addition, since the reception support information 174A is also displayed at that time, the user US can immediately know how to deal with it, and the burden on the user US side can be reduced, so that operability can be improved in this aspect as well.

In this ninth embodiment, a heat cooking system related to the eleventh disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one form of the heat cooking system related to the eleventh disclosure is
a heating cooker 1 having a heating chamber 6 and a heating means;
An information processing terminal device 200 connected to the heating cooker 1 by wireless communication,
The information processing terminal device 200 has a function of transmitting recipe data CD to the heating cooker 1,
The input operation unit 15 of the heating cooker 1 has a plurality of input keys (151M, 152M, 153L, 153R, 154M, etc.), and specific input keys (153L, 153R, 154M, etc.) You can select the voice input mode by operating
The heating cooker 1 has a function of acquiring the recipe data CD when the specific input key is operated after the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed,
When the recipe data CD is received, the heating cooker 1 determines whether at least one of the heating chamber 6 and the heating means satisfies the permission conditions, and if the permission conditions are not satisfied, A notification of disapproval processing is transmitted from the communication unit 51 to the information processing terminal device 200 (step SE27 in FIG. 107),
When the information processing terminal device 200 receives the notification of the disapproval process, the terminal-side display unit 216 displays information 543 indicating the disapproval process;
It was a configuration characterized by

With this configuration, the recipe data CD that can be executed by the heating cooker 1 can be selected according to the predetermined permission conditions.
Furthermore, since the notification is sent to the communication terminal device 200, which is the transmission source of the recipe data CD that has been determined to be nonconforming by the screening, the communication terminal device 200, which is the transmission source, misunderstands that the recipe data CD is normally received. You can also prevent it from inviting Therefore, convenience and operability for the user US can be improved.

Furthermore, in order to determine whether or not the recipe data CD is inappropriate for the heating cooker 1, the heating device 1 notifies the information processing terminal device 200 in advance of the driving status of the heating means and the heating chamber. 6, collecting and transmitting the latest physical data such as the temperature, and determining whether or not the recipe data CD is inappropriate on the information processing terminal 200 side.
For this reason, the communication time delay for transmission and reception of these physical data and the process of aggregating data for transmission to the information processing terminal device 200 on the heating cooker 1 side are not required. It can contribute to simplification of the whole system, rapid processing, and start of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heat cooking system of the eleventh disclosure, when the information processing terminal 200 receives the notification of the disapproval process, the terminal-side display unit 216 displays reference information for coping with the disapproval process. 542 was displayed.

With this configuration, the user US can recognize the conditions under which the recipe data CD is normally accepted in the communication terminal device 200, which is the transmission source of the recipe data CD, thereby improving convenience and operability for the user US. be able to.

Furthermore, in the heat cooking system of the eleventh disclosure, when the information processing terminal 200 receives the notification of the disapproval process, the terminal-side display section 216 displays an auxiliary information display section indicating the reason for the disapproval process. 507C was displayed.

With this configuration, the user US can recognize the reason why the recipe data CD was not normally received in the communication terminal device 200, which is the transmission source of the recipe data CD. can be improved.

Furthermore, in the heat cooking system of the ninth embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. etc.) has a function of judging whether the transmission of the "command" for setting is successful or unsuccessful.

That is, the operation of the first server 321 for obtaining state information in the heating cooker 1 (steps SE32C and SE32D) and comparing the data of the obtained results to determine whether the communication is successful or not (step SE32E) allows the communication result is determined.

Information indicating such a communication result is transmitted to the information processing terminal 200 via the network 205 (step SE32F), so that the information processing terminal 200 can know the judgment result.

Therefore, in the heat cooking system of the eleventh disclosure, the user US, who transmits the recipe data CD, can know from the information processing terminal 200 at hand whether or not the command has definitely arrived at the heat cooker 1. can. Therefore, it is possible to expect the effect of preventing the user US from being misunderstood and uneasy about the operation.

It should be noted that the heat cooking system having the function of determining whether or not communication has succeeded, as described in FIG. 110, can also be applied to the second embodiment, the seventh and eighth embodiments, and the like.

Another embodiment.
In order to explain each component of each circuit, part, and device constituting the heating cooker 1 and the communication terminal device 200, the data are denoted by reference numerals such as the recipe data CD1 and the recipe data CD2. Both may be substantially the same data. For example, one recipe data (eg, hamburger recipe data CD) held from the beginning in the heating cooker 1 and recipe data (eg, hamburger recipe data CD) acquired from the outside via the communication unit 51 are , may have the same content.

In addition, the communication terminal device 200 such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal device (small portable personal computer) does not necessarily need to provide the cooking device 1 with the recipe data acquired from the cloud server 300, and the communication terminal device 200 itself , the recipe data may be generated and held.

Further, in the composite cooking mode KM2 of each embodiment described so far, when the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected, a control menu (for example, a heating operation pattern of "thaw") is basically selected, and a specific It was not intended to select the recipe data CD assuming the cooked food. However, the user US uses the cloud server 300 to select one recipe data CD of the combined cooking mode KM2 that can be applied to the heating cooker 1, and sends it to the information processing terminal device 200 (1000) such as a communication terminal device. may be used to cause the heating cooker 1 to acquire. This is the same for the single cooking mode KM1.

In the above explanation, for the convenience of explanation, reference numerals such as "recipe data 1" and "recipe data 2" were added, but this means that the contents of the two recipe data are different from each other. and that they are the same, and it should not be interpreted that the data are different due to the difference in the sign (1, 2, etc.). Similarly, recipe data CD1 and CD2 are sometimes described with different reference numerals, but the reference numerals are used for the convenience of explanation, and the contents of the data are mutually different only by the difference of the reference numerals. does not mean that it differs from

Each circuit, part, and each component of the apparatus illustrated in the above-described first to ninth embodiments are functionally conceptual, and may not necessarily be physically configured as illustrated. Furthermore, especially the control device 40, the heating control section 43, the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, the third heating means HM3, the fourth heating means HM4, and the storage device 41 are each of these devices/circuits. It is possible to distribute and integrate the functions of, and the specific form is not limited to the one shown in the figure. Can be integrated and configured.

Each function of the control device 40 and the heating control section 43 is implemented by a processing circuit. A processing circuit that implements each function may be dedicated hardware, or may be a processor that executes a program stored in a memory.

When the processing circuit is a processor, each function of the control device 40 and the heating control section 43 is implemented by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. Software and firmware are written as programs and stored in the storage device 41, which is a memory. The processor implements each function of the control device 40 and the heating control section 43 by reading and executing the programs stored in the storage device 41 .

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute control procedures of the control device 40 and the heating control section 43 . Note that the storage device 41 is typically non-volatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as RAM, ROM, flash memory, EPROM, and EEPROM.

Furthermore, part of the data and programs in the recipe data storage unit 41 shown in FIG. 14 may be held in an external recording medium (storage server or the like) without being held by the cooking device 1 . In this case, the cooker 1 acquires necessary data and program information by accessing an external recording medium (storage server).

Further, the operation programs of the control device 40, the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3 may be changed according to the wishes of the user US or the manufacturer of the cooker 1. You may enable it to update to what was corrected and improved suitably. In this case, for example, the correction/improvement program may be obtained through the communication unit 51 .

One heating portion (IH coils 9L, 9M, 9R) of the first heating means HM1 for cooking on the top plate 3 may be changed to a gas combustion burner. In this case, the gas flow rate valve is configured to be controlled by the controller.
Also, part or all of the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner or an induction heating source.

In the first to ninth embodiments, the input operation unit 15 is mainly a "contact input" and a press (push button) type operation unit in which the user US touches the input keys or the operation panel 351 to issue an input command. As described above, the operation unit may be a "non-contact input" for inputting by detecting the movement of the user's finger or hand in a non-contact manner.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 15 may be changed to a voice input method for recognizing and inputting the voice of the user US. In the case of the voice input method, a microphone and a voice receiving section for receiving the voice of the user US and converting it into a voice recognition signal correspond to the input operation section.
Alternatively, a mechanical switch such as a contact type switch or a pressure type switch may be used in combination with the voice input method.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 15 may give commands to the heating cooker 1 via an input terminal device having a voice input function such as a smart speaker or an AI speaker (see Embodiment 8).

In the first to ninth embodiments, the nutritional component data DD is displayed on the central display section 16M, but it is displayed on the display screens at other positions (for example, the right display section 16R and the display screens of various cooking menus). It may be displayed on the right heating power display section 17R).
Also, although the standby initial screen is displayed on the central display section 16M, if there is another display section, it may be displayed on that display section. For example, the standby initial screen 16MH may be displayed immediately after the input key 153R is operated in the right display portion 16R for the right heating port 4R. This is also applicable to the left display section 16L.

In addition, in Embodiment 1 (FIG. 30), two types of main food ingredients and nutritional ingredients are displayed on the food ingredient display screen 16M1A and the nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B. may be displayed collectively (one screen).

Further, the nutritional components and food components to be displayed may be limited to specific nutritional components by the user US pressing the function setting key 151KP to enter the function setting mode. Furthermore, the input key 180 may be pressed to switch to the voice input mode 2 and input by voice to narrow down the range to specific nutritional components and food components.

Furthermore, at the stage when all the heat cooking processes are completed, or during the heating pause periods P3 and P5 (see FIG. 32) of the linked cooking mode KM3, the food component display screen 16M1A and the nutritional information are automatically displayed according to the instruction of the user US. Either or both of the component display screens 16M1B may be displayed.

The smart speaker and AI speaker exchange information wirelessly at any time with a support server equipped with a speech translation function and a search function in the network environment, such as the cloud server 300, and the heating cooker The voice (natural language) uttered by the user US beside 1 is acquired as a voice signal, converted into a command signal from the user US by the support server, and finally a command signal for the heating cooker 1 is generated. be able to. Therefore, even if the user US is in the vicinity of the heating cooker 1, the frequency of directly touching the input operation unit 15 is limited because both hands are occupied during preparation for cooking, processing of ingredients, or the like. Also, the heating cooker 1 can be operated by natural vocalization (voice), which is convenient.

In Embodiments 1 to 4 and 7 to 9, the means for selecting various control menus and control conditions displayed on the first specific screen 16M1, the second specific screen 16M2 and the third specific screen 16M3 is the input operation unit 15. However, as shown in the fifth and sixth embodiments, they may be provided in the display screens of the central display section 16M and the left and right display sections 16L and 16R, which are display means.

For example, in Japanese Patent No. 5833699, which proposes compound cooking, a display screen for compound cooking is displayed, the name of the menu for compound cooking is displayed in the display screen, and the menu selection unit is operated by the user US. is directly touched with a finger to select a menu.

Therefore, the menu of cooking possible in the combined cooking mode KM2 or the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the name of the cooking object (one type of identification information), etc. are displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2. The user US may directly touch a display portion (also referred to as an “icon” portion) with a finger to select a menu or the like of the cooperative cooking mode.

In the first embodiment, the communication unit 51 receives a command signal, recipe data CD, etc., transmitted from the outside of the heating cooker 1, and from the heating cooker 1, each operation signal and command signal are sent to the outside. Although transmission (operating state data OS) has been performed, information indicating progress such as the start and end of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 may be transmitted each time. With this configuration, the user US can know the progress information (operating state data OS) via the communication terminal device 200 or the like, thereby improving convenience.

In addition to the cooker 1, a home gateway having a function of receiving data of the search result of the stock of the refrigerator 403 is arranged as an information management device, and between the cooker 1 and the refrigerator 403 The stock information of the refrigerator 403 may be obtained on the cooker 1 side by connecting through a wireless communication means (LAN) or a wide area network such as the Internet so that it can be used for cooking.

Further, as the configuration of the communication terminal device (information processing terminal device) 200 such as a smartphone, as described particularly with reference to FIG. Although the display information, display form, design, etc. are similar, the heating cooker database 217 and the remote control information generation unit 219 for such display are not necessarily required. For example, the first server 321 and the second server 322 are provided with functions corresponding to the heating cooker database 217 and the remote control information generating unit 219, and the communication terminal device 200 receives input (including voice input). In this case, each time, it may be transmitted to the cloud server 300 such as the first server 321 and the necessary response information may be acquired from the cloud server 300 side.

The cooking device 1 received the recipe data CD and other data from the information processing terminal device 200, the first server 321, etc. directly or via a wireless router, but via another relay device , may be received by the heating cooker 1 . For example, a remote controller for other electrical appliances (for example, a water heater) installed in the kitchen may be used as the relay device. Conveniently, such remote controls are usually connected to a power supply at all times. In this case, the relay device preferably incorporates a storage device for temporarily storing various data including commands sent from the information processing terminal 200, the first server 321, and the like. Various data transmitted from the heating cooker 1 are temporarily stored in the storage device.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The substantial scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning of equivalents of the scope of claims.

The heating cooker and heating cooking system according to the present disclosure can be widely used not only in the kitchens of ordinary houses, but also in the kitchens of public facilities, shops, and the like.

1 heating cooker 2 main body 3 top plate 4 heating port 4L left heating port 4C central heating port 4R right heating port 5 exhaust port cover 6 heating chamber 7 door 8 handle 9 IH coil 9C central IH coil 9L left IH coil 9R right IH coil 10 open/close detector 11 microwave oscillator (magnetron)
12 Radiant heat heating means 12a Upper radiant heat heating means 12b Lower radiant heat heating means 13 Infrared sensor 14 Thermistor sensor 15 Input operation unit 15L Left operation unit 15M Central operation unit 15R Right operation unit 16 Display unit 16F Progress mark 16L Left display unit 16M Center display Part 16M1 First specific screen 16M1A Food component display screen 16M1B Nutrient component display screen 16M2 Second specific screen 16M3 Third specific screen 16MA Guidance screen 16MH Common screen (initial screen during standby)
16MM Receiving operation display screen 16R Right display 17 Thermal power display 17L Left thermal power display 17M Central heating status display 17R Right thermal power display 20 Main power switch 20A Main power switch operation button (key)
21 light emitting section 21L light emitting section 21M light emitting section 21R light emitting section 22 first display area 23 second display area 24 third display area 25A to 25C display information 26 light emission control section 27 light emitting element (light emitting element group)
28 fourth display area 29A-29B display section 29C-29D candidate display section 30 temperature sensor group 30A temperature sensor 31 infrared transmission section 32 bottom wall 33 installation space 35 infrared transmission section 40 control device 41 display data storage section 42 recipe data storage section 43 heating control unit 50 voice notification unit 51 communication unit (wireless communication module)
52 Input signal analysis unit 53 Data acquisition unit 54 Permission condition determination unit 55 Restriction unit 56 Audio signal reception unit 57 Power supply circuit 58 Audio signal analysis unit 59 Human detection sensor 60A Display text 60B Two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code)
60C Description of two-dimensional information 60E Caution display 60H Recommendation 60N Common information during standby 60P Acquisition operation support information 70 Input processing unit 90 Notification unit 151L to 155L Input keys 151M to 159M Input keys 151R to 155R Input keys 160 Control menu identification information 161 Control menu identification information 162 Control menu identification information 164 Reference information 165 Additional information 166 Additional information 167 Identification information 168 Identification information 169 Identification information 170 Operation support information 171L Heating unit identification unit 171R Heating unit identification unit 172 Process information 173 External recipe identification unit 174 Reception operation display unit 174A Reception support information 174F Disapproval display 175 Guidance information 176 Reception operation display unit 179D Display information (voice input mode)
180 Input key (audio input dedicated mode selection part)
190 icon 200 communication terminal (smartphone) (information processing terminal)
201 network 202 network 203 network 204 network 205 network 206 network 210 transmitter/receiver 211 communication controller 212 central processing unit (CPU)
213 ROM/RAM
214 speaker 215 touch operation unit 216 terminal side display unit (terminal side display screen)
217 heating cooker database 218 posture detection unit 219 remote operation information generation unit 220 storage unit 221 NFC input/output unit 222 voice input unit 223 notification data 224 remote control data 225 display operation unit 226 food ingredient/nutritional ingredient data 230 recipe data Acquisition unit 231 recipe data transmission unit 232 terminal side recipe selection unit 233 food ingredient data acquisition unit 300 cloud server 301 recipe data providing server 302 recipe database 310 light emitting element (LED) for range
311 Light emitting element (LED) for grill
312 Oven Light Emitting Device (LED)
313 Central IH light emitting element (LED)
314 High temperature warning light emitting element (LED) group 314a Heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED)
314b IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED)
321 first server 321A input/output unit (input/output interface unit)
321C control unit 321P food ingredient database 321R storage unit 322 second server 322A input/output unit (input/output interface unit)
322C control unit 322R storage unit 323 third server 324 inventory information storage unit 325 ingredient consumption determination unit 326 food ingredient information server 340 wireless router (access point)
341 electrode 343 menu display unit 350 touch panel device 351 operation panel 353 touch gesture determination device 354 operation determination unit 355 gesture mode determination unit 356 gesture input information determination unit 357 gesture area determination unit 358 reference parameter storage unit 359 notification unit 362 reference information storage unit 402 Home Appliance 403 Refrigerator 404 Television Receiver 405 Air Conditioner 406 Air Cleaner 407 Ventilator (Range Hood)
408 electric rice cooker (electric jar rice cooker)
409 microwave oven 410 lighting equipment 411 home gateway 413 air purifier 414 electricity meter 415 power supply line (main trunk line)
416 Environment detection unit 417 External server 419 Wide area communication network 421 Input unit 422 Temperature monitoring device 423 Central control unit 424 Electric energy control unit 425 Communication unit 426 Storage device 427 Connection port 428 Duct 429 Electric fan 430 Hood 431 Communication unit 432 Suction port 433 Air outlet 434 Odor sensor 435 Box-shaped main body 436 Blower fan 437 Filter 438 Communication unit 439 Vertical wall 440 Air guide plate 441 Main unit 443 Temperature detection unit 444 Temperature determination circuit 445 Alarm device 446 Communication unit 447 Light receiving unit 481 Menu display unit 482 Menu Selection display section 483 Heating source selection display section 484 Control menu selection display section 485 Linked cooking menu display section 486 Preparation information display section 487 Linked cooking menu name display section 488 Control menu display section (icon)
489 Preheat control menu display (icon)
490 Caution information display section 491L Input key (icon)
491M Input key (icon)
491R Input key (icon)
492 Input key (icon)
493 Input key (icon)
494 Input key (icon)
495 Input key (icon)
496 Input key (icon)
497A induction heating source selector (icon)
497B induction heating source selector (icon)
497C microwave heating source selector (icon)
498 Microwave grill heating source selection part (icon)
499 Linked cooking mode selection part (icon)
500 RG control menu selection unit (icon)
501 mark (icon)
502 Screen switching mark 503 Screen switching mark 504 Name display part (icon) of RG control menu
505 RG control menu temperature display (icon)
506 Reference image display section 507A Auxiliary information display section 507B Auxiliary information display section 509 Preparation work reference image 510 Preparation work reference image 511 Alert information 512 Auxiliary information 513 Process information display section 514 Cooking process information display section 515 Recommended menu display section 516 Supplementary information of recommended menu 517 Supplementary information of recommended menu 518 Cooking reference image of recommended menu 519 Candidate switching mark (icon)
520 Candidate switching mark (icon)
521 Send key display (icon)
522 Stop key display (icon)
523 Detailed display indicator (icon)
525 to 527 display unit 530 to 532 guidance text 550 boiler (steam generator) (fourth heating means HM4)
600 kitchen furniture 601 kitchen 800 refrigerator (refrigerator-freezer)
933 Food component data acquisition unit 1000 Voice input/output device (information processing terminal)
1301 Recipe data providing unit 1324 Inventory information storage unit 1325 Ingredient consumption determination unit CD Recipe data (cooking condition data)
CD1 to CD8 Recipe data CN Cooking execution data DD Food component information NW Network OS Operation status data SD1 Inventory data TB Available period TB1 Available period of recipe data TB2 Available period of cancellation of acquired recipe data TB3 Available to change acquired recipe data Period TMC Touch input mode selection section TX First time limit (first time limit)
US user.

Claims (73)

heating means;
an input operation unit that receives a user's command;
a communication unit that receives recipe data from the outside;
a notification unit having a display unit;
a controller;
The input operation unit has a touch-type input key for selecting cooking content,
The input operation unit transmits a voice input mode corresponding signal to the control device according to the touch state of the input key,
After activating the display unit, the control device displays a standby initial screen on the display unit,
When the control device receives the voice input mode corresponding signal from the input operation unit while the standby initial screen is displayed, the control device enables acquisition of the recipe data via the communication unit, and accepting a control condition setting command for the recipe data;
A heating cooker characterized by: an audio signal receiving unit that receives the control condition setting command by voice and converts it into an electric signal;
2. The heating cooker according to claim 1, further comprising an audio signal analysis section that analyzes the electrical signal from the audio signal reception section. The input key has a function of selecting at least one of a cooking mode by the heating means, a cooking menu by the heating means, a control pattern of the heating means, a heating port by the heating means, and acquisition of the recipe data. The heating cooker according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that there is a The heating means has a first heating means for heating the object to be heated and a second heating means for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber,
The control device is characterized by having a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven with a time difference to perform one cooking. The heating cooker according to any one of claims 1 to 3. further comprising a data acquisition unit that acquires the recipe data via the communication unit;
4. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the control device notifies that the recipe data has been acquired by the data acquisition unit using the display unit, and accepts a signal of the setting command. The heating cooker described. further comprising a data acquisition unit that acquires the recipe data via the communication unit;
6. The heating cooker according to claim 5, wherein the control device displays a reception operation display screen instead of the standby initial screen while the recipe data is being acquired by the data acquisition unit. . When a command 1 for selecting the cooperative cooking mode is received from the input key, the control device displays a first specific screen showing identification information of a specific cooking menu when a permission condition is satisfied. 5. The heating cooker according to claim 4, characterized in that it is displayed on the part. When the command 2 is received from the input key while the first specific screen is displayed on the display unit, the control device displays at least one of information on food ingredients and nutrients related to the cooking menu. 8. The heating cooker according to claim 7, wherein the information is displayed. 8. The heating according to claim 7, wherein when the command 1 is received within a first limited period after the standby initial screen is displayed, the control device acquires the recipe data. Cooking device. The input operation unit determines whether or not it is necessary to switch the voice input mode from the touch state of the input key, and issues the voice input mode support signal,
3. The heating cooker according to claim 2, wherein the control device receives the setting command by voice via the voice signal receiving section after receiving the voice input mode correspondence signal. The heating means has a first heating means for heating the object to be heated, a second heating means for heating the object to be cooked in a heating chamber, and a third heating means for heating the heating chamber. ,
The input key automatically combines a single cooking mode in which the first heating means or the second heating means is used alone, and the second heating means and the third heating means. A function of selecting a combined cooking mode and a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the first heating means, the second heating means and the third heating means are used together in one cooking,
The input operation unit analyzes the touch state of the input key when selecting any one of the single cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, and the cooperative cooking mode, and emits a signal corresponding to the voice input mode. The heating cooker according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that: The input operation unit includes, as the input keys, a first input key for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, a second input key for selecting the combined cooking mode, and a third input key for selecting the single cooking mode. , a start key for commanding the start of each cooking of the single cooking mode, the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode,
12. The heat cooking according to claim 11, wherein the input operation unit issues the voice input mode corresponding signal according to a touch state of at least one of the first input key and the second input key. vessel. The input operation unit includes a touch detection unit that detects a touch operation of the input key, a time measurement unit that measures the continuous time of the touch operation, and a threshold value of the voice input mode based on the measurement result of the time measurement unit. an input mode determination unit that determines whether the
13. The heating cooker according to claim 11 or 12, wherein the voice input mode correspondence signal is transmitted from the determination result of the input mode determination unit. If the recipe data is not acquired within a time limit after displaying the standby initial screen, the control device performs an automatic shutoff process for shutting off the power supply. The heating cooker according to any one of . 3. The control device performs an automatic shutoff process of shutting off the power supply when the control condition setting command by voice is not completed within the time limit after receiving the voice input mode compatible signal. The heating cooker according to any one of 1 to 5. The control device is characterized in that, after displaying the standby initial screen, if none of the first to third input keys is operated within a time limit, the control device performs an automatic shutoff process of shutting off the power. The heating cooker according to claim 12. When the control device receives the voice input mode corresponding signal from the input operation unit, instead of the standby initial screen, displays a specific screen corresponding to one cooking mode,
The heating cooker according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that information on a range of control conditions that can be selected in the voice input mode is reported on the specific screen. When the control device receives the voice input mode corresponding signal from the input operation unit, instead of the standby initial screen, displays a specific screen corresponding to one cooking mode,
The heating cooker according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein information indicating that the voice input mode is set is notified on the specific screen. When the control device receives the voice input mode compatible signal, the control device does not accept input by touch operation from at least one of the first input key to the third input key on the input operation unit. The heating cooker according to claim 12, characterized by: 13. The apparatus according to claim 12, wherein after receiving the voice input mode corresponding signal, the control device cancels the voice input mode when an input from the start key is received to start the cooking operation. heating cooker. When the control device receives the voice input mode corresponding signal from the input operation unit, instead of the standby initial screen, displays a specific screen corresponding to one cooking mode,
displaying at least one of information A indicating that the voice input mode is set on the specific screen or information B regarding a range of selectable control conditions in the voice input mode;
3. The heating cooker according to claim 1, wherein the control device does not start the cooking operation even if the input key is touch-operated unless the input of the control device is completed. The input operation unit includes a touch detection unit that detects a touch operation of the input key, a time measurement unit that measures the continuous time of the touch operation, and an input that transmits measured time data of the time measurement unit to the control device. a signal transmission unit;
3. The heating cooker according to claim 1, wherein the control device includes an input signal analysis unit that determines whether or not the condition of the voice input mode is satisfied from the measured time data. When the recipe data is acquired via the communication unit, the control device restricts reacquisition of the recipe data from the communication unit until the cooking process of the cooking menu to which the recipe data is applied is completed. The heating cooker according to any one of claims 1 to 5. 24. The heat cooking according to claim 23, wherein new recipe data can be acquired when the heat cooking based on the acquired recipe data is canceled by the input operation unit before the cooking process is started. vessel. The input operation unit further has a function setting key,
The control device shifts to a function setting mode when the function setting key is operated,
9. The heating cooker according to claim 8, wherein the function setting mode can set whether or not to display the food component or the nutritional component on the display section or conditions. The input operation unit further has a start key for commanding the start of cooking,
11. The heating cooker according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the setting of the voice input mode is canceled when the start key is used to command the start of cooking from the input operation unit. The input operation section has a first input operation section for the first heating means and a second input operation section for the second heating means,
The input keys each have an input key A arranged on the first input operation section and an input key B arranged on the second input operation section,
The control device validates the touch input of the input key A or the input key B, whichever is earlier, and after completing the input of the control conditions for the cooking mode or the control mode, starts cooking by operating the start key. 12. The heating cooker according to claim 11, wherein the input process with the other input key is not started until a command is received. a first heating means;
a second heating means;
a first input operation unit for receiving a user's command regarding the first heating means;
a second input operation unit for receiving a user's command regarding the second heating means;
a communication unit that receives recipe data from the outside;
a notification unit having a display unit;
a controller;
The first input operation unit has a touch-type input key A for selecting cooking content,
The second input operation unit has a touch-type input key B for selecting cooking content,
The 1 input operation unit instructs the control device to start a voice input mode according to the touch state of the input key A,
The 2-input operation unit instructs the control device to start the voice input mode according to the touch state of the input key B,
When the control device receives a command to start the voice input mode from the second input operation unit, the control device enables acquisition of recipe data related to the second heating means via the communication unit, and Accepts control condition setting commands for
canceling the setting of the voice input mode for the second input operation unit when a command to start cooking using the recipe data is issued from the second input operation unit;
A heating cooker characterized by: 29. The apparatus according to claim 28, characterized in that said control device does not simultaneously accept a command to start said voice input mode for said second input operation unit and a command to start said voice input mode for said first input operation unit. The heating cooker described. The control device validates the touch input of the input key A or the input key B, whichever is earlier, and after completing the input of the control conditions for the cooking mode or the control mode, starts cooking by operating the start key. 30. The heating cooker according to claim 28 or 29, wherein the input process with the other input key is not started until a command is received. a heating cooker for heating an object to be heated;
A cloud server or an information processing terminal connected to the cooking device by wireless communication,
The information processing terminal or the cloud server has a function of transmitting recipe data to the cooking device,
The heating cooker has a function of acquiring the recipe data from the information processing terminal or the cloud server after the standby initial screen is displayed,
The heating cooker has a function of automatically switching from the touch input mode to the voice input mode according to the touch state of the touch input key,
The heating cooker 1 accepts input of control conditions related to the acquired recipe data in the state of the voice input mode;
A cooking system characterized by The heating cooker has a control device that controls the heating means and receives commands from the input operation unit,
The control device displays a standby initial screen after the main power supply is started, and displays a specific screen corresponding to the recipe data when the recipe data is obtained from the information processing terminal or the cloud server. death,
In the voice input mode, the specific screen displays at least one of information A indicating that the voice input mode is set and information B regarding a range of selectable control conditions. 32. The cooking system according to claim 31. The cloud server includes a first server that can communicate with the cooking device, and a second server that can communicate with the first server,
The information processing terminal is capable of communicating with the second server, and has a display operation unit that accepts input and a function of inputting instruction contents by voice,
33. The information processing terminal device according to claim 27 or 32, wherein the information processing terminal has a function of transmitting input contents related to control conditions of the recipe data to the first server via the second server. heating cooking system. The cloud server includes a first server that can communicate with the cooking device, and a second server that can communicate with the first server,
The information processing terminal has a first function of transmitting voice data to the second server, a second function of notifying information received from the second server, and recipe data. and a fourth function of requesting the provision of the food component data of the food to be cooked by the recipe data and the recipe data. 33. The cooking system according to 31 or 32. The cloud server includes a first server that can communicate with the cooking device, and a second server that can communicate with the first server,
The information processing terminal device has a first function of transmitting a voice input command from the user to the second server as voice data, and a second function of notifying the information received from the second server by voice. 33. The cooking system according to claim 31 or 32, which is an audio input/output device having two functions. a heating means for heating an object to be heated;
an input operation unit that receives a user's command;
an audio signal receiver that receives a command uttered by a user;
a communication unit that receives recipe data from the outside;
a notification unit having a display unit;
a controller;
The input operation unit has a plurality of touch-type input keys for selecting one of a plurality of cooking modes,
The input operation unit transmits a detection signal corresponding to the touch state of the input key to the control device,
After activating the display unit, the control device displays a standby initial screen on the display unit,
After activating the display unit, the control device displays information specifying the touch-type input key corresponding to the cooking mode on the display unit in a list state on the guidance screen,
When one of the cooking modes is selected by the input key, the control device determines switching of the voice input mode from the detection signal,
the control device accepting a control condition setting command by voice for the acquired recipe data;
A heating cooker characterized by: 37. The heating cooker according to claim 36, wherein the guidance screen displays a guidance sentence specifying the input key to be operated first for each of the cooking modes. The display unit and the input operation unit constitute a touch panel input device,
The guidance screen is displayed by the touch panel input device,
38. The heating cooker according to claim 36 or 37, wherein touch position information for selecting the cooking mode is displayed on the guide screen. 39. The heating cooker according to claim 38, wherein the detection signal is transmitted to the control device when a touch operation is performed on the display portion of the touch position information. a heating means for heating an object to be heated;
an input operation unit that receives a user's command;
a communication unit that receives recipe data from the outside;
a notification unit having a display unit;
a controller;
The input operation unit has an input key for selecting cooking content and a recipe acquisition key for permitting acquisition of the recipe data,
When the recipe acquisition key is operated, the control device starts a voice input mode,
After activating the display unit, the control device displays a standby initial screen on the display unit,
When the recipe acquisition key is operated while the standby initial screen is being displayed, the control device enables acquisition of the recipe data via the communication unit, and enables acquisition of the recipe data. receiving a control condition setting command in the voice input mode for
A heating cooker characterized by: The input key includes a touch-type input key for selecting a plurality of cooking modes or cooking menus,
When the recipe acquisition key is operated, the input operation unit issues a voice input mode corresponding signal for commanding switching to the voice input mode,
41. The heating cooker according to claim 40, wherein the control device switches to the voice input mode when receiving the voice input mode corresponding signal. 42. The heating cooker according to claim 40 or 41, wherein the input function of said recipe acquisition key becomes effective after said standby initial screen is displayed. When the input function of the recipe acquisition key is enabled, the display section displays a display for prompting the operation of the recipe acquisition key, or the light emitting section corresponding to the recipe acquisition key emits light. The heating cooker according to any one of claims 40 to 42. 44. The heating cooker according to any one of claims 40 to 43, wherein said control device disables an input function of said recipe acquisition key when said recipe data is acquired. a heating means for heating an object to be heated;
an input operation unit that receives a user's command;
a communication unit that receives recipe data from the outside;
a notification unit having a display unit;
a controller;
The display unit and the input operation unit constitute a touch panel input device,
A guidance screen is displayed by the touch panel input device,
On the guidance screen, touch position information for selecting one of a plurality of cooking modes is displayed at the touch key position,
When the portion of the touch position information is touch-operated, switching to the first specific screen displaying the identification information of the cooking menu or the second specific screen displaying the identification information of the control menu,
The touch panel input device has a touch gesture determination device that determines the form of the touch operation in the state of the first specific screen or the second specific screen,
Switching to a voice input mode according to the determination result of the touch gesture determination device;
A heating cooker characterized by: The first specific screen has a first area displaying identification information of the cooking menu and a second area displaying control conditions,
46. The heat cooking according to claim 45, wherein when the fingertip is moved in the direction of the second area while touching the first area, the touch gesture determination device determines whether switching to the voice input mode is possible. vessel. The heating means includes a first heating means for heating the object to be heated by a burner or induction heating, a second heating means for heating the object to be cooked accommodated in the heating chamber, and the second heating means. 47. The heating cooker according to claim 46, further comprising a third heating means for heating the heating chamber by a different heating principle. The control device includes a cooperative cooking mode in which a group consisting of the second heating means and the third heating means and the first heating means are driven with a time difference, A combined cooking mode in which the heating means and the third heating means are driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven, and the first, second, and third heating means are each independently 48. The heating cooker according to claim 47, characterized by having a function of performing a single cooking mode driven by The first specific screen and the second specific screen have a first area and a second area,
In the first area, identification information indicating an object to be cooked for a cooking menu is displayed in the cooperative cooking mode,
49. The heat cooking according to claim 48, wherein at least one of the heating means to be used, the cooking process, or reference information for the user is displayed in the second area in the case of the composite cooking mode. vessel. 50. The heating cooker according to claim 49, wherein an icon displaying support information is displayed in the second area when a touch operation is performed. 50. The apparatus according to any one of claims 45 to 49, characterized in that said first specific screen and said second specific screen display voice input mode display information indicating that voice input is being accepted. heating cooker. a heating cooker for heating an object to be heated;
a first server connected to the cooking device via a network;
an audio input/output device connected to the first server via a network,
The first server has a function of transmitting command data for setting control conditions of a cooking menu to the heating cooker,
The first server has a function of acquiring data received by the voice input/output device from a user's voice input,
The heating cooker has a function of acquiring the recipe data from the first server after the standby initial screen is displayed,
The heating cooker has a function of automatically switching from the touch input mode to the voice input mode according to the touch state of the touch input key,
receiving the command data of the control conditions related to the recipe data acquired from the first server in the state of the voice input mode;
A cooking system characterized by 53. The cooking system according to claim 52, wherein said control device transmits to said first server a voice input mode acceptance start notification indicating that said mode has been switched to said voice input mode. 54. The cooking system according to claim 53, wherein said first server transmits information regarding said voice input mode acceptance start notification to said voice input/output device. a heating means for heating an object to be heated;
an input operation unit having touch-type input keys for receiving user commands;
a communication unit that receives recipe data from the outside;
a notification unit having a display unit;
a transmitter;
a controller;
After activating the display unit, the control device selectably displays the identification information of the cooking mode or the control menu on the display unit,
The input operation unit switches the input mode of the control device to a voice input mode when the cooking mode or the control menu is selected by the input key,
The control device transmits a voice input mode start notification to the outside from the transmission unit,
During a period in which the cooking mode or the control menu is displayed on the display unit, the control device receives a control condition setting command from a user regarding the cooking mode or the control menu;
A heating cooker characterized by: an audio signal receiving unit that receives the control condition setting command by voice and converts it into an electric signal;
56. The heating cooker according to claim 55, further comprising an audio signal analysis section that receives the electrical signal from the audio signal reception section. The input key has a function of selecting at least one of a cooking mode by the heating means, a cooking menu by the heating means, a control pattern of the heating means, a heating port by the heating means, and acquisition of the recipe data. 57. The heating cooker according to claim 55 or 56, characterized in that there is The heating means has a first heating means for heating the object to be heated and a second heating means for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber,
The control device is characterized by having a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven with a time difference to perform one cooking. The heating cooker according to any one of claims 55-57. further comprising a data acquisition unit that acquires the recipe data via the communication unit;
59. The heating cooker according to any one of claims 55 to 58, wherein the control device notifies that the recipe data has been obtained by the data obtaining section by the notifying section. a heating cooker having a signal transmission unit and a communication unit and heating an object to be heated;
a cloud server connected to the cooking device by wireless communication;
an audio input/output device connected to the cloud server via a network,
The cloud server has a function of transmitting command data for setting control conditions for a cooking menu to the cooking device,
The heating cooker has a function of acquiring the recipe data from the cloud server after the standby initial screen is displayed,
The heating cooker has a function of automatically switching from the touch input mode to the voice input mode according to the touch state of the touch input key,
The cooking device transmits a signal indicating the state of the voice input mode from the signal transmission unit to the voice input/output device without going through the network,
The cooking device accepts the command data of the control conditions related to the recipe data acquired from the cloud server in the state of the voice input mode;
A cooking system characterized by The cloud server includes a first server connected to the cooking device via the network, and a second server capable of communicating with the first server and the audio input/output device, respectively,
61. The cooking system according to claim 60, wherein the voice input/output device has a function of transmitting to the second server the contents of the voice input from the user regarding the control conditions of the recipe data. . 60 or 60, wherein the heating cooker transmits an activation signal indicating that the main power supply is turned on to the voice input/output device from the signal transmitting unit without going through the network. 61. The cooking system according to 61. a heating chamber;
heating means;
an input operation unit that receives a user's command;
a communication unit that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
a notification unit having a display unit;
a controller;
The input operation unit has a plurality of input keys,
The input operation unit instructs the control device to start a voice input mode by operating a specific input key among the input keys,
After the main power switch is turned on, the control device receives a recipe data acquisition command from the specific input key, and when receiving the recipe data, determines whether or not a predetermined permission condition is satisfied, If the permission conditions are not satisfied, transmitting a notification of disapproval processing from the communication unit;
A heating cooker characterized by: 64. The heating cooker according to claim 63, wherein the permission condition is at least one of the temperature of the heating chamber, the usage state of the heating means, or a peak cut set value. The heating means includes first heating means for heating the object to be heated by a burner or induction heating, second heating means for heating the object to be cooked accommodated in the heating chamber, and the second heating means. 65. The heating cooker according to claim 64, further comprising a third heating means for heating the heating chamber by a heating principle different from that. 65. The heating cooker according to claim 64, wherein said heating means comprises two types of heating sources that have different heating principles and whose energization is individually controlled by said control device. The control device includes a cooperative cooking mode in which a group consisting of the second heating means and the third heating means and the first heating means are driven with a time difference, A combined cooking mode in which the heating means and the third heating means are driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven, and the first, second, and third heating means are each independently 66. The heating cooker according to claim 65, characterized by having a function of performing a single cooking mode driven by 68. The heating cooker according to any one of claims 63 to 67, characterized in that, when the recipe data does not satisfy the permission condition, the control device displays a disapproval display on the display unit. . 69. The cooking method according to any one of claims 63 to 68, wherein the control device displays reception support information on the display unit when the recipe data does not satisfy the permission conditions. vessel. a heating cooker having a heating chamber and a heating means;
and an information processing terminal connected to the heating cooker by wireless communication,
The information processing terminal has a function of transmitting recipe data to the cooking device,
The input operation unit of the heating cooker has a plurality of input keys, and a voice input mode can be selected by operating a specific input key among the input keys,
The heating cooker has a function of acquiring the recipe data when the specific input key is operated after the standby initial screen is displayed,
When the recipe data is received, the heating cooker determines whether at least one of the heating chamber and the heating means satisfies a permission condition, and if the permission condition is not satisfied, the communication unit sends a notification of disapproval processing to the information processing terminal from
When the information processing terminal receives the notification of the disapproval process, the information processing terminal displays information indicating the disapproval process on the terminal-side display unit;
A cooking system characterized by 71. The heating according to claim 70, wherein the information processing terminal displays reference information for coping with the disapproval process on the terminal-side display unit when receiving the notification of the disapproval process. cooking system. 72. The information processing terminal device according to claim 70 or 71, further comprising an auxiliary information display section for indicating the reason for the disapproval process in the terminal side display section when receiving the notification of the disapproval process. heating cooking system. When the cooking device receives a command for setting a control condition for the recipe data from the information processing terminal device, the cooking device collects state information of the cooking device itself and transmits it to the outside,
the information processing terminal displaying whether or not the communication state of the command is possible based on the state information;
The cooking system according to any one of claims 70 to 72, characterized by:

Images